Item 06 Suspension of Competitive Bidding, Contract Supplements and Budgetary Adjustments for the Martin Luther King Jr. (MLK) Library Renovation Project: (C15000840) (Two-Thirds Vote Required) [Published for 10-Day Review 1/23/2025] PART 3 — Sacramento City Council, February 4, 2025 (part 3 of 9)

Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

H. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

I. Paint visible surfaces of ducts where visible through registers or grilles with a flat, non- specular black paint.

J. Do not paint fire-treated plywood backboards to be used for telephone or electrical equipment unless permitted by authorities having jurisdiction.

K. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces.

L. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch-up painted.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum A September 13, 2024 PAINTING 09 9100-11

3.6 SCHEDULING PAINTING
A. Apply
first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.

B. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

3.7 APPLICATION PROCEDURES
A. Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to the manufacturer's directions.

B. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied.

C. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.

D. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.

E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials no thinner than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer.

F. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled.

G. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime-coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

H. Painted surface shall be considered unacceptable if any of the following are evident under final lighting source (including daylight) for interior surfaces:

1. Visible defects are evident on vertical surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles from a distance of not less than 39-inches (1000 mm).

2. Visible defects are evident on horizontal surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles from a distance of not less than 39-inches (1000 mm).

3. Visible defects are evident on ceiling, soffit and other overhead surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles.

4. When the final coat on any surface exhibits a lack of uniformity of color, sheen, texture, and hiding across full surface area.

5. Coating exhibits lack of full adhesion to surfaces, including but not limited to bubbling, peeling, chipping, and other adhesion defects.

I. Miscellaneous Surfaces and Procedures

1. Exposed mechanical items
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum A September 13, 2024 PAINTING 09 9100-12
a. Finish electric panels, access doors, conduits, pipes, ducts, grilles, registers, vents, a
nd items of similar nature to match the adjacent wall and ceiling surfaces, or as directed.
b. Paint visible duct surfaces behind vents, registers, and grilles flat black. c. Wash metal with solvent, prime, and apply 2 coats of alkyd enamel.

2. Exposed pipe and duct insulation
a. Apply 1 coat of latex paint on insulation which has been sized or primed under other Sections; apply 2 coats on such surfaces when unprepared. b. Match color of adjacent surfaces.
c. Remove band before painting, and replace after painting.

3. Hardware
a. Paint prime coated hardware to match adjacent surfaces. b. Paint metal portions of head seals, jamb seals, and astragal seals to match the color of the door frame unless otherwise directed by the Architect.

4. Wet areas
a. For oil base paints, use 1 percent phencimercuric or 4 percent tetrachlorophenol. b. For water emulsion and glue size surfaces, use 4 percent sodium tetrachlorophenate.

5. Exposed Vents: Apply 2 coats of heat resistant paint approved by the Architect J. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with specified requirements.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: City reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as City deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied:

1. City will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.

3. City may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying-paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

3.9 CLEANING
A. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

B. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site.

C. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum A September 13, 2024 PAINTING 09 9100-13

3.10 PROTECTION
A. Protect
work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting.

Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect.

B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.

C. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

END OF SECTION 09 9100
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Addendum A September 13, 2024 PAINTING 09 9100-14
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 09 9300-1
SECTION 09 9300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface preparation and application of wood stains and clear wood finishes to exterior wood.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 09 9100 Painting: Other exterior coatings.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of stain indicated.

1. Material List: An inclusive list of required stain materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference the specific stain system and application. Identify each exterior wood stain material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.

2. Cross-reference to finish system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

3. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each exterior wood stain.

4. Printout of MPI's (Master Painters Institute) current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the product proposed for use highlighted.

B. Samples for Verification: For each color and stain material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of actual substrates.

1. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required color and texture are achieved.

2. Provide list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application.

3. Submit Samples on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and texture only:
a. Stained Wood: Provide 8- by 10-inch (200- by 250-mm) samples of each stained wood finish to be used on representative surfaces. b. Clear Wood Finish: Provide 8- by 10-inch (200- by 250-mm) samples of each clear wood finish to be used on representative surfaces.

4. Transparent and Stained Finishes: Prepare samples on species and quality of wood to be used in the Work. Re-submit as requested until acceptable sheen, color, and texture are achieved. Label and identify each sample as to location and application.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualifica
tion Data: For Applicator.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra stain materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to City.

1. Quantity: Furnish City with extra stain materials in quantities indicated below:
a. Semitransparent Stain: 5 gal. (18.75 L) of each color applied. b. Clear Wood Finish: 5 gal. (18.75L).

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MPI Standards:

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying exterior wood stains similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain primers, stains, and other finishes through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each finish system indicated and each color selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of finish system and substrate.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of stain color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a. If preliminary stain color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional stain colors selected by Architect at no added cost to City.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:

1. Product name or title of material.

2. Product description (generic classification).

3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.

4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.

5. Thinning instructions.

6. Application instructions.

7. Color name and number.

8. Handling instructions and precautions.

9. VOC content.

B. Store
materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.

1.9 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Temperature Limitations: Apply stains only when temperatures of surfaces to be stained and the surrounding air are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C) for oil-based stain, or between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C) for latex-based stain.

B. Weather Limitations: Do not apply stain in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; when temperatures are less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain temperature and conditions specified before starting or continuing with coating operation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore).

2. Cabot Incorporated, Samuel.

3. Coronado Paint Company (Coronado).

4. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams).

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated.

B. Stain Colors: Match Architect's samples.

C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior stains and finishes applied at project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

1. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L.

2. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.

3. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 09 9300-4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Examine
substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Maximum Moisture Content of Wood Substrates: 15 percent when measured with an electronic moisture meter.

2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes.

3. Begin finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

4. Beginning application of finish system constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrate and conditions.

B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which coatings are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be finished. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and finishing.

1. After completing finishing operations, reinstall items that were removed; use workers skilled in the trades involved. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.

1. Remove surface dirt, oil, or grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil marks by sanding lightly. Remove loose wood fibers by brushing.

2. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew removal and as recommended by stain manufacturer.

3. Countersink steel nails, if used, and fill with putty tinted to final color to eliminate rust leach stains.

D. Apply wood filler paste to open-grain woods, as defined in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual," to produce smooth, glasslike finish.

3.3 APPLICATION
A. Mixing: Mix and prepare stains according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stir stain thoroughly before applying and frequently during application to maintain color consistency.

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and application in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and then strain material before using.

1. Us
e applicators and techniques suited for finish and substrate indicated.

2. Finish surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

C. Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks, runs, ropiness, or other surface imperfections.

D. Minimum Spreading Rate: Apply stain at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to ensure proper penetration. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of stain material being applied.

1. Do not apply stain on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry when recommended by stain manufacturer. Ensure that each coat is dry and hard before applying succeeding coat.

E. Apply stain evenly with brush. Thoroughly stain edges and ends of boards. Brush out excess stain that collects in butts of boards. Avoid staining in direct sunlight.

1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brushes of appropriate size for surface being stained.

2. Drying Time: Allow a minimum of 24 hours between coats unless directed otherwise by manufacturer.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. City reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when finishes are being applied:

1. City Representative will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample finish materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.

3. City Representative may direct Contractor to stop applying finishes if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying materials from Project site, pay for testing, and refinish surfaces finished with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously finished surfaces if, on refinishing with complying materials, the two finishes are incompatible.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded materials from Project site.

1. After completing staining, clean window glass and other surfaces. Remove spattered stain by proper methods without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces.

B. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being stained or not, against damage from staining.

Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and restaining as approved by Architect.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 09 9300-6
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly stained finishes. After completing staining operations
, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.

1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced stained surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA (Painting and Decorating Contractors of America) P1.

END OF SECTION 09 9300
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 1100-1
SECTION 10 1100 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wall-mounted bulletin boards.

B. Magnetic glass markerboards.

C. Locations: Meeting room, incubator space, group study rooms.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated as follows:

1. Tack Assembly: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), mounted on substrate indicated for final Work. Include one panel for each type, color, and texture required.

2. Trim: 6-inch- (152-mm-) long sections of each trim profile including corner section.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of visual display surface indicated and as follows:

1. Visual Display Surface: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), mounted on substrate indicated for final Work. Include one panel for each type, color, and texture required.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For visual display units to include in maintenance manuals.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of visual display surface through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of visual display units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fabrics with the surface-burning characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 1100-2

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver
factory-built visual display boards completely assembled in one piece without joints, where possible. If dimensions exceed maximum manufactured panel size, provide two or more pieces of equal length as acceptable to Architect. When overall dimensions require delivery in separate units, prefit components at the factory, disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the site.

B. Store visual display units vertically with packing materials between each unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Provide anchorage of display cases capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads."

2.2 WALL-MOUNTED TACKBOARDS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for the wall-mounted bulletin boards is based on the manufacturer identified below. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Basis-of-Design (AWP-3): Forbo Bulletin

2. Claridge Products & Equipment, Inc.

3. Ghent Manufacturing Inc.

B. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch- (1.57-mm-) thick, extruded aluminum; of size and shape indicated.

1. Factory-Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard.

C. Natural-Cork Tack Assembly: 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, natural cork sheet with burlap backing factory laminated to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick hardboard backing.

2.3 PROJECTABLE MAGNETIC GLASS MARKER BOARD
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for the projectable glass marker boards is based on the manufacturer identified below.

1. Basis-of-Design: Clarus Float.

2. Bendheim Projectable Magnetic Glass Marker Board.

B. Characteristics:

1. Single sided marker board.

2. Thickness: 5/16-inch.

3. Laminated safety glass.
a. Safety film is not acceptable as alternative to tempered or laminated glass.

4. Dimensions: As indicated on Drawings.

5. Frame: Color to be selected from manufacturers full color range.

6. Mounting Style: Floating.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 1100-3
C. Provide one full box of rare earth magnets for use with each glass marker board.

2.4 MA

TERIALS, GENERAL
A. Hardboard: AHA A135.4, tempered.

B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-M-1, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

C. Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

D. Extruded-Aluminum Bars and Shapes: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063.

E. Aluminum Tubing: ASTM B429/B429M, Alloy 6063.

F. Fasteners: Provide screws, bolts, and other fastening devices made from same material as items being fastened, except provide hot-dip galvanized, stainless-steel, or aluminum fasteners for exterior applications. Provide types, sizes, and lengths to suit installation conditions. Use security fasteners where exposed to view.

2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate bulletin boards to requirements indicated for dimensions, design, and thickness and finish of materials.

B. Use metals and shapes of thickness and reinforcing to produce flat surfaces, free of oil canning, and to impart strength for size, design, and application indicated.

C. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricate units straight and of single lengths, keeping joints to a minimum. Miter corners to neat, hairline closure.

2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

D. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

3.1 EXAM

INATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of connections before installation of motor-operated, sliding visual display units.

C. Examine walls and partitions for proper backing for visual display units.

D. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth where sliding visual display and recessed units will be installed.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove dirt, scaling paint, projections, and depressions that will affect smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install visual display units in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings following manufacturers written instructions.

B. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.

1. Mounting Height: As indicated on Drawings.

3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors to operate smoothly without warp or bind and contact points meet accurately.

Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean visual display units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one cleaning label to visual display surface in each room.

B. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 1100-5

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Cover and protec
t visual display units after installation and cleaning.

END OF SECTION 10 1100
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 1100-6
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 SIGNAGE 10 1400-1
SECTION 10 1400 SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Interior signage for the following:

1. Directional signage, including egress signage.

2. Elevator lobby maps.

3. Stairway floor number signs.

4. Restroom signage.

5. Wall-mounted blade signage.

6. Tactile signs.

7. Life-safety signage.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Sign locations shown on the location plans are for general information only. Prior to installation and as required, arrange meetings with the Architect at the site for final location for all sign items.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of sign.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show mounting methods, grounds, mounting heights, layout, spacing, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details.

1. Provide message list for each sign, including large-scale details of wording, lettering, artwork, and Braille layout.

2. Furnish message list for each sign required, including large scale details of wording and layout of lettering.

3. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors.

4. Furnish full-size spacing templates for individually mounted dimensional letters and numbers.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign, include the following Samples to verify color selected. Resubmit samples until color, texture, sheen, and other specified criteria have been approved.

1. Panel Signs: Full-size samples of each type of sign required.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 SIGNAGE 10 1400-2

2. Dimensional Characters: Full-size Samples of each type of dimensional character (letter
and number) required. Show character style, material, finish, and method of attachment.

3. Acrylic: Show representative color, thickness and surface finish.

4. Casting: Show representative texture, character style, spacing, finish, and method of attachment.

5. Approved samples will be returned for installation into Project.

D. Graphic Images:

1. Submit full size patterns or prints of typical copy layouts and/or graphic elements to be applied on signs. Using layouts on the Drawings as a guide, optically enlarge and hand correct images before submitting to the Architect for approval before fabrication.

2. Finished art of Project symbols and arrows will be provided by the Architect for photo enlargement to full-size dimensions shown on the Drawings. After photo enlargement, submit to the Architect for approval before fabrication.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide the Owner with proper cleaning instructions required for continued maintenance of signs.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. CBC and ADA Requirements: Compliance applies to interior signage, including Braille lettering.

B. Provide signage at public toilet rooms.

C. Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and with code provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Interior Code Signage: Provide signage as required by accessibility regulations and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. These include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Fire doors.
b. Room capacity.
c. Elevator signs.
d. Stairway identification.
e. Live load capacity.
f. Signs for accessible spaces.
g. Area of refuge signs.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer of products.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 SIGNAGE 10 1400-3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MA

NUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Nova display systems
a. GYFORD standoff systems
b. 3form
c. Acrylite

2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Fabricate sign plates of the size, thickness and configuration indicated. Precision- engrave the required letters, numbers or figures with uniform margins, in the letter style and size indicated, or as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard fonts.

1. Protect finished metal surfaces with 2 coats of clear, non-yellowing lacquer.

2. Finish and Contrast. The characters and background of signs shall be eggshell, matte, or other non-glare finish.

3. Characters and symbols shall contrast with their background either light characters on a dark background or dark characters on a light background.

B. Interior Signage: Cast acrylic sheet, transparent, clear, semi-matte or non-glare, 0.125-inch thick, frameless signs, color TBD.

C. Pictograms, General:

1. Pictograms (where provided) shall be accompanied by the equivalent verbal description placed directly below the pictogram. Pictograms are figures that depict what the words are stating.

2. The border dimension of the pictogram shall be 6 in (152 mm) minimum in height (i.e. graphics enclosed within a maximum 6-inch square border).

D. Engraved Copy: Machine engrave letters, numbers, symbols, and other graphic devices into panel sign on face indicated to produce precisely formed copy, incised to uniform depth.

1. Engraved Plastic Laminate: Engrave through exposed face ply of plastic-laminate sheet to expose contrasting core ply.

2. Engraved Metal: Fill engraved copy with enamel.

3. Engraved Opaque Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved copy with enamel.

4. Face-Engraved Clear Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved copy with enamel. Apply opaque background color coating to back face of acrylic sheet.

5. Copy Height: 5/8-inch minimum, 2-inch maximum as recommended by sign manufacturer for required copy.

E. Tactile and Braille Copy: Manufacturer's standard process for producing copy complying with 2022 CBC 11B Division 7 requirements 11B-703.3. Text shall be accompanied by Contracted Grade 2 Raster Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut marks.

1. Panel Material: Opaque acrylic sheet.

2. Raised Characters: At least 5/8 in (16 mm) high, but no higher than 2 in (50 mm).

3. Raised Letters and Numerals: 1/32 in, upper case, SANS SERIF or SIMPLE SERIF type.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 SIGNAGE 10 1400-4

4. Characters: 1/10-inch is required between each dot within a cell, measured from the dot ce
nters. 3/10-inch is required between each cell within a word. Measure from the center of the dots in the second column of the first cell to the center of the dots in the first column of the next cell. Dots must be a minimum of 1/40-inch high at the apex.

5. Braille dots to be 0.025 to 0.037 inches in height per table 11B-703.3.1.

6. Distance between corresponding dots in adjacent cells is to be 3/10 inch F. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide Pantone Matching System (PMS) colored coatings, including inks and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are non-fading for application intended.

G. Symbols of Accessibility: Provide 6-inch- (150-mm-) high symbol fabricated from opaque non-reflective vinyl film, 0.0035-inch (0.089-mm) nominal thickness, with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing suitable for both exterior and interior applications.

2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Mounting Methods: Use concealed fasteners or silicone adhesive fabricated from materials that are not corrosive to sign material and mounting surface.

B. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, INTERIOR SIGNAGE
A. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion and other defects in appearance.

B. Door Signs: Install signs centered on door at height indicated on Drawings.

C. Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches (75 mm) of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door.

D. Install sign items, including all components, in accordance with reviewed Graphic Schedule at locations shown.

E. Install with reviewed manufacturers adhesive or mechanical fasteners after application of finish painting at heights noted.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 SIGNAGE 10 1400-5

3.2 CLEANING
A. Construction
Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

END OF SECTION 10 1400
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 SIGNAGE 10 1400-6
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 SOLID SURFACE TOILET COMPARTMENTS SECTION 10 2113-1
SECTION 10 2113 - SOLID SURFACE TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Solid surface toilet partitions and sight screens, overhead-braced pilasters, headrail braced.

B. Additional cross-bracing as required.

C. Hardware with Non-standard Panel Thickness: Coordinate with items installed under Section 10 2813 Toilet and Bath Accessories.

D. Attachments screws and bolts.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for components, hardware, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition layout and dimensions, panel and door sizes, door swings, elevations, anchorage and mounting details, and finishes.

C. Samples for Verification:

1. Submit three samples 4 x 4 inch in size cut from actual panel construction, illustrating panel pattern.

2. Provide a sample of each type of hardware.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty: Executed special warranty specified in this Section.

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to ADA and applicable California State Title 24 provisions for the physically handicapped.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide 25-year limited warranty under provisions of Section 01700.

B. Warranty to provide for coverage of solid phenolic panels, doors and stiles against breakage, corrosion and delamination.

C. Furnish one-year guarantee against defects in material and workmanship for stainless steel door hardware and mounting brackets.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 SOLID SURFACE TOILET COMPARTMENTS SECTION 10 2113-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFO

RMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Graffiti Resistance: Partition material shall have the following graffiti removal characteristics when tested in accordance with ASTM D6578-00 Standard Practice for Determination of Graffiti Resistance in accordance with Section 9, Graffiti Removal Procedure Using Manual Solvent Rubs:

1. Cleanability: Five required staining agents shall be cleaned off material.

B. Scratch Resistance: Partition material shall have the following characteristics when tested in accordance with ASTM D2197-98 (2002) Standard Test Method for Adhesion of Organic Coating by Scrape Adhesion, using Gardner Stock #PA-2197/ST pointed stylus attachment on scrape tester:

1. Scratch Resistance: Maximum Load Value shall exceed 10 kilograms.

C. Impact Resistance: Partition material shall have the following requirements, when tested in accordance with ASTM D2794-93(1999)e1 Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coating to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact), using .625 inch hemispherical indenter with 2-lb impact weight.

1. Impact Resistance: Maximum Impact Force value shall exceed 30 inch-lbs.

D. Fire Resistance: Partition material shall comply with the following requirements, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials:

1. Smoke Developed Index: Not to exceed 450.

2. Flame Spread Index: Not to exceed 75.

3. Material Fire Ratings:
a. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Class B. b. International Code Council (ICC): Class B.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Basis-of-Design: Bobrick Washroom Equipment Inc.; www.bobrick.com, 1092G.67P duraline Series

PRODUCT
DATA SHEET 1 - Compact Laminate (Solid Phenolic) Toilet Partitions: Bobrick duralineseries.

2.1 DESIGN TYPE::

A. Extended Height
(available in gapless, full-height institutional hardware at the panel; overhead braced and floor to ceiling configurations only).

1. Door/Panel Height: 89 inches (244 cm).

2. Floor Clearance: 1 inch (3 cm).

2.2 PRIVACY STYLE PARTITIONS: NO SIGHTLINES WITH GAP-FREE INTERLOCKING DOORS AND STILES ROUTED 0.300 INCHES (7.6 MM) FROM THE EDGE TO ALLOW 0.175 INCH (4.4 MM) OVERLAP TO PREVENT LINE-OF-SIGHT INTO THE Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 SOLID SURFACE TOILET COMPARTMENTS SECTION 10 2113-3
TOILET COMPARTMENT. PRIVACY STRIPS FASTENED OR ADHERED ONTO THE

PARTITION MATE
RIAL ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE.

2.3 MOUNTING CONFIGURATION:

A. Floor-to-ceiling.

1. Stile Standard Height: As required, 10 feet 0 inches (305 cm) maximum.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - Materials: Solidly fused plastic laminate with matte-finish melamine surfaces; integrally bonded colored face sheets and
black phenolic-resin core.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 3 - Edges: Black; brown edges not acceptable.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 4 - Color:

2.1 AS SELECTED BY ARCHITECT FROM MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD

DURALINE
SERIES COMPACT GRADE LAMINATE COLOR RANGE.

2.2 AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS.

2.3 OTHER COLOR AS SELECTED BY ARCHITECT BASED ON MANUFACTURERS RANGE AND CONFIRMED BY LOCAL MANUFACTURER REPRESENTATIVE.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 5 - Fire Resistance:

2.1 NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION/INTERNATIONAL BUILDING

CODE INTERIOR WALL
AND CEILING FINISH: CLASS B / UNIFORM BUILDING
CODE: CLASS II.

A. Flame Spread Index (ASTM E 84): 30 for panels and stiles.

B. Smoke Developed Index (ASTM E 84): 55 for panels, 20 for stiles.

2.2 NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION/INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE INTERIOR WALL AND CEILING FINISH: CLASS A / UNIFORM BUILDING CODE: CLASS I.

A. Flame Spread Index (ASTM E 84): 15-25 for panels, stiles and doors.

B. Smoke Developed Index (ASTM E 84): 25 - 105 for panels, 20-90 for stiles.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 6 - Finished Thickness:

2.1 STILES AND DOORS: 3/4 INCH (19 MM).

2.2 PA NEL
S AND SCREENS: 1/2 INCH (13 MM).

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 7 - Stiles: Floor-anchored stiles furnished with expansion shields and threaded rods.

2.1 LEVELING DEVICES: 7 GAUGE, 3/16 INCHES (5 MM) THICK, CORROSION-

RESISTANT, CH

ROMATE-TREATED, DOUBLE ZINC-PLATED STEEL ANGLE
LEVELING BAR BOLTED TO STILE; FURNISHED WITH 3/8 INCH (10 MM) Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 SOLID SURFACE TOILET COMPARTMENTS SECTION 10 2113-4

DIAMETER THREADED RODS, HEX NUTS, LOCK WASHERS, FLAT WASHERS,

SPACER SLEEVES, EXPANSION ANCH
ORS, AND SHOE RETAINERS.

2.2 STILE SHOES: ONE-PIECE, 22 GAUGE (0.8 MM), 18-8, TYPE 304 STAINLESS STEEL, 4 INCH (102 MM) HEIGHT; TOPS WITH 90 DEGREE RETURN TO STILE. ONE-PIECE SHOE CAPABLE OF ADAPTING TO 3/4 INCH (19 MM) OR 1 INCH (25 MM) STILE

THICKNESS AND CAPABLE OF BEING FASTENED (BY CLIP) TO STILES STARTING AT WALL LINE.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 8 - Wall Posts: Pre-drilled for door hardware, 18-8, Type 304, 16 gauge (1.6 mm) stainless stee
l with satin finish; 1 inch (25 mm) x 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) x 58 inches high (1473 mm).

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 9 - Anchors: Expansion shields and threaded rods at floor connections as applicable. Threaded rods secured to supports above ceiling as applicable. Supports above ceiling furnished and installed as Work of Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 10 - Hardware:

2.1 COMPLIANCE: OPERATING FORCE OF LESS THAN 5 LBS. (2.25 KG).

2.2 EMERGENCY ACCESS:

HINGES, LATCH ALLOW DOOR TO BE LIFTED OVER
KEEPER FROM OUTSIDE COMPARTMENT ON INSWING DOORS.

2.3 MATERIALS: 18-8, TYPE 304, HEAVY-GAUGE STAINLESS STEEL WITH SATIN FINISH.

2.4 DOORSTOPS: PREVENTS INSWINGING DOORS FROM SWINGING OUT BEYOND STILE; ON OUTSWING DOORS, DOORSTOP PREVENTS DOOR FROM SWINGING IN BEYOND STILE.

2.5 FASTENING: HARDWARE IS SECURED TO DOOR AND STILE WITH PIN-IN-HEAD TORX STAINLESS STEEL MACHINE SCREWS. HINGES, LATCH AND OPTIONAL

DOOR STOPS SECURED TO DOOR WITH PIN-IN-HEAD TORX STAINLESS STEEL MACHINE SCREWS INTO FACTORY-INSTALLED, THREADED BRASS INSERTS.

FASTENERS FOR HINGES LATCH AND OPTIONAL DOOR STOPS SECURED DIRECTLY INTO CORE NOT ACCEPTABLE.

A. Threaded Brass Inserts: Factory-installed; withstand direct pull force exceeding 1500 lbs. (680 kg) per insert.

2.6 CLOTHES HOOKS: PROJECTING NO MORE THAN 1-1/8 INCH (29 MM) FROM FACE OF DOOR.

2.7 DOOR LATCH: TRACK OF DOOR LATCH PREVENTS INSWING DOORS FROM SWINGING OUT BEYOND STILE; ON OUTSWING DOORS, DOOR KEEPER Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 SOLID SURFACE TOILET COMPARTMENTS SECTION 10 2113-5
PREVENTS DOOR FROM SWINGING IN BEYOND STILE; 16 GAUGE (1.6 MM) SLIDING DOOR LATCH, 14 GAU
GE (2 MM) KEEPER.

2.8 LOCKING: DOOR LOCKED FROM INSIDE BY SLIDING DOOR LATCH INTO KEEPER.

2.9 HINGE TYPE:

A. Standard.

1. Balanced, with field-adjustable cam to permit door to be fully closed or partially open when compartment is unoccupied.

B. Full-Height Institutional Hinge.

1. Hinges: 16 gauge (1.6 mm) stainless steel, self-closing, 3 section hinges.

2.10 MOUNTING BRACKETS:

A. Standard concealed.

1. Mounting Brackets: Mounted inside compartment; exposed brackets on exterior of compartment not acceptable with the exception of outswing doors.

B. Full-Height.

1. Mounting Brackets: 18 gauge (1.2 mm) stainless steel and extend full height of panel.

2. U-Channels: Secure panels to stiles.

3. Angle Brackets: Secure stiles-to-walls and panels to walls.

4. 2.11 FABRICATION
A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.

1. Provide overhead braces with sloped and contoured profile that makes them difficult to grip in order to avoid students hanging from partitions.

B. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide, in- swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 34-inch- (863-mm-) wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.

C. Urinal screens:

1. Integral-Flange, Wall-Hung Urinal Screens: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.0269 inch (0.7 mm).

D. Finish Thickness:

1. Partition Panels: 1/2-inch (13 mm).

2. Pilasters: 3/4-inch (19 mm).

3. Stiles and Doors: 3/4-inch (19 mm).

2.12 FINISHES
A. Solid Color Rei
nforced Composite Panel Finish:

1. Facing Finish: One color and pattern in each room.

2. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, with manufacturer's standard solid color reinforced composite core.

B. Stainless Steel Surfaces: No. 4 satin finish.

C. Exposed Steel Surfaces: Polished chrome plated.

D. Aluminum: Clear anodized.

E. Non-ferrous Surfaces: Polished chrome plated.

2.13 ACCESSORIES
A. Plinth: ASTM A666, Type 304 22-gauge (0.8-mm) stainless steel with satin finish, one- piece, 4-inch high, with adjustable screw jack; secured in place with concealed screws and capable of being fastened (by clip) to stiles starting at wall line.

1. Top shall have 90° return to stile.

B. Mounting Brackets and Fasteners: Stainless steel.

1. Mounting Brackets: Mounted inside compartment.

2. Use through bolted, pin-in-head Torx sex bolt fasteners at locations connecting panels- to-stiles. Provide bolted fasteners capable of withstanding direct pull force exceeding 1,500 lbs. per fastener.

3. Wall Mounted Urinal Screen Brackets: 11 gauge (3 mm) double thickness.

C. Leveling Device: 7-gauge, 3/16" (5-mm) hot rolled steel bar; chromate-treated and zinc- plated; through-bolted to base of solid color reinforced composite stile.

D. Headrail: satin finish, extruded anodized aluminum (.125 / 3-mm thick) with anti-grip profile.

E. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, theft proof type, heavy duty extruded aluminum brackets.

F. Through Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel with tamperproof heads.

G. Steel Plate Reinforcement: Carbon steel, prepared for fasteners, 1/8 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that openings are ready to receive Work.

B. Verify field measurements are as shown on Shop Drawings.

C. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, bracing, and plumbing fixtures.

3.2 ERECTION
A.

Erect in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install partition components secure, plumb and level.

C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls and floors using appropriate anchor devices.

D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets with through bolts and nuts. Locate headrail joints at pilaster centerline.

E. Anchor urinal screen panels to walls with two panel brackets.

F. Provide 1/2 inch space between wall surface and panels or pilasters.

G. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.

1. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets with through bolts and nuts. Locate headrail joints at pilaster center line.

2. Provide for adjustment of floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster. Conceal floor fastenings with plinths.

H. Partition Hardware:

1. Equip each toilet stall door with top and bottom hinges, and door latch.

2. Install door strike keeper on each pilaster in alignment with door latch.

3. Equip each toilet stall door with one coat hook and bumper.

3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb or Level: 1/8 inch.

B. Maximum Misplacement from Intended Position: 1/8 inch.

3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and align door hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edges of doors. Clearance space not to exceed 3/16 inch.

B. Adjust door hinges so that free movement is attained and will locate in-swinging doors in partial open position when unlatched. Return out-swinging doors to closed position.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

B. Remove protective coverings. Clean surfaces and hardware.

Replace damaged c
omponents.

END OF SECTION 10 2113
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 SOLID SURFACE TOILET COMPARTMENTS SECTION 10 2113-9
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION 10 2623-1
SECTION 10 2623 IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Bumper rails in Storage Rooms.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, fire-test- response characteristics, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each impact-resistant wall-protection unit.

B. Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall-protection unit showing locations and extent.

Include sections, details, attachments to other work, backing required, and fasteners.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Wall Guards: 12 inches (300 mm) long. Include examples of joinery, corners, end caps, top caps, and field splices.

2. Protection Sheet: 12-inch (300 mm) square.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material Test Reports: For each impact-resistant plastic material.

B. Material Certificates: For each impact-resistant plastic material, signed by manufacturer.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each impact-resistant wall-protection unit to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Corner-Guard Covers: Full-size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent of each type, color, and texture of units installed, but no fewer than two, 4-foot- (1.2- m-) long units.

B. Include mounting and accessory components. Replacement materials shall be from same production run as installed units.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source
Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall-protection units through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of impact- resistant wall-protection units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant, plastic wall-protection units with surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store impact-resistant wall-protection units in original undamaged packages and containers inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.

1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) during the period plastic materials are stored.

2. Store plastic wall-protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C). a. Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position.

1.9 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant wall-protection units until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F (21 deg C) for not less than 72 hours before beginning installation and for the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, and other construction contiguous with impact-resistant wall-protection units by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide components identical to those tested in accordance with ASTM E84 for fire performance characteristics indicated. Identify components with appropriate markings from the testing organization.

1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.

2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.

3. Impact Strength: Provide components with minimum impact resistance of 25.4 ft. lbs per sq.
ft. when tested in accordance with ASTM D256 (Izod impact, ft. lbs per inch notch).

1. Balco, Inc.

2. Bobrick.

3. Construction Specialties, Inc.

4. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems; Division of InPro Corporation.

5. Or approved equal.

2.3 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
A. Bumper Rails: Nominal 8-inch high by 0.06 thick plastic sheet adhered to finished wall.

1. Mounting Type: Surface mounted flush on wall with adhesive.

2. Rails: Impact- resistant plastic, minimum 0.060inch thick, with tapered top and bottom edges.

3. Adhesive: Construction grade adhesive supplied by manufacturer.

4. VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

5. Color: Custom to match wall color (1 color total).

2.4 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Rigid Plastic: ASTM D1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, non- PVC material with integral color throughout; thickness as indicated.

1. Impact Resistance: Minimum 25.4 ft-lbf/in. (1356 J/m) of notch when tested according to ASTM D256, Test Method A.

2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D543.

3. Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D635.

4. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

5. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Colors and Textures of Plastic Material: Provide material that matches selections made from the manufacturer's full range of standard colors and textures.

C. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended for use and finish indicated, but with not less than strength and durability properties in ASTM B221 for 6063-T5.

D. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with components, hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened. Use theft-proof fasteners where exposed to view.

2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate impact-resistant wall-protection units to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION 10 2623-4
B. Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly.

Disassemble only as
necessary for shipping and handling.

C. Fabricate with tight seams and joints, with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkling, chipping, uneven coloration, dents, or other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, fire rating, and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners.

2. For impact-resistant wall-protection units attached with adhesive or foam tape, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall- protection system components.

B. Prior to installation clean substrates to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the required field-verified dimensions.

B. Install plumb, level, and true to line without distortion. Do not use material with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished work.

C. Install aluminum retainers, mounting brackets, and other accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

D. Do not install rigid plastic wall protection unless temperature at the time of installation is between 65-75ºF (18-24ºC) and be maintained for at least 48 hours after the installation to allow for proper adhesive set up.

1. Relative Humidity: Do not exceed 80%.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Upon completion, clean plastic covers and accessories using standard ammonia-based household cleaning agent. Clean metal components in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION 10 2623-5
B. Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from installation upon completion of work and leave installat
ion in neat, clean condition.

C. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

END OF SECTION 10 2623
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION 10 2623-6
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 2813-1
SECTION 10 2813 COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Toilet Accessories:

1. Warm air dryers.

2. Toilet tissue dispensers.

3. Seat-cover dispensers.

4. Sanitary-napkin disposal units.

5. Hand soap dispensers.

6. Roll hand towel dispensers.

7. Grab bars.

8. Mirror units.

9. Trash receptors.

B. Underlavatory guards.

C. Custodial Accessories:

1. Mop and broom holders.

D. See Drawings for schedules.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide for each toilet accessory item specified, including construction details relative to materials, dimensions, gages, profiles, mounting method, specified options, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Identify where cutouts are required in other work, including templates, substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchorage devices.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty: Executed special warranty specified in this Section.

B. Maintenance Data: Instructions, including replaceable parts and service recommendations.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish accessory manufacturers' standard inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in concrete or built into masonry. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordination:

Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid interference with and ensure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of toilet accessory items.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to City and signed by manufacturer agreeing to replace units that deteriorate within specified warranty period indicated below:

1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Project Acceptance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for the toilet accessories is based on the manufacturer identified below. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Basis-of-Design: Bobrick.

2. Dyson.

3. Sloan.

4. Gork Matic.

5. Approved equal.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish, 0.034-inch (22-gage) minimum thickness.

B. Mirror Glass: Nominal 6.0-mm (0.23-inch) thick, conforming to ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, and with silvering conforming to ASTM C1503, electro-plated copper coating, and protective organic coating.

C. Chrome Plating: ASTM B456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).

D. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.

E. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A153, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, or of galvanized steel where concealed.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Only a maximum 1-1/2-inch-diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo, as approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of toilet or bath accessory units. On either interior surface not exposed to view or back surface, provide additional identification by either a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate, indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 2813-3
B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units with
tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous stainless steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible.

C. Recessed and Semi-Recessed Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all-welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors or access panels with full-length, stainless steel piano hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed.

D. Framed Mirror Units, General: Fabricate frames for glass mirror units to accommodate wood, felt, plastic, or other glass edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that will permit rigid, tamperproof glass installation and prevent moisture accumulation.

1. Provide galvanized-steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (22 gage) and full mirror size, with nonabsorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler material.

E. Mirror Unit Hangers: Heavy-duty wall brackets of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove that will permit rigid, tamperproof, and theftproof installation.

F. Keys: Provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring internal access for servicing, resupply, etc. Provide minimum of six keys to Owners Representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install toilet accessory units according to manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate as recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Apply sealant to perimeter between accessories and wall surface where accessory edge is permanent.

C. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's instructions for type of substrate involved.

D. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, complying with ASTM F446.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly.

Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 2813-4
C. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces strictly according to manufacturer's recommendations after removing tempora
ry labels and protective coatings.

3.3 SCHEDULE
A. Electric hand dryers: Dyson V
B. Toilet Paper/Seat Cover Dispenser
C. Soap Dispenser: Sloan SJS-1650/SJS-1750. Note: Confirmation of specific unit to be confirmed by City.

D. Towel dispenser: Tork Matic Hand Towel Dispenser Model #461023, In-wall recessed, stainless steel.

END OF SECTION 10 2813
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 4400-1
SECTION 10 4400 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fire extinguishers and cabinets.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection cabinets.

1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification.

2. Cabinets: Materials description for extinguisher and defibrillator cabinets include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style and door construction, door style and materials.

3. Installation instructions for each product specified.

4. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing recessed-, semi recessed-, or surface-mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction.

B. Shop Drawings: For extinguisher and defibrillator cabinets. Submit shop drawings showing each size and type of defibrillator cabinet required, dimensions, construction, and anchorages.

1. Include details of each component with identification of material and finish.

2. Include layout of graphic messages drawn to scale with the required letter style.

3. Schedules showing each type of cabinet to ensure proper fit and function.

4. Indicate installation procedures and accessories required for a complete installation.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples 6 by 6 inches square.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements.

B. Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 4400-2
B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."
C.

Fire Extinguishers: Provide extinguishers which are UL listed with UL listing mark for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher.

1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets and backing requirements to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for the fire protection specialties is based on the manufacturer identified below. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Basis-of-Design: Larsen's Manufacturing Company; Architectural Series.

2. J.L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group; Cosmopolitan Series.

3. Or approved equal.

2.2 EXTINGUISHERS
A. Dry Chemical Type: UL 299, cast steel tank, with pressure gage; UL Rating 3A-40AB:C.

2.3 CABINETS
A. Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated.

1. Trim Type:
a. Exposed Flat Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend) of 5/16 inch.

B. Door Material: Formed, enameled 18 gage, hollow metal design, reinforced for flatness and rigidity.

1. Finish: Painted similar to adjacent wall surface.

C. Door Style: Basis-of-Design: Larsens Mfg., Vertical duo panel with frame with identification lettering, or accepted equal.

1. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER".
1) Location: Applied to cabinet door.
2) Application Process: Silk-screened.
3) Lettering Color: Red.
4) Orientation: Vertical.

1. Acrylic Sheet
Color: Clear transparent acrylic sheet.

E. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

1. Handle: Manufacturer's standard.

2. Hinge Type: Continuous, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open 180 degrees.

3. Lock: Steel cam type designed to permit opening of the cabinet door in and emergency by pulling sharply on the handle.
a. Factory Applied Lettering: "IN CASE OF FIRE ONLY - PULL FIRMLY ON HANDLE".

F. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Manufacturer's standard for cabinet.

2.4 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

B. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), 3 mm thick, with Finish 1 (smooth or polished).

2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.

1. Weld joints and grind smooth.

2. Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428-inch- (1.1-mm- ) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) thick, fire- barrier material.
a. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

B. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams. Form perimeter trim accurately.

C. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.

1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.

2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

D. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.

E. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide cam latch.

F. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth.

2.6 FINISHES
A. Extinguisher: Steel, red enamel color.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 4400-4
B. Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Factory-finished white baked enamel finish.

C. Cabinet Int
erior: Factory-finished white baked enamel finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.

B. Identify locations intended for installation of cabinets.

C. Notify Fire Marshal to allow inspection and adjustment of final locations of extinguishers.

Obtain approval of locations from Fire Marshal prior to installation.

D. Examine walls and partitions for thickness and framing for cabinets to verify cabinet depth and mounting prior to cabinet installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, 27 inches from finished floor to inside bottom of cabinet.

C. Install fire-rated cabinets in rated wall as required to maintain fire separation integrity of partition.

D. Maintain acoustical rating in walls with insulation around recessed box.

E. Attach mounting brackets and fire extinguisher cabinets securely to studs or backing plates, square, plumb and level, in compliance with their manufacturer's instructions; do not attach to gypsum board with Molly or toggle bolts.

F. Secure rigidly in place.

G. Touch-up damaged finish, when the results are acceptable to the Architect, otherwise replace damaged components, at no cost to the Owner.

H. Place extinguishers in each cabinet.

I. Assume one extinguisher per 75 foot radius (maximum 75 foot travel distance from any given point to an extinguisher) per NFPA 10 or by AHJ.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 4400-5
B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection specialties
are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

C. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

D. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

E. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire-protection cabinet manufacturer.

F. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION 10 4400
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 4400-6
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 METAL STORAGE SHELVING 10 5613 - 1
SECTION 10 5613 METAL STORAGE SHELVING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cantilever-bracket shelving supported by wall-mounted standards.

1. Location: Mezzanine.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 11 5123 Library Stack System.

1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of blocking and backing required for installation of metal storage shelving attached to wall assemblies.

B. Coordinate locations and installation of metal storage shelving that may interfere with ceiling systems including lighting, HVAC, and sprinklers.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for metal storage shelving.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal storage shelving, including upright-to-shelf/arm connections, lateral bracing, and attachments to other work.

Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and relationship to other work.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following components, of size indicated below.

1. Uprights: 12 inches (305 mm) long.

2. Shelves: Full size, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) wide by 12 inches (305 mm) deep.

3. Brackets: Full size.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For metal storage shelving to include in maintenance manuals.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Shelves: Six full-size units for each type of shelving indicated.

2. Clamps: T
hirty units for each type of shelving indicated.

3. Brackets: Sixteen units for each type of shelving indicated.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain metal storage shelving through one source from a single manufacturer.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver metal storage shelving palleted, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage.

1.10 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install metal storage shelving until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is completed and dry, and ambient temperature is being maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Provide metal storage shelving capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads."

2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each type of metal storage shelving is based on the product named.

1. Basis-of-Design: E-Z Shelving Systems, Inc.; Cantilever shelving and shelving hardware.

2.3 MATERIALS
A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with G90 zinc (galvanized) coating.

2.4 CANTILEVERED SHELVING COMPONENTS
A. General: Factory-formed, field-assembled, freestanding, cantilever-supported metal storage shelving system; designed for shelves to span between and be supported by steel brackets, with shelves adjustable over the entire height of shelving unit. Fabricate shelf units so each unit is independent.

1. 100 lbs/sq ft min. load-carrying capacity.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 METAL STORAGE SHELVING 10 5613 - 3
B. Uprights: Fabricated from 0.0785-inch- (2.0-mm-) thick steel sheet, with slots or holes at 2 inches (50 mm) oc for shelf bracket
s.

C. Brackets: Fabricated from 0.108-inch- (2.8 mm-) thick steel.

1. Provide double-shelf brackets for adjoining shelves and single-shelf brackets for end shelves.

2. Supply sufficient quantity of steel clamps for connecting brackets to uprights and shelves.

D. Shelves: Fabricated from 0.064-inch- (1.60-mm-) thick steel sheet, with slots or holes for connection to shelf brackets. Fabricate shelves with vertical front that is flanged and returned.

1. Load-Carrying Capacity: 100 lbs/sq ft minimum.

E. Shelf Quantity: As indicated on Drawings.

F. Overall Unit Width: As indicated on Drawings.

G. Overall Unit Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

H. Overall Unit Height: As indicated on Drawings.

I. Finish: Stainless steel, Type 304.

2.5 FABRICATION
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Fabricate metal storage shelving square and rigid with uprights plumb and true, and shelves flat and free of dents or distortion. Fabricate connections to form a rigid structure, free of buckling and warping.

C. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.

D. Form edges and corners free of sharp edges or rough areas. Fold back and crimp exposed edges of unsupported sheet metal to form a 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide hem on the concealed side; ease edges of metal plate to radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1.0 mm).

E. Form metal in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications to receive hardware, fasteners, and similar items.

G. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges.

H. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply
with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish all steel surfaces, components, and accessories except prefinished stainless-steel and chrome-plated surfaces.

2.7 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A. General: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.

B. Bright, Directional Polish: No. 4 finish.

C. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Examine floors for suitable conditions where metal storage shelving will be installed.

C. Examine walls to which metal storage shelving will be attached for properly located blocking, grounds, or other solid backing for attachment of support fasteners.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install metal storage shelving level, plumb, square, rigid, and true.

1. Install seismic supports and bracing as recommended by manufacturer and authorities having jurisdiction, and as required for stability. Extend and fasten members to supporting structure.

2. Install shelves in each shelving unit at spacing indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, at equal spacing.
a. Install clamps at each upright for support of each shelf; with clamps fully engaged in upright perforations.

3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Verify that shelves adjust easily and properly.

B. Touch up marred finishes or replace metal storage shelving that cannot be restored to factory- finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by metal storage shelving manufacturer.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 METAL STORAGE SHELVING 10 5613 - 5
C. Replace metal storage shelving that has been damaged or has deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or simil
ar minor repair procedures.

3.4 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

END OF SECTION 10 5613
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 METAL STORAGE SHELVING 10 5613 - 6
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 LIBRARY STACK SYSTEMS 11 5123-1
SECTION 11 5123 LIBRARY STACK SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Library stack systems, including the following, as required for complete installation and as indicated:

1. Single and double loaded stack type shelving systems.

2. Cantilever type stacks.

3. Custom stacks.

4. Accessories.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 10 5613 Metal Storage Shelving: Shelving on Mezzanine.

1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of framing and reinforcements for support of library stack system.

B. Coordinate size, location, and requirements of the following:

1. Overhead equipment supports.

2. Shelving base supports.

3. Integration of shelving with raised flooring system.

C. Sequencing: Coordinate shelving installation with requirements of related work.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature including information regarding each type of library bookstack equipment.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each type of library bookstack range equipment, showing details, dimensions, layout of installation, and methods of anchorage to structure.

1. Include 8-1/2" by 11" elevations of shelving types indicated on shelving schedule.

C. Samples: Submit samples of each exposed finish required.

1. Submit sample of end panel with custom wood sign holder.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certification: Submit manufacturers certification that products comply with requirements of the specifications. A list of deviations must be provided for all items not Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 LIBRARY STACK SYSTEMS 11 5123-2
meeting the specifications. The document must include appropriate justification of the alternate proposed design.

Seismic Certificate: Submit detailed certification by structural engineer licensed in California indicating system complies with applicable codes and Contract Documents for seismic design.

1. Upon request of authorities, submit calculations of seismic forces for fully loaded bookstacks, clearly indicating compliance with seismic design requirements.

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide library shelving by one manufacturer for entire Project with minimum five years successful experience in manufacture of shelving comparable to those required.

B. Installer Qualifications: Firm acceptable to manufacturer and with minimum five years successful experience in installation of shelving systems comparable to those required.

1. Installer shall have Class C-61 Limited Specialty Contractor license.

2. Experienced in installation of shelving for projects of scope comparable to that of this Project within last 5 years and able to document experience of 3 such projects by listing project locations, their construction costs, and names and addresses of their Owners, Owners representatives, or Contractors who will attest to supplier/installers record of cooperation with the Architect and Contractor.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain library stack system through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of library stack systems and are based on the specific system indicated.

1. Do not modify requirements, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site. Review methods and procedures related to installation of library stack system including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Meet with Architect, Owner, Owner's insurer if applicable, shelving Installer, access flooring Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects stack system.

2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Review methods and procedures related to shelving installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

4. Examine raised flooring conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening.

5. Review structural loading limitations of raised flooring during and after shelving installation.

6. Review temporary protection requirements for shelving system during and after installation.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver library stack system and equipment to Project site when spaces to receive them have been completed, including finish flooring installation.

B. Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering of polyethylene film or other suitable material.

C. Label factory packages to indicate contents.

D. Unload materials carefully and store on clean, dry surface or raised platform in safe area protected from weather.

1.9 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install library stack system until building is enclosed, wet work and utility roughing-in are complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.10 WARRANTY
A. Submit a written warranty, executed by Contractor, Installer and Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace.

B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace units that fail in materials, fabrication, or installation within the specified warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to, not limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under Contract Documents.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Failure of operating components.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal wear.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion for defects in materials.

3. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion for fabrication and installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Aurora MJ Industries System 300 Shelving Systems and Library Furnishings.

2. Montel, Inc./Aetnastak, Represented by The Corner Office Inc.

3. Spacesaver, Systems and Spac
e.

4. Estey Cantilever Library Shelving

5. Or accepted equivalent.

2.2 PERFO RMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.

Design stacks as indicated on Drawings, cantilever type, unit construction, designed with individual frame assemblies.

1. Welded frame every other unit and starter and adder combinations are not acceptable.

2. Commercial and case type shelving shall not be considered.

3. Modular Construction: Components of stack system may be divided for rearrangement without procuring additional components.

4. Bracing that prevents insertion of oversize material (past center line) on any base or adjustable shelf is not acceptable.

5. Completed Installation: Neat and finished appearances, free of exposed sharp edges and projections.

B. Design and anchor shelving for forces equivalent to requirements of CBC for Seismic Category CD and I-1.0.

C. Design system, including columns, bases, connections, and anchorages, capable of resisting lateral seismic force of FR+0.30 Wp in any direction, acting simultaneously with vertical seismic force equal to one third of horizontal force Fp.

1. Allowable stresses and other design criteria shall be as permitted by referenced code.

2. Wp is defined as the total weight of the shelving system plus 50 psf of shelving to account for book storage.

3. Investigate stresses and deflections for shelves fully loaded in combination with seismic forces, and loaded one side in combination with seismic forces.

4. Anchor shelving to structure, regardless of height.

D. Use anchorages with specified drilled-in anchors at ICC-ES approved allowable capacities without the on third increase in allowable stress permitted in CBC.

E. Manufacturer shall be prepared, upon request, to submit calculations for design and anchorage of stacks, prepared by a structural engineer licensed in the State of California.

F. Overhead bracing and bracing between stacks shall not be permitted.

2.3 MATERIALS
A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A36/A36M, cold-rolled sheet, commercial quality, Class 1, matte finish, stretcher-leveled, free of scale and imperfections, with consistent texture and smoothness.

B. Fasteners: Cadmium-plated or zinc-plated steel, manufacturer's standard types and sizes.

2.4 BOOKSTACK RANGE UNITS
A. Types and Sizes: As indicated on Drawings.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 LIBRARY STACK SYSTEMS 11 5123-5
B. Construction: Fabricate individual units with support provided by columns slotted to receive cantilevered shelve
s which are completely adjustable in 1-inch increments.

1. Freestanding Ranges: Fully welded construction for rigidity.

2. Provide marks every three inches to facilitate visual positioning and adjustment of shelves.

C. Upright Posts: Manufacturer's standard tubular or back-to-back channel design; size,-gauge, and reinforcement as needed for loading, but not less than 16-gauge.

D. Bottom Spreader Channels: Minimum 16-gauge welded channel construction; complete frame shall be rigid without sway braces, gusset plates, angle braces, and other obstructions.

E. Top Spreader Tube: Minimum 16-gauge welded tubular construction.

F. Closed-Base Shelf: Minimum 18-gauge construction with front and rear faces formed 3/4- inch high and box formed with no less than four 90 degree bends.

1. Surface of Bottom Shelf: Flush with top surface of bottom spreader.

2. Provide two piece base shelves for double face units.

3. Base Shelf Support Capacity: Minimum 50 psf with maximum 3/16-inch deflection.

4. Overall actual dimension shall not exceed nominal base shelf depth plus 3/8-inch.

G. Base Shelf Supports: Minimum 16-gauge steel with front and top faces flanged on 5/16-inch radius; exposed corner smoothly rounded.

1. Design for connection with supports; allow for 5/16-inch bolted connection at bottom allowing adjoining base shelf supports to be bolted together to preserve alignment.

2. Set bolts in indentations sufficiently deep to prevent damage to books on base shelf.

H. Leveling: Minimum 11-gauge steel threaded clip welded to each frame upright below bottom channel spreader; provide leveling glides to allow for maximum leveling on irregular floors.

I. Shelf Brackets: Minimum 16-gauge with front, top and bottom faces flanged with approximate 5/16-inch return; design to allow shelf adjustment upward and downward without disturbing adjacent shelves.

J. Adjustable Flat and Sloped Shelves: Design to support not less than 50 lbs. per sq. ft., with 3/16-inch maximum deflection, but not less than 18-gauge with 3-bend edge construction.

1. Provide adjustable flat and sloped shelves with integral low-back

2. Provide adjustable flat and sloped slotted adjustable shelves with integral slotted backstop and shelf dividers.

K. Slotted Multimedia Display Shelf: Sloped 18-gauge shelf with 3-bend edge construction, integral slotted backstop and shelf dividers.

L. Single Tier Pull-Out Multimedia Browsing Box:

1. Pull-out browser box versions shall have a saddle-type support structure of #18-gauge steel with ends welded to the formed box.

2. The saddle shall produce a fixed, fully closed bottom to the assembly, and the continuous formed ends shall be formed as brackets for attaching to uprights.

3. The pull-out box portion shall operate on full extension ball bearing slide mechanisms, mounted to box and saddle end brackets at each end.

4. All browser boxes shall have a sloping back support angled back at approximately 15 degrees from vertical.

5. A 3/4-inch diameter tube shall be mechanically attached between ends and in line with front boxing on browser unit.

6. A series of 1/4-inch diameter holes shall be aligned along the inside facing horizontal center line of this tube, and matching holes shall be inserted at the same elevation along the sloped back support.

7. Front to back compartment dividers shall be produced by inserting 1/4-inch diameter steel rods into the hole placements, and must be adjustable in the field to allow different types of media to be stored in the boxes.

M. Hinged Periodical Adjustable Display Shelves: Manufacturer's standard adjustable slotted shelving with hinged sloping shelf to display periodicals and flat storage shelf; minimum 18- gauge.

1. Fabricate hinged periodical display and flat base shelves to match adjustable shelves but constructed similar to base shelf construction.

N. Canopy Tops: Provide mounting brackets for installation of canopy top by others.

O. End Panels: Provide mounting brackets for installation of end panels by others.

P. Wall Angles: Minimum 12-gauge, 3-inch by 2-inch by 1-inch wide for single faced sections as required to meet design criteria.

Q. Shelving Accessories: Provide integral low-back dividers (1 per shelf) for all integral low- back shelves and clear plastic shelf label holder per shelf.

R. Intermediate Wall and Corner Fill Panels: Provide intermediate wall and corner fill panels where required on drawings.

2.5 FINISHES
A. Sheet Steel Finish: Baked enamel finish; minimum of 1.4 mils dry film thickness, except where otherwise specified.

1. Thoroughly clean steel parts in phosphatizing solution to insure removal of oil, grease, and other foreign material which could interfere with adhesion of finish. a. Wipe thoroughly after cleaning to remove grit and oil from surfaces.

2. Apply finish immediately after cleaning.

3. Provide coating with abrasion coefficient of 25 liters per mil when tested in accordance with ASTM D968.

4. Gloss: Medium gloss of 50 to 65 degrees on standard glass meter.

5. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine subfloor surfaces, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, setting conditions, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of fixed storage units.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to pe
rformance of fixed storage units.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. After installation of flooring is complete, install units at locations shown, in continuous ranges made up of number of units shown, complying with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Provide spacer washers which protect finish at fasteners through finished surfaces.

2. Comply with Quality Assurance requirements for anchoring bookstacks to withstand seismic loads.

B. Set units plumb and level, using adjustable leveling devices.

C. Install shelves at spacing indicated, or if not indicated, at equal spacing in each unit.

D. Install accessory items in locations indicated.

3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Verify moving parts are operating freely.

B. Remove and replace components that are chipped, scratched, or otherwise damaged and which do not match adjoining work. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Cleaning: Immediately upon completion of installation, clear components and surfaces.

Remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from installation upon completion of work and leave areas of installation in neat, clean condition.

B. Clean exposed surfaces and touch-up marred finishes or replace components as necessary to eliminate damage and indications of deterioration.

C. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect library shelving system installation from damage during remainder of construction and until substantial completion.

B. Replace components damaged prior to Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 11 5123
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 LIBRARY STACK SYSTEMS 11 5123-8
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 2413-1
SECTION 12 2413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrically operated, sunscreen and blackout roller shades. Include local, group and master motor control systems for shade operation with addressable, encoded, electronic drive units (EDU) including the following:

B. Manually operated shades, chain driven.

C. Shade fabric.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06 1053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry.

B. Section 09 2900 Gypsum Board.

C. Section 09 5123 Acoustical Tile Ceilings.

D. Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections for motor operators, controls, limit switches, and other powered devices and for system disconnect switches for motorized shade operation.

1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work of this Section with other trades to provide rough-in of electrical wiring as required for installation of hardwired motorized shades.

1.5 SEQUENCING
A. Do not fabricate shades until field dimensions for each opening have been taken with finished conditions in place. Hold To dimensions are not acceptable.

B. Do not install shades until final surface finishes and painting are complete.

1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions.

1. Manual operators.

2. Motorized Shade Operators: Include operating instructions.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 2413-2

3. Motors: Show nameplate data, ratings, characteristics, and mounting arrangements.

B. Shop
Drawings: Show location and extent of roller shades. Include reflected ceiling plans, elevations, sections, details, and dimensions not shown in Product Data. Show installation details, mountings, attachments to other work, operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining work.

1. Motorized Shade Operators: Show locations and details for installing operator components, switches, and controls. Indicate motor size, electrical characteristics, drive arrangement, mounting, and grounding provisions.

2. Typical wiring diagrams including integration of EDU controllers with building management system, audiovisual and lighting control systems as applicable.

3. Manual shades: show location of chain operation.

4. Prepare control wiring diagrams based on zones, switching and operational requirements provided by the Architect in electronic format.

5. Include one-line diagrams, wire counts, coverage patterns, and physical dimensions of each item.

6. Provide location plan showing all switch and control zones as per the performance requirements of the specifications. All switches, sensors and other control accessories must clearly be shown and called out in a bill of materials.

C. Shade Automation Schedule: For all shade control zones, provide a detailed schedule of all shade movements throughout the year for a theoretical clear sky. This schedule shall clearly show the time of date, time of day and shade position.

D. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved.

1. Ceiling suspension system members and attachment to building structure.

2. Ceiling-mounted or penetrating items including light fixtures, air outlets and inlets, speakers, sprinklers, recessed shades, and special moldings at walls, column penetrations, and other junctures of acoustical ceilings with adjoining construction.

3. Shade mounting assembly and attachment.

4. Size and location of access to shade operator, motors, and adjustable components.

5. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot (1:48).

E. Samples for Verification:

1. Complete, full-size operating unit not less than 16 inches (400 mm) wide for each type of roller shade indicated.

2. For the following products:
a. Shade Material: Not less than 12-inch- (300-mm-) square section of fabric, from dye lot used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat. Mark top and face of material.

F. Window Treatment Schedule: for all roller shades. Use same room designations as indicated on the Drawings and include opening sizes and key to typical mounting details.

1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For each type of roller shade, signed by product manufacturer.

1. Methods for mainta
ining roller shades and finishes.

2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to fabrics, finishes, and performance.

3. Operating hardware.

4. Motorized shade operator.

1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty: Executed special warranty specified in this Section.

1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Provide additional 5 percent of the total length of qualified stainless steel chain required on the project, not to exceed the quantity of one 500'-0" spool.

2. Provide additional 5 percent of each type of shade mounting hardware or brackets, but not less than one pair of each type.

3. Provide a quantity of replacement shade bands completely fabricated and ready to attach to roller tubes equal to 5 percent of the total number of shade bands of each fabric and each color in the largest size required for each of those fabrics.

B. Clearly label all spare components and supply to City upon completion in original packaging for storage on site by City.

1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain roller shades system through one source from a single manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experience and minimum of five projects of similar scope and size in manufacturing products comparable to those specified in this section.

B. Installer for Roller Shade System - Qualifications: Installer trained and certified by the manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experience in installing products comparable to those specified in this section.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roller shade band materials with the fire-test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701.

E. Preinstallation Meeting: One week prior to commencing the work of this Section. Require attendance of all allocated installers.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 2413-4
F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. Individual testing of components will not be acceptable in lieu of system testing.

G. ShadeCloth Anti-Microbial Characteristics: 'No Growth' per ASTM G 21 results for fungi ATCC9642, ATCC 9644, ATCC9645.

H. Product Standard: Provide roller shades complying with WCMA A 100.1.

I. Environmental Certification: Submit written certification from the manufacturer, including third party evaluation, recycling characteristics, and perpetual use certification as specified.

Initial submittals, which do not include the Environmental Certification will be rejected.

Materials that are simply 'PVC free' without identifying their inputs shall not qualify as meeting the intent of this specification and shall be rejected.

J. Third Party Evaluation: Provide documentation stating the shade cloth has undergone third party evaluation for all chemical inputs, down to a scale of 100 parts per million, that have been evaluated for human and environmental safety. Identify any and all inputs, which are known to be carcinogenic, mutagenic, teratogenic, reproductively toxic, or endocrine disrupting. Also identify items that are toxic to aquatic systems, contain heavy metals, or organohalogens. The material shall contain no inputs that are known problems to human or environmental health per the above major criteria, except for an input that is required to meet local fire codes.

K. Recycling Characteristics: Provide documentation that the shade cloth can, and is part of a closed loop of perpetual use and not be required to be down cycled, incinerated or otherwise thrown away. Scrap material can be sent back to the mill for reprocessing and recycling into the same quality yarn and woven into new material, without down cycling. Certify that this process is currently underway and will be utilized for this project.

L. Perpetual Use Certification: Certify that at the end of the useful life of the shade cloth, that the material can be sent back to the manufacturer for recapture as part of a closed loop of perpetual use and that the material can and will be reconstituted into new yarn, for weaving into new shade cloth. Provide information on each shade band indicating that the shade band can be sent back to the manufacturer for this purpose.

M. Requirements for Electronic Hardware, Controls, and Switches: Roller shade hardware, shade fabric, EDU, and all related controls shall be furnished and installed as a complete two-way communicating system and assembly.

N. Requirements for Roller Shade Installer/Contractor:

1. Roller Shade Hardware, shade fabric, motor, and all related controls shall be furnished and installed as a complete two-way communicating system and assembly.

2. Roller Shade Installer/Contractor shall list all components and systems included in their bid, including but not limited to, the prime manufacturer of the motor control and automated equipment and shall be financially responsible for any change orders and/or back charges required by the BMS, AV, or Lighting Control Systems contractors to interface with the automatic solar tracking system and the motorized roller shade system.

1. Locate mock-up in window designated by Architect.

2. Do not proceed with remaining work until, mock-up is accepted by Architect.

1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-test- response characteristics, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings and in a window treatment schedule.

1.12 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Power and control wiring shall be complete and certified, fully operational with uninterrupted communication on the lines and minimal noise certified by a commissioning agent specified in other sections.

1. 485, ICON, Lonmark and Dry Contract Network: Noise on the line not to exceed shade manufacturer's limits.

C. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies.

Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1.13 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roller shade system that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. All operating parts except for the bead chain.
b. Shade cloth.

2. Warranty Period: 10years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. In the event of a warranted product failure, the Shade Contractor shall, at no additional cost to the City, facilitate acquisition and delivery of all necessary replacement components to the City.

1.14 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Service: Provide as a separate bid amount the cost for annual maintenance contract providing service 'on demand' for repair and maintenance as may be generally anticipated for the conditions of this project.

2.1 MA

NUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for the roller window shades is based on the manufacturer identified below. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Basis-of-Design: MechoShade Systems, Inc.

2. Lutron Shading Solutions by VIMCO.

3. Or approved equal.

2.2 STANDARD ROLLER SHADES
A. Shade Cloth Material: PVC-free polyester light-filtering shades, and as follows:

1. Thickness: Fabricated from TPO for both core yarn and jacket, single thickness, 0.018 opaque coated reinforced yarn, non-raveling 0.032 inch (0.813 mm) thick fabric and

0.718 lbs per sq yd (0.39 kg per sq m). VLT range 1 to 12 percent.

2. Openness:
a. Typical: EcoVeil 0950 Series, 1 percent open, 1 X 1 Basket-Weave. b. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturers full color range.

3. Provide shades meeting GREENGUARD certification requirements.

4. Bottom Hem: Straight with steel bar weight.

B. Skylight shade fabric cannot be PVC free for stability reasons. Use similar color and density in Thermoveil fabric for skylight shades.

C. Roller Shade Schedule: Refer to the Drawings for locations.

1. Shade Type: Manual operating, sunscreen roller shades in all exterior windows of rooms and spaces shown on the Drawings. Include the following as scheduled and as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Shade pockets.
b. Fascia.
c. Mecho5x, Managed Lift Force, Hardware: Lifts single band or multiband shade assemblies:
1) Lifting Force: 3.5 to 8.5 pounds (1.6 to 3.9 kg) for shade assemblies with a shade band hanging weight, not including mounting hardware, of 35 pounds (16 kg).
2) Backward compatible to Mecho-5 components including facia, regular and reverse roll, pockets, and wall-mounting accessories. 3) Includes offset drive capability, left/right, front, or back to allow for utilization of blackout or ShadeLoc Zipper channels.
4) Allows for ease of operation when obstructions do not allow for direct drive chain access.
5) Offset chain drive shall not cause an increase of friction or pull force when operated up to a 26-degree angle from vertical.
6) Battens and guide cables as required when warranted by Mechos width to height ratio guidelines.

2. Shade Type: Motorized interior sunscreen roller shades in all exterior / interior windows of rooms and spaces as shown on referenced Drawings, and related EDU control requirements systems. Include the following as scheduled and as indicated on the Drawings:

IQ/2: Intelligent 2-way communicating line voltage motors with low voltage control, dry contact, and serial port, 485 MechoNet network capability and integration.

3. Shade Type: Motorized Motor Spring Roller Skylight Shade as shown on referenced Drawings, and related EDU control requirements systems. Include the following as scheduled and as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Shade pockets.
b. IQ/2: Intelligent 2-way communicating line voltage motors with low voltage control, dry contact, and serial port, 485 MechoNet network capability and integration.

2.3 SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Shade Bands: Construction of shade band includes the fabric, the enclosed hem weight, shade roller tube, and the attachment of the shade band to the roller tube. Sewn hems and open hem pockets shall not be acceptable.

1. Hembars: Designed to maintain bottom of shade straight and flat. a. Style: Exposed aluminum bottom bar with matching finials (Required with EcoVeil fabric)
1) Profile: Rectangular.
2) Color: Manufacturer's standard color coordinated with shade fabric selected.

2. Shade band and Shade Roller Attachment:
a. Use extruded aluminum shade roller tube of a diameter and wall thickness required to support shade fabric without excessive deflection. b. Provide for positive mechanical attachment of shade band to roller tube; shade band shall be made removable / replaceable with a "snap-on" snap-off" Spline mounting, without having to remove shade roller from shade brackets or insert shadeband from the side.
c. Mounting Spline shall not require use of adhesives, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets.
d. Any method of attaching shade band to roller tube that requires the use of:
adhesive, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets, does not meet the performance requirements of this specification and shall not be accepted.

2.4 MANUAL OPERATION
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Mechoshade 5X as manufacturerd by Mechoshade Systems, LLC.

See Drawings.

1. Provide for universal, regular and offset drive capability which enables the drive chain to always fall in front of the fabric plane.

2. Provide hardware capable for installation of a removable fascia, for both regular and/or reverse roll, which shall be installed without exposed fastening devices of any kind.

3. Provide shade hardware system that allows for removable regular and/or reverse roll fascias to be mounted continuously across two or more shade bands without requiring exposed fasteners of any kind.

4. Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shade bands (multi-banded shades) by a single chain operator, subject to manufacturer's design Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 2413-8
criteria. Connectors shall be offset to assure alignment from the first to the last shade band

5. Provide
shade hardware system that allows multi-banded, manually-operated shades to be capable of smooth operation when the axis is offset a maximum of 6 degrees on each side of the plane perpendicular to the radial line of the curve, for a 12 degrees total offset.

6. Provide positive mechanical engagement of the drive mechanism to the shade roller tube. Friction-fit connectors for the drive mechanism connection to the shade roller tube are not acceptable.

7. Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 16 gage, 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) thick plated steel or heavier as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade.

B. Mounting: Recessed in ceiling pocket, mounting permitting easy removal and replacement without damaging roller shade or adjacent surfaces and finishes.

1. Mounting Conditions:
a. Wall-mounted at head of window.
b. Mounted flush with ceiling.

C. Shade Operation: Manual; with continuous-loop bead-chain, clutch, and cord tensioner and bracket lift operator.

1. Shade Type: Single roller.

2. Pull: Manufacturer's standard pole engaged pull.

3. Position of Clutch Operator: Left or Right side of roller, as determined by hand of user facing shade from inside, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

4. Clutch: Capacity to lift size and weight of shade; sized to fit roller or provide adaptor.

5. Lift-Assist Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard spring assist for balancing roller shade weight and lifting heavy roller shades.

6. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade Length required to make operation convenient from floor level.

7. Drive Chain: Continuous loop stainless steel beaded ball chain, 95 pound (43 kg) minimum breaking strength. Provide upper and lower limit stops. a. Chain Retainer: Chain tensioning device complying with WCMA A100.1.

8. Operating Function: Stop and hold shade at any position in ascending or descending travel.

D. Lifting Device: Crank and gearbox meeting ANSI/WCMA A 100.1 safety standards.

2.5 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION
A. Product Description: Roller shade consisting of a roller, a means of supporting the roller, a flexible sheet or band of material carried by the roller, a means of attaching the material to the roller, a bottom bar, and an operating mechanism that lifts and lowers the shade.

B. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.

1. Lifting Mechanism: With permanently lubricated moving parts.

C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F (23 deg C):

1. Provide
shade hardware constructed of minimum 12 gage, 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) thick plated steel, or heavier, as required to support 200 percent of the motor stall torque plastic components without use of steel angle construction do not meet the intent of this specification and shall not be accepted.

2. Provide shade hardware system that allows for field adjustment of EDU or replacement of any operable hardware component without requiring removal of brackets, regardless of mounting position (inside, or outside mount).

3. Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shade bands offset by a maximum of 16 to 45 degrees from the EDU axis between shade bands (8 to 22.5 degrees) on each side of the radial line, by a single shade EDU (multi-banded shade, subject to manufacturer's design criteria).

4. All bands within a single EDU group shall be aligned within 1/4 inch (6 mm).

E. Access and Material Requirements:

1. Provide shade hardware allowing for the removal of shade roller tube from brackets without removing hardware from opening and without requiring end or center supports to be removed.

2. Provide shade hardware that allows for removal and re-mounting of the shade bands without having to remove the shade tube, drive or operating support brackets.

F. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting roller, and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting method indicated.

G. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting shades and accessories under conditions of normal use.

H. Color-Coated Finish: For metal components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

I. Colors of Metal and Plastic Components Exposed to View: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 SHADE MOTOR DRIVE SYSTEM
A. Basis-of-Design: Mechoshade, ElectroShade with WhisperShade IQ2 EDU. As manufactured by MechoShade Systems LLC. Motor operated fabric window shade system complete with mounting brackets, roller tubes, hembars, hardware, and accessories.

1. Voltage: 120 VAC

2. Voltage: 24 VDC

3. Description: Single roller.

4. Drop Position: Regular roll.

5. Mounting: As indicated on Drawings.

6. Size: As indicated on Drawings.

7. Fabric: As specified herein.

8. Locations:
a. Sloped ceiling in Pavilions (at sloped wood slat ceiling). b. At gypsum board ceiling in Entry Pavilion and lower soffit of Communit Hall.

B. Shade System; Gene
ral:

1. Motorized Shades: Comply with NFPA 70.

2. Components capable of being removed or adjusted without removing mounted shade brackets, or cassette support channel.

3. Operates smoothly when raising or lowering shades.

4. Cradle-to-Cradle certified and listed in C2C (DIR).

5. Electrical Components: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for intended purpose.

Test as total system. Individual component testing is acceptable.

6. Components: FCC compliant where applicable.

C. Drive Bracket / Brake Assembly:

1. Mecho Drive Bracket model Mecho5x shall be fully integrated with all Mecho accessories, including, but not limited to: SnapLoc fascia, SnapLoc Zipper channels, room darkening side / sill channels, center supports and connectors for multi-banded shades.

2. Mecho5x drive sprocket and brake assembly shall rotate and be supported on a welded 5/16 inch (8 mm) steel pin.

3. The brake shall be an over-running wrapped spring clutch design which disengages during the raising and lowering of a shade. The brake shall withstand a minimum pull force of 50 lbs (22 kg) in the stopped position.

4. The braking mechanism shall employ an oil-impregnated hub on to which the brake system is mounted. The oil impregnated hub design includes a wrapped spring clutch assembly that ensures a smooth, non-jerky operation in raising and lowering the shades. The assembly shall be permanently lubricated requiring no maintenance.

Products that require externally applied lubrication and/or are not permanently lubricated are not acceptable.

5. The entire Mecho5x assembly shall be fully mounted on the steel support bracket, and fully independent of the shade tube assembly, which may be removed and reinstalled without effecting the roller shade limit adjustments.

D. Drive Chain: No. 10 qualified stainless-steel chain rated to 100 lbs (45 kg) minimum breaking strength. Nickel plate chain shall not be acceptable.

2.7 MOTOR CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. Electronic Drive Unit (EDU):

1. Intelligent Encoded EDU, and Control System: Tubular, asynchronous (non- synchronous) EDU's, with built-in ac motor and reversible capacitor operating at 120VAC/60Hz, (230VAC/50Hz) single phase, temperature Class B, thermally- protected, totally enclosed, maintenance-free and powered by a line voltage power supply connection equipped with locking disconnect plug assembly furnished with each EDU.

2. Quiet, 38 dB (within 3 feet (914 mm) open air depending on motor torque.

3. EDU concealed inside shade roller tube.

4. Maximum current draw for each shade EDU of 0.9Amps at 120VAC for IQ2 6nm; other current draw as applicable if other motors sizes required.

5. Use EDU's rated at the same nominal speed for all shades in the same room.

6. Use EDU's with minimum of 34RPM, that shall not vary due to load / lift capacity.

7. Total hanging weight of shade band shall not exceed 80 percent of the rated lifting capacity of the shade E
DU and tube assembly.

8. UL325 Listed solution. UL Recognized solutions without the listing certification shall be unacceptable.

9. UL or ETL listed marking shall be applied on a hang tag off the motor lead so that the inspector can readily verify the certification and rating of the motor. Products that require the shade assembly to be dismounted or partially dismounted for the motor or EDU to be removed from the shade roller tube for inspection shall be unacceptable.

10. EDU shall possess an isolated, low voltage power supply for powering external accessories connected to either the dry contact port or the network port. Products that force accessories to always be powered by a plugin or externally supplied power supply shall not be acceptable.

11. Provide EDU with the ability to upgrade firmware inside the motor from anywhere on the network without touching the motor.

B. EDU System: (software, two-way communication): Specifications and design are based on the Intelligent EDU Control System, WhisperShade IQ2 System as manufactured by MechoSystems. EDU and control systems not in complete compliance with these performance criteria shall not be accepted as equal systems. EDU shall support two methods of control:

1. Local Isolated Dry Contact Control Inputs: EDU shall be equipped with dry contact inputs to support economical motor control as well as integration to third party systems without adding any interface modules. The dry contact inputs shall support moving the EDU/shade to the upper and lower limits as well as to local switch preset positions.

They shall also support configuring the EDU under protected sequences so that a typical user would not change the EDU's setup. At a minimum the configuration should include setting limits, setting custom presets and configuring key modes of operation without requiring a PC or other similar microprocessor-driven tool.

2. Network Control: EDU shall be equipped with a bi-directional network communication capability in order to support commanding the operation of large groups of shades over a common backbone. The network communication card shall be embedded into the tubular EDU assembly. Upper and lower stopping points (operating limits) of shade bands shall be programmed into EDU's using either a hand held removable program module / configurator or a local switch.

C. Alignment Positions: Each EDU shall support a minimum of 133 repeatable and precisely aligned shade positions (including limits and presets):

1. All shades on the same switch circuit or with the same network group address with the same opening height shall align at each limit or preset (intermediate stopping position) when traveling from any position, up or down.

2. Shades of differing heights shall have capability for custom, aligned intermediate stop positions when traveling from any position, up or down.

3. Alignment of standard shade bands mechanically aligned on the same EDU shall not exceed plus or minus 0.125 inch (3 mm) when commanded to the same alignment position.

4. Alignment of standard shades on adjacent EDU's shall not exceed plus or minus 0.25 inch (6 mm) when commanded to the same alignment position.

D. Local Switch Presets: A minimum of 3 customizable preset positions shall be accessible over the local dry contact control inputs and over the network connection:

1. Upon setting the limits for the shade EDU these preset positions shall automatically default to 25 percent, 50 pe
rcent and 57 percent (75 percent) of the shade travel.

2. These positions shall be capable of being customized to any position between and including the upper and lower limits of the shade. A removable program module / configurator or local switch shall be capable of customizing the position of these presets
E. Network Presets: A minimum of 32 customizable preset positions (including the 3 local switch presets) shall be accessible via network commands:

1. Upon setting the limits for the shade EDU these preset positions shall automatically default to the lower limit unless customized elsewhere.

2. These positions shall be capable of being customized to any position between and including the upper and lower limits of the shade. A removable program module / configurator shall be capable of customizing the position of these presets.

F. Network Control:

1. The system shall have the capability of two-way digital communication with the EDU's over a common backbone.

2. Each EDU shall possess 8 addresses capable of being employed for various levels of group control. These addresses shall be configurable via a handheld configurator and/or a PC controller. A 9th unique address shall enable the EDU(s) to be independently controlled and configured over the network via a handheld configurator and/or a PC controller.

G. Low Voltage Communication Network Implementation:

1. The low voltage network shall employ a bus topology with daisy chained network connections between nodes over a CAT5 cable (4 UTP) or over a 2 UTP cable employing at least 1 pair at 16 AWG for power and 1 pair at 22 AWG for data.

2. The low voltage network (plus or minus 13 VDC) shall be powered by the nodes attached to it. These nodes could be line voltage powered EDU's attached to 120 VAC or 230 VAC. Alternatively, low voltage nodes shall be powered typically by a centralized low voltage power supply. If a CAT5 network cable is employed and the node draws less than 1 W then the node may be powered by DC power supplied by an associated line voltage EDU.

H. Network Capacity: 4000 ft (1219 m) max, 250 nodes maximum. The number and size of a centralized DC supply shall vary depending upon the network requirements.

I. Uniform or Normal Modes of Operation: Uniform mode shall allow for shades to only move to defined intermediate stop positions to maintain maximum uniformity and organization.

Normal Mode shall allow for shades to move to both intermediate stop positions, plus any position desired between the upper and lower limits as set by the installer.

2.8 WALL SWITCHES
A. Wired Wall Switches: Shades shall be operated by 2, 4, 5, 7, or 10 button low voltage standard switches. Standard switch shall be wired to a network interface and be programmed to transmit an address for the local switch. An address that is transmitted by either a switch or central controller shall be responded to by those EDU's with the same address in their control table. Standard switch may control an individual, sub-group or group of EDU's in accordance with the address in each EDU.

2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. Roller
Shade Pocket: For recessed mounting in drywall ceilings as indicated on the Drawings.

1. Provide either No-Cost or Drywall pocket, sized to accommodate roller shades, with exposed extruded aluminum closure mount, tile support and removable closure panel to provide access to shades.

B. Pocket Accessories:

1. 2 pocket closure and closure mount for manual shades

2. 3 pocket closure and closure mount for ElectroShades C. Fascia:

1. Continuous removable extruded aluminum fascia that attaches to shade mounting brackets without the use of adhesives, magnetic strips, or exposed fasteners.

2. Fascia shall be able to be installed across two or more shade bands in one piece.

3. Fascia shall fully conceal brackets, shade roller and fabric on the tube.

4. Provide bracket / fascia end caps where mounting conditions expose outside of roller shade brackets.

5. Fascia shall include a channel for application of flexible material (shlegel) to closing off any light leakage between the fascia and a window frame, mullion, ceiling and/or any other horizontal surface.

6. Fascia shall attach directly to the roller shade bracket without the need to install additional mounting hardware. Exposed fasteners shall not be allowed.

7. Fascia shall positively lock in a top-down installation method to help prevent accidental detachment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, accurate locations of connections to building electrical system, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Confirm that blocking for roller shades is installed plumb, level, and fitted to window mullion as per interior architect's design documents and in accordance with industry standard tolerances. The horizontal surface of the shade pocket shall not be out-of-level more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) over 20 linear feet (6 m).

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 RESPONSIBILITIES FOR INSTALLATION
A. Install
roller shades level, plumb, square, and true according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches (51 mm) to interior face of glass. Allow proper clearances for window operation hardware.

B. General Contractor Responsibilities:

1. Provide power panels and circuits of sufficient size to accommodate roller shade manufacturer's requirements, as indicated on the mechanical and electrical drawings and manufacturer's shop drawings.

2. Coordinate with requirements of Installer for this section before inaccessible areas are constructed.

3. Coordinate requirements of ALSCS before inaccessible areas are constructed.

4. Provide conduit with pull wire in all areas, which might not be accessible to ALSCS due to building design, equipment location or schedule.

5. Coordinate with the main building electrical Installer to provide duplex 120 VAC power receptacle in electric closet for floor/riser communication gateways.

6. Verify that wiring conditions, which have been previously installed under other sections or at a previous time, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

7. Comply with manufacturer's product data, including shop drawings, technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions, and product carton instructions for installation.

8. Protect installed product and finished surfaces from damage during all phases of installation including preparation, testing, and cleanup.

9. Be responsible for all other required electrical work including but not limited to roof penetrations, conduits, fireproofing, and similar items.

10. Provide conduit with pull wire in all areas, which might not be accessible to Installer due to building design, equipment location or schedule.

11. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.

C. Installer Responsibilities:

1. Furnish and install shade controllers, interfaces, splitters, coupler, sensors, switches, junction boxes, etc. mounted in the ceiling in an accessible location. Locations for all visible devices to be coordinated with Architect.

2. Inspect all material included in this contract prior to installation and notify manufacturer of unacceptable material prior to installation.

D. Line Voltage Wiring: Furnish and install power connection between shade control system and EDU, and shall be capable of providing single line voltage wire pull for each EDU.

E. Shade Power Wiring:

1. Installer shall furnish and install line voltage cable from roller shade motor into line voltage side of control system.

2. Installer shall furnish and install wiring from wire power junction box (provided by General Contractor) to each motor on the shade network.

3. Installer shall furnish and install a disconnect plug at the end of the power wiring run to each EDU. The disconnect plug must mate with a matching disconnect plug on the motor cable. EDU cable disconnect plug must be prefabricated by the manufacturer to meet UL and ETL systems requirements.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 2413-15
F. Integration with Third Party Systems: General Contractor shall coordinate and provide for others to
furnish, install or program any interfaces or wiring to integrate 3rd party systems to the roller shade control system as specified herein. Integration to shade control network can be accomplished locally through dry contact closures, or RS-232.

3.4 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION
A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches (50 mm) to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.

1. Provide an on-site project manager who will attend all related jobsite scheduling meetings.

2. Supervise the roller shade installation, and setting of intermediate stops of all shades to assure the alignment of the shade bands within a single EDU group, which shall not exceed plus or minus 0.125 inches (3 mm), and to assure the alignment between EDU groups, which shall not exceed plus or minus 0.25 inches (6 mm).

3. Be responsible for field inspection on an area-by- area and floor-by-floor basis during construction to confirm proper mounting conditions per approved shop drawings.

4. Provide accurate field measurements to 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) for custom shade fabrication on the roller shades manufacturers input forms.

B. Install shades such that the shade band is not closer than 2 inches (51 mm) to the interior face of the glass. Allow proper clearances for window operation hardware.

C. Installer shall set upper, lower and up to 3 intermediate stop positions of all motorized shade bands, and assure alignment in accordance with the above requirements.

D. Test and certify the operation of all motorized shades and turn over each floor for preliminary acceptance.

E. Participate and cooperate with the electrical contractor, shade manufacturer and the commissioning agent to verify and certify the installation is in full conformance with the specifications and is fully operational. This work to occur during the commissioning stage and is in addition to preliminary acceptance required for each floor.

F. Connections: Connect motorized operators to building electrical system.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. Install control systems in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and approved submittals.

B. Participate and cooperate with the electrical contractor, shade manufacturer and the commissioning agent to verify and certify the installation is in full conformance with the specifications and is fully operational. This work to occur during the commissioning stage and is in addition to preliminary acceptance required for each floor.

3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Construction
Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

B. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Project Acceptance.

D. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Project Acceptance.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train City's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain roller shades. Refer to Division 01 Section Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 12 2413
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 COUNTERTOPS 12 3640-1
SECTION 12 3640 COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUM
ENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Quartz-surfacing countertops.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06 1053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry.

B. Section 06 4100 Architectural Woodwork: For interior carpentry exposed to view that is not specified in this Section.

C. Section 07 9200 Joint Sealants.

D. Division 22: Faucet and plumbing connections.

1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections or other construction activities required for fabrication and installation to ensure that solid surfacing can be supported and installed as indicated.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers product data including finishing materials and processes and indicating compliance with specified performance requirements.

1. Accessories: Submit manufacturers product data and installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Submit top views, elevations and sections (as needed).

2. Indicate dimensions, material thickness, location and sizes of cutouts, anchorage provisions and attachment methods.

3. Indicate coordination requirements with adjacent and interfacing work.

4. Apply WI-certified compliance label to first page of Shop Drawings.

C. Samples: 6- by 6-inch samples or as requested; indicate full color range and pattern variation.

Approved samples will be standard for quartz surfacing.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 COUNTERTOPS 12 3640-2

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product
Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of solid surfacing certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

C. Quality Assurance submittals outlined below.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate quartz- surfacing countertops similar to that indicated for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

1. Fabricator shall have a silica control program in place in accordance with all applicable laws, regulations, orders, and directives by OSHA and the local building authorities to ensure limited exposure to silica dust in the factory.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

C. NAAWS Quality Standard: Comply with the specified grade(s) of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, and installation, specified section(s), and applicable requirements of the current edition of the "North American Architectural Woodwork Standards 3.0, United States Version".

1. Provide WI-certified compliance certificate indicating that countertops comply with requirements of grades specified.

D. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

E. Do not deliver countertops until painting and similar operations that could damage materials have been completed in installation areas. If countertops must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Site Conditions" Article.

F. Packing and Shipping: Pack countertops and other flat products in wooden crates to minimize damage in shipping.

G. Deliver materials to Project site in factory wrappings, clearly labeled with identification of manufacturer and lot number. Store materials off the ground in a dry, warm, well-ventilated, weathertight location.

H. Acceptance at Site: Supervise unloading of materials. Check for damaged crates. Mark bill of lading if there is any obvious damage and notify quartz-surfacing supplier immediately.

Otherwise, proceed with offloading crates.

I. Store countertops on wood A-frames or pallets with nonstaining separators and nonstaining, waterproof covers. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 COUNTERTOPS 12 3640-3
J. Protection: Handle materials to prevent physical damage. Protect surfaces from staining, scratching and other dama
ge during handling.

1.8 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install countertops until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Field Measurements: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support countertops by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace quartz-surfacing countertops, when fabricated and installed by an approved, manufacturer-certified fabricator, that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials, fabrication, or installation within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Chipping.
b. Cracking.
c. Discoloration.

2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with performance requirements, manufacturers offering specified items which may be incorporated in the work include the following:

1. CaesarStone Quartz Surfacing.

2. Cambria.

3. DuPont Zodiaq.

4. Silestone.

2.2 QUARTZ-SURFACING
A. Quartz-surfacing Composition: 93 percent crushed quartz aggregate combined with resins and pigments and fabricated into slabs.

1. Color and Finish: Provide colors and finishes indicated on Drawings.

B. Dimensions:

1. Thickness: As shown on Drawings.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 COUNTERTOPS 12 3640-4

2. Slabs Size: Not less than 56.5 x 120 inches (1.44 x 3.05 m) to minimize number of joints
in installation.

C. Sinks: Undermount. See Plumbing Drawings.

D. Identification: Label material with batch number by imprinting on back with manufacturers identifying mark.

E. Performance Requirements:

1. Flexural Strength: 7,420 psi, ASTM C880/C880M.

2. Compressive Strength: ASTM C170/C170M
a. Dry: 10,430 psi average.
b. Wet: 11,265 psi average.

3. Izod Impact Strength: 0.361ft. lbs/inch of notch average; ASTM D256.

4. Bond Strength: 205 psi; ASTM C482 modified.

5. Modulus of Rupture: 2,110 average, ASTM C99/C99M.

6. Mohs Hardness: 6.5-7.5; scratch test.

7. Absorption: 0.022%; ASTM C97/C97M.

8. Stain and Acid Resistance: Not affected; ASTM D2299.

9. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread = 10, smoke density = 195; ASTM E84.

10. Thermal Shock Resistance: Passes 5 cycles, 75°F-295°F; ASTM C484.

11. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: 1.36x10 inch per °F.; ASTM C531.

12. Weathering Resistance: Not affected after seven days in 1% sulfuric acid; ASTM C217/C217M.

13. Freeze-Thaw Resistance: No visible damage or discoloration after 25 cycles (-45°C to 23°C); S.L.P. with ASTM C62 as guide.

14. Wear Resistance: 36.12 gram average; ASTM C501, tested with 1 kg. load, 1000 cycles at 70 r.p.m.

F. Exposed Edges and Corners:

1. Countertops:
a. Edges: Square profile, single layer thick.
b. Outside Corners: Square.

2. Backsplash:
a. Edges: Square.
b. Outside Corners: Square butt joints.

G. Cutouts for Undermount Bowls: Cast integral finished cutout in top to receive undermounted bowl. Insert hardware as needed into top during casting process for bowl installation. Provide other necessary hardware to attach bowl to top.

2.3 QUARTZ-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOP CONSTRUCTION
A. Construction:

1. Quality Standard: Comply with NAAWS Section 11.

2. NAAWS Grade: Premium.

3. Quartz-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 3/4-inch (19 mm).

4. Single length sections.

5. Intermediate support for spans over 48-inches to prevent deflection in excess of 1/4- inch under a 50 pound per sq ft load.

6. Edge Treatment: As indicated on Drawings in accordance with NAAWS.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 COUNTERTOPS 12 3640-5

7. Back Splash: As indicated on Drawings in accordance with NAAWS.

8. Back
Splash Construction: NAAWS Assembly 2, deck mount, manufacturer- assembled.

9. Adhesive: As approved by manufacturer, able to maintain its bond with the opposing contractions of core and laminate.
a. VOC Requirement: Provide adhesive having a VOC content of <70g/L.

10. Joints: Well fit, flush, and watertight.

B. Maximum Unsupported and Unloaded Overhang:

1. Sheet Thickness of 3/4-inch: 12-inches.

2. Sheet Thickness of 1/2-inch: 6-inches.

C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated on Drawings.

2.4 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION
A. Fabricate to required profiles and dimensions. To the greatest extent possible, fabricate each unit continuous, without joints and to minimize on-site cutting or other modifications.

B. Fabricate tops in one piece with integral backsplashes and edges, unless otherwise indicated.

Comply with quartz-surfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

C. Complete equipment cut-outs in the shop to greatest extent possible before delivering to site.

Allow cut-outs to be made only by the fabricator or installer of the quartz-surfacing countertops.

D. Fabricate all surfaces to have uniform gloss. Ease edges and sand smooth.

E. Layout: Layout joints to minimize joints and to avoid L-shaped pieces of quartz-surfacing.

F. Inspect Material:

1. Inspect material for defects prior to fabrication.

2. Color Match: Materials throughout Project shall be from the same batch and shall bear labels with same batch number. Visually inspect materials to be used for adjacent pieces to assure acceptable color match. Inspect in lighting conditions similar to those on Project.

3. Variation in distribution of aggregates in quartz-surfacing which are within manufacturers tolerances is not a defect.

G. Tools: Cut and polish with water-cooled power tools.

H. Drill holes in countertops for plumbing fittings and soap dispensers in shop.

I. Cutouts:

1. Cutouts shall have 3/8-inch (10 mm) minimum inside corner radius. Inside corners shall be reinforced in an acceptable manner to prevent cracking.

2. Where edges of cutout will be exposed in finished work, polish edges.

J. Laminations: Laminate layers of quartz-surfacing as required to create built-up edges, trim, and other areas requiring additional thickness.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 COUNTERTOPS 12 3640-6

2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Mounting Adhesives:

1. Provide structural-grade silicone or epoxy adhesives of type recommended by manufacturer for application and conditions of use.

2. Acceptable Silicone Manufacturers:
a. Dow Corning.
b. GE Sealants and Adhesives.

3. Acceptable Epoxy Manufacturers:
a. Akemi North America.
b. Bonstone Material Corporation.
c. Tenax USA.

4. Provide spacers, if required, of type recommended by adhesive manufacturer.

B. Joint Adhesive:

1. Provide epoxy or polyester adhesive of type recommend by manufacturer for application and conditions of use.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Akemi North America.
b. Bonstone Material Corporation.
c. Tenax USA.

3. Color: Tint adhesive which will be visible in finished work to match quartz-surfacing.

C. Joint Sealants:

1. Clear silicone sealant of type recommended by manufacturer for application and conditions of use.

2. Acceptable Manufactures:
a. Dow Corning.
b. GE Sealants and Adhesives.

D. Mildew Resistant Sealant: Specified in Section 07 9200.

E. Solvent: Product recommended by adhesive manufacturer to clean surface of quartz-surfacing to assure adhesion of adhesives and sealants.

F. Cleaning Agents: Non-abrasive, soft-scrub type kitchen cleansers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installation.

B. Site Verification:

1. Verify dimensions by field measurements prior to fabrication.

2. Verify that substrates supporting countertop surfaces are plumb, level, and flat to within 1/16 inch in ten feet (1.6 mm in 3000 mm) and that necessary supports and blocking are in place.

3. Base Cabinets: Verify cabinet units are securely fixed to adjoining units and back wall.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 COUNTERTOPS 12 3640-7
C. Inspect finished countertop surfaces for damage. Do not install until damage materials have been repaired in an ac
ceptable manner or replaced.

D. Before installing countertops, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing material.

E. Verify the adequacy and proper location of any required backing or support framing.

F. Verify that mechanical, electrical, plumbing and other building items affecting countertop components are in place, complete and to receive the work of this Section.

G. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of inserts and similar items to be used by countertop Installer for anchoring countertops. Furnish installers of other work with Drawings or templates showing locations of these items.

B. Protect finished surfaces against scratches. Apply masking where necessary. Guard against grit, dust, and other trades.

3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install countertops in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and plans.

B. All materials to be plumb, level and rigid. Neatly scribe to adjoining surfaces.

C. Field trim all components as needed to fit field conditions.

D. Immediately replace any material that is cracked, chipped, broken or otherwise defective.

3.4 INSTALLATION COUNTERTOPS
A. Install countertops with skilled installers; make necessary field cuts as required.

B. Provide continuous, structural, wooden framework at back wall, sides and front for top. Front of framework shall be 1/2-inch less than height of apron.

C. Provide openings in front of framework for required accessories. Install indicated accessories as directed by Contractor.

D. Install countertops level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.

Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8-inch in 96-inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).

E. Preliminary Installation and Adjustment: Position materials to verify that materials are correctly sized and prepared. Make necessary adjustments.

1. If jobsite cutting, grinding, or polishing is required, use water-cooled tools. Protect jobsite and surfaces against dust and water. Perform work away from installation site if possible.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 COUNTERTOPS 12 3640-8

2. Allow gaps for expansion of not less than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) per five feet when installed between wall
s or other fixed conditions.

3. Drainage: Adjacent to sinks, shim countertops slightly to insure positive drainage.

F. Permanent Installation:

1. After verifying fit, remove countertop from position, clean substrates of dust and contamination, and clean countertop back side and joints with solvent.

2. Apply sufficient quantity of mounting adhesive in accordance with adhesive manufacturers recommendations to provide permanent, secure installation.

3. Do not exceed manufacturer-recommended spacing of mounting adhesive. a. At Vertical Surfaces: Provide temporary shims until adhesive cures.

4. Install surfacing plumb, level, and square and flat to within 1/16 inch in ten feet (1.6 mm in 3000 mm).

G. Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts.

H. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop.

1. Align adjacent countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8-inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16-inches (400 mm) oc and to walls with adhesive.

4. Calk joint between backsplash and wall with clear silicone sealant.

I. Field Joints:

1. Joints Between Adjacent Pieces of Countertop:
a. Joints shall be flush, tight fitting, level, inconspicuous, and neat. Exposed joints/seams shall not be allowed.
b. Securely join with manufacturers recommended adhesive. Fill joints level with countertop surface.
c. Clamp or brace countertop in position until adhesive sets.

2. Reinforce field joints with countertop material strips extending a minimum of 1-inch on either side of the seam with the strip being the same thickness as the top.

3. Joints between Backsplashes and Countertops: Seal joints with silicone sealant.

J. Install backsplash and end splash by adhering to countertops with stone adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Leave 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) gap between splash and wall for filling with sealant. Use temporary shims to ensure uniform spacing.

K. Mechanical Fasteners: Not allowed at exposed surfaces.

L. Cut and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns.

M. Rout radii and contours to template.

Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 COUNTERTOPS 12 3640-9

3.5 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Variation
from Plumb: For vertical joints, external corners, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2400 mm).

B. Variation in Level: For horizontal joints and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or one- fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less.

3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Repair damaged and defective countertops, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace countertop. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Remove and replace material that is stained or otherwise damaged or that does not match adjoining quartz-surfacing. Provide new matching pieces, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.

3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean countertops on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Remove pencil and ink marks.

Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

B. Remove masking and excess adhesives and sealants. Clean exposed surfaces.

C. Leave area of work broom clean.

D. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect countertops during construction period with Kraft paper or other heavy covering of type that will not stain or discolor countertop material.

B. Do not allow other trades to use countertops as footstools or ladders to perform their work.

C. Before inspection for Substantial Completion, remove protective covering and clean surfaces using procedures and materials recommended by countertop manufacturers.

END OF SECTION 12 3640
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning CITY OF SACRAMENTO Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission November 01, 2024 COUNTERTOPS 12 3640-10
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 21 0500-1
SECTION 21 0500 - BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Requirements applicable to all Division 21 Sections. Also refer to Division 01 - General Requirements.

B. All materials and installation methods shall conform to the applicable standards, guidelines and codes referenced herein and within each specification section.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. CCR California Code of Regulation
B. CBC California Building Code
C. CFC California Fire Code
D. CEC California Electric Code
E. CMC California Mechanical Code
F. CPC California Plumbing Code
G. California Title 24 - Building Energy Efficiency Standards H. SCAQMD South Coast Air Quality Management District

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Specification and the associated drawings govern the furnishing, installing, testing and placing into satisfactory operation the Mechanical Systems.

B. Each Contractor shall provide all new materials indicated on the drawings and/or in these specifications, and all items required to make the portion of the Mechanical Work a finished and working system.

C. All work will be awarded under a single General Contract. The division of work listed below is for the Contractor's convenience and lists normal breakdown of the work.

D. Separate contracts will be awarded for the following work. The division of work listed below is for the contractors' convenience and lists a normal breakdown of the work. Please refer to the Construction Manager's scope statem
ents for complete scope of work description.

E. Scope of Work:

1. Plumbing Work: Refer to Section 22 0500 "Basic Plumbing Requirements".

2. Heating Work: Refer to Section 23 0500 "Basic HVAC Requirements".

3. Air Conditioning and Ventilating Work: Refer to Section 23 0500 "Basic HVAC Requirements".

4. Temperature Control Work: Refer to Section 23 0500 "Basic HVAC Requirements".

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 21 0500-2

5. Fire Protection Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to:
a. Furnish and install a new fire protection service to the building including backflow preventer as required by Code.
b. Furnish and install all items listed on the Fire Protection Material List. c. Furnish all hydraulic calculations and working sprinkler drawings. d. Furnish and install seismic restraint and equipment designed for use in seismic conditions described in Section 21 0550.
e. Furnish and install firestopping systems for penetrations of fire-rated construction associated with this Contractor's work.
f. Complete all applicable tests, certifications, forms, and matrices.

6. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Work: Refer to Section 23 0500 "Basic HVAC Requirements".

1.4 DIVISION OF WORK BETWEEN MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL & CONTROL

CONTRACTORS
A. Definitions:

1. "Mechanical Contractors" refers to the following:
a. Plumbing Contractor.
b. Heating Contractor.
c. Air Conditioning and Ventilating Contractor.
d. Temperature Control Contractor.
e. Fire Protection Contractor.
f. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Contractor.

2. Control devices such as start-stop push buttons, thermostats, pressure switches, flow switches, relays, etc., generally represent the types of equipment associated with motor control wiring.

3. Voltage is generally specified and scheduled as distribution voltage. Motor submittals may be based on utilization voltage if it corresponds to the correct distribution voltage.

Distribution/Nominal Voltage Utilization Voltage
120 115
208 200
240 230
277 265
480 460
B. General:

1. The purpose of these Specifications is to outline the Electrical and Mechanical Contractor's responsibilities related to electrical work required for items such as temperature controls, mechanical equipment, fans, chillers, compressors and the like. The exact wiring requirements for much of the equipment cannot be determined until the systems have been selected and submittals reviewed. Therefore, the electrical drawings show only known wiring related to such items. All wiring not shown on the electrical drawings, but required for mechanical systems, is the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 21 0500-3

2. Where the drawings require the Electrical Contractor to wire between equipment furnished by the Mechanical Contractor, such wiring shall terminate at terminals provided in the equipment. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide complete electrical power/controls wiring diagrams and supervision to the Electrical Contractor and designate the terminal numbers for correct wiring.

3. All electrical work shall conform to the National Electrical Code. All provisions of the Electrical Specifications concerning wiring, protection, etc., apply to wiring provided by the Mechanical Contractor unless noted otherwise.

4. Control low (24V) and control line (120V) voltage wiring, conduit, and related switches and relays required for the automatic control and/or interlock of motors and equipment, including final connection, are to be furnished and installed under Divisions 21, 22 and 23. Materials and installation to conform to Class 1 or 2 requirements.

5. All Contractors shall establish utility elevations prior to fabrication and shall coordinate their material and equipment with other trades. When a conflict arises, priority is as follows:
a. Light fixtures.
b. Gravity flow piping, including steam and condensate. c. Electrical busduct.
d. Sheet metal.
e. Electrical cable trays, including access space.
f. Sprinkler piping and other piping.
g. Electrical conduits and wireway.

1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Definitions:

1. Coordination Drawings: A compilation of the pertinent layout and system drawings that show the sizes and locat
ions, including elevations, of system components and required access areas to ensure that no two objects will occupy the same space. a. Mechanical trades shall include, but are not limited to, mechanical equipment, ductwork, fire protection systems, plumbing piping, medical gas systems, hydronic piping, steam and steam condensate piping, and any item that may impact coordination with other disciplines.
b. Electrical trades shall include, but are not limited to, electrical equipment, conduit 1.5" and larger, conduit racks, cable trays, pull boxes, transformers, raceway, busway, lighting, ceiling-mounted devices, and any item that may impact coordination with other disciplines.
c. Technology trades shall include, but are not limited to, technology equipment, racks, conduit 1.5" and larger, conduit racks, cable trays, ladder rack, pull boxes, raceway, ceiling-mounted devices, and any item that may impact coordination with other disciplines.
d. Maintenance clearances and code-required dedicated space shall be included. e. The coordination drawings shall include all underground, underfloor, in-floor, in chase, and vertical trade items.

2. Spaces with open/cloud ceiling architecture shall indicate the overhead utilities and locate equipment as required to maintain clearance above lights. The intent for the installation is to maintain a maximum allowable vertical clearance and an organized/clean manner in the horizontal. Notify Architec
t/Engineer of the maximum clearance which can be maintained.

Failure to comply will result in modifications with no cost to Owner.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 21 0500-4
a. In cloud ceiling architecture, when open cabling/wire and/or cable tray crosses gaps between ceiling clouds and/or walls, cabling is to transition to conduits to span the gaps in order to conceal cabling from below.

3. The contractors shall use the coordination process to identify the proper sequence of installation of all utilities above ceilings and in other congested areas, to ensure an orderly and coordinated end result, and to provide adequate access for service and maintenance.

B. Participation:

1. The contractors and subcontractors responsible for work defined above shall participate in the coordination drawing process.

2. One contractor shall be designated as the Coordinating Contractor for purposes of preparing a complete set of composite electronic CAD coordination drawings that include all applicable trades, and for coordinating the activities related to this process. The Coordinating Contractor for this project shall be the Mechanical Contractor.
a. The Coordinating Contractor shall utilize personnel familiar with requirements of this project and skilled as draftspersons/CAD operators, competent to prepare the required coordination drawings.

3. Electronic CAD drawings shall be submitted to the Coordinating Contractor for addition of work by other trades. IMEG will provide electronic file copies of applicable drawings for contractor's use if the contractor signs and returns an "Electronic File Transfer" waiver provided by IMEG. IMEG will not consider blata
nt reproductions of original file copies an
acceptable alternative for coordination drawings.

C. Drawing Requirements:

1. The file format and file naming convention shall be coordinated with and agreed to by all contractors participating in the coordination process and the Owner. a. Scale of drawings:
1) General plans: 1/4 Inch = 1 '-0" (minimum).
2) Mechanical, electrical, communication rooms, and including the surrounding areas within 10 feet: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
3) Shafts and risers: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
4) Sections of shafts and mechanical and electrical equipment rooms: 1/4 Inch = 1 '-0" (minimum).
5) Sections of congested areas: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).

2. Ductwork layout drawings shall be the baseline system for other components. Ductwork layout drawings shall be modified to accommodate other components as the coordination process progresses.

3. There may be more drawings required for risers, top and bottom levels of mechanical rooms, and shafts.

4. The minimum quantity of drawings will be established at the first coordination meeting and sent to the Architect/Engineer for review. Additional drawings may be required if other areas of congestion are discovered during the coordination process.

1. Coordination drawing files shall be made available to the Architect/Engineer and Owner's Representative. The Architect/Engineer will only review identified conflicts and give an opinion, but will not perform as a coordinator.

2. A plotted set of coordination drawings shall be available at the project site.

3. Coordination drawings are not shop drawings and shall not be submitted as such.

4. The contract drawings are schematic in nature and do not show every fitting and appurtenance for each utility. Each contractor is expected to have included in the bid sufficient fittings, material, and labor to allow for adjustments in routing of utilities made necessary by the coordination process and to provide a complete and functional system.

5. The contractors will not be allowed additional costs or time extensions due to participation in the coordination process.

6. The contractors will not be allowed additional costs or time extensions for additional fittings, reroutings or changes of duct size, that are essentially equivalent sizes to those shown on the drawings and determined necessary through the coordination process.

7. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to determine space priority of equipment in the event of spatial conflicts or interference between equipment, piping, conduit, ducts, and equipment provided by the trades.

8. Changes to the contract documents that are necessary for systems installation and coordination shall be brought to the atte
ntion of the Architect/Engineer.

9. Access panels shall preferably occur only in gypsum board walls or plaster ceilings where indicated on the drawings.
a. Access to mechanical, electrical, technology, and other items located above the ceiling shall be through accessible lay-in ceiling tile areas.
b. Potential layout changes shall be made to avoid additional access panels. c. Additional access panels shall not be allowed without written approval from the Architect/Engineer at the coordination drawing stage.
d. Providing additional access panels shall be considered after other alternatives are reviewed and discarded by the Architect/Engineer and the Owner's Representative. e. When additional access panels are required, they shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner.

10. Complete the coordination drawing process and obtain sign off of the drawings by all contractors prior to installing any of the components.

11. Conflicts that result after the coordination drawings are signed off shall be the responsibility of the contractor or subcontractor who did not properly identify their work requirements, or installed their work without proper coordination.

12. Updated coordination drawings that reflect as-built conditions may be used as record documents.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 21 0500-6

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor's Responsibility Prior to Submitting Pricing Data:

This representation may include imperfect data, interpreted codes, utility guidelines, three- dimensional conflicts, and required field coordination items. Such deficiencies can be corrected when identified prior to ordering material and starting installation. The Contractor agrees to carefully study and compare the individual Contract Documents and report at once in writing to the Design Team any deficiencies the Contractor may discover. The Contractor further agrees to require each subcontractor to likewise study the documents and report at once any deficiencies discovered.

2. The Contractor shall resolve all reported deficiencies with the Architect/Engineer prior to awarding any subcontracts, ordering material, or starting any work with the Contractor's own employees. Any work performed prior to receipt of instructions from the Design Team will be done at the Contractor's risk.

B. Qualifications:

1. Only products of reputable manufacturers are acceptable.

2. All Contractors and subcontractors shall employ only workers skilled in their trades.

C. Compliance with Codes, Laws, Ordinances:

1. Conform to all requirements of the State of <California> Codes, Laws, Ordinances and other regulations having jurisdict
ion.

2. Conform to all published standards of <Insert>.

3. If there is a discrepancy between the codes and regulations and these specifications, the Architect/Engineer shall determine the method or equipment used.

4. If the Contractor notes, at the time of bidding, that any parts of the drawings or specifications do not comply with the codes or regulations, Contractor shall inform the Architect/Engineer in writing, requesting a clarification. If there is insufficient time for this procedure, Contractor shall submit with the proposal a separate price to make the system comply with the codes and regulations.

5. All changes to the system made after letting of the contract, to comply with codes or requirements of Inspectors, shall be made by the Contractor without cost to the Owner.

6. If there is a discrepancy between manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications, the manufacturer's recommendations shall govern.

7. All rotating shafts and/or equipment shall be completely guarded from all contact. Partial guards and/or guards that do not meet all applicable OSHA standards are not acceptable.

Contractor is responsible for providing this guarding if it is not provided with the equipment supplied.

D. Permits, Fees, Taxes, Inspections:

1. Procure all applicable permits and licenses.

2. Abide by all laws, regulations, ordinances, and other rules of the State or Political Subdivision where the work is done, or as required by any duly constitut ed public authority.

3. Pay all charges for permits or licenses.

4. Pay all fees and taxes imposed by the State, Municipal and/or other regulatory bodies.

5. Pay all charges arising out of required inspections by an authorized body.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 21 0500-7

6. Pay all charges arising out of required contract document reviews associated with the project and as initiated by the Owner or authorized agency/consultant.

7. Where applicable, all fixtures, equipment and materials shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. and approved by FM Global.

E. Utility Company Requirements:

1. Secure from the appropriate private or public utility company all applicable requirements.

2. Comply with all utility company requirements.

3. Make application for and pay for fire protection water service connection.

F. Examination of Drawings:

1. The drawings for the fire protection work are completely diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of the work and to indicate the general arrangements and locations of equipment, outlets, etc., and the approximate sizes of equipment.

2. Contractor shall determine the exact locations of equipment and rough-ins, and the exact routing of pipes and ducts to best fit the layout of the job.

3. Scaling of the drawings is not sufficient or accurate for determining these locations.

4. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated arrangements and locations, such changes shall be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

5. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items, such as fittings, boxes, valves, unions, etc., may not be shown, but where required by other sections of the specifications or required for proper install
ation of the work, such items shall be furnished and installed.

6. If an item is either on the drawings or in the specifications, it shall be included in this contract.

7. Determination of quantities of material and equipment required shall be made by the Contractor from the documents. Where discrepancies arise between drawings, schedules and/or specifications, the greater number shall govern.

8. Where used in fire protection documents, the word "furnish" shall mean supply for use, the word "install" shall mean connect complete and ready for operation, and the word "provide" shall mean to supply for use and connect complete and ready for operation. a. Any item listed as furnished shall also be installed, unless otherwise noted. b. Any item listed as installed shall also be furnished, unless otherwise noted.

G. Field Measurements:

1. Verify all pertinent dimensions at the job site before ordering any materials or fabricating any supports, pipes or ducts.

H. Electronic Media/Files:

1. Construction drawings for this project have been prepared utilizing Revit.

2. Contractors and Subcontractors may request electronic media files of the contract drawings and/or copies of the specifications. Specifications will be provided in PDF format.

3. Upon request for electronic media, the Contractor shall complete and return a signed "Electronic File Transmit
tal" form provided by IMEG.

4. If the information requested includes floor plans prepared by others, the Contractor will be responsible for obtaining approval from the appropriate Design Professional for use of that part of the document.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 21 0500-8

5. The electronic contract documents can be used for preparation of shop drawings and as-built drawings only. The information may not be used in whole or in part for any other project.

6. The drawings prepared by IMEG for bidding purposes may not be used directly for ductwork layout drawings or coordination drawings.

7. The use of these CAD documents by the Contractor does not relieve them from their responsibility for coordination of work with other trades and verification of space available for the installation.

8. The information is provided to expedite the project and assist the Contractor with no guarantee by IMEG as to the accuracy or correctness of the information provided. IMEG accepts no responsibility or liability for the Contractor's use of these documents.

1.7 WEB-BASED PROJECT SOFTWARE
A. The General Contractor shall provide a web-based project software site for the purpose of hosting and managing project communication and documentation until completion of the warranty phase.

B. The web-based project software shall include, at a minimum, the following features: construction schedule, submittals, RFIs, ASIs, construction change directives, change orders, drawing management, specification management, payment applications, contract modifications, meeting minutes, construction progress photos.

C. Provide web-based project software user licenses for use by the Architect/Engineer. Access will be provided from the start of the project
through the completion of the warranty phase.

D. At project completion, provide digital archive of entire project in format that is readable by common desktop software applications in format acceptable to Architect/Engineer. Provide data in locked format to prevent further changes.

1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be required for the following items, and for additional items where required elsewhere in the specifications or on the drawings.

1. Submittals list:

Referenced Specification
Section
Submittal Item
21 05 00 Owner Training Agenda
21 05 03 Through Penetration Firestopping
21 05 29 Hangers and Supports
21 05 50 Seismic Restraint Systems
21 05 53 Fire Suppression Identification
21 13 01 Fire Protection Full Design
B. General Submittal Procedures: In addition to the provisions of Division 01, the following are required:

1. Transmittal: Each transmittal shall include the following:
a. Date
b. Project title and number
c. Contractor's name and address
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 21 0500-9
d. Division of work (e.g., plumbing, heating, ventilating, etc.) e. Description of items submitted and relevant specification number f. Notations of deviations from the contract documents
g. Other pertinent data

2. Submittal Cover Sheet: Each submittal shall include a cover sheet containing:
a. Date
b. Project title and number
c. Architect/Engineer
d. Contractor and subcontractors' names and addresses
e. Supplier and manufacturer's names and addresses
f. Division of work (e.g., plumbing, heating, ventilating, etc.) g. Description of item submitted (using project nomenclature) and relevant specification number
h. Notations of deviations from the contract documents
i. Other pertinent data
j. Provide space for Contractor's review stamps

All items within a single specification section shall be packaged together where possible. An individual submittal may contain items from multiple specifications sections if the items are intimately linked (e.g., pumps and motors). c. All sets shall contain an index of the items enclosed with a general topic description on the cover.

4. Content: Submittals shall include all fabrication, erection, layout, and setting drawings; manufacturers' standard drawings; schedules; descriptive literature, catalogs and brochures; performance and test data; electrical power criteria (e.g., voltage, phase, amps, horsepower, kW, etc.)
wiring and control diagrams; Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR); dimensions; shipping and operating weights; shipping splits; service clearances; and all other drawings and descriptive data of materials of construction as may be required to show that the materials, equipment or systems and the location thereof conform to the requirements of the contract documents.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 21 0500-10
7) Dimensions and service clearances are suitable for the intended location. 8) Equipment dimensions are coordinated with support steel, housekeeping pads, openings, etc.
9) Constructability issues are resolved (e.g., weights and dimensions are suitable for getting the item into the building and into place, sinks fit into countertops, etc.).
d. The Contractor shall review, stamp and approve all subcontractors' submittals as described above.
e. The Contractor's approval stamp is required on all submittals. Approval will indicate the Contractor's review of all material and a complete understanding of exactly what is to be furnished. Contractor shall clearly mark all deviations from the contract documents on all submittals. If deviations are not marked by the Contractor, then the item shall be required to meet all drawing and specification requirements.

6. Submittal Identification and Markings:
a. The Contractor shall clearly mark each item with the same nomenclature applied on the drawings or in the specifications.
b. The Contractor shall clearly indicate the size, finish, material, etc. c. Where more than one model is shown on a manufacturer's sheet, the Contractor shall clearly indicate exactly which item and which data is intended. d. All marks and identifications on the submittals shall be unambiguous.

7. Schedule submittals to expedite the project. Coordinate submission of related items.

8. Identify variat
ions from the contract documents and product or system limitations that may be detrimental to the successful performance of the completed work.

9. Reproduction of contract documents alone is not acceptable for submittals.

10. Incomplete submittals will be rejected without review. Partial submittals will only be reviewed with prior approval from the Architect/Engineer.

11. Submittals not required by the contract documents may be returned without review.

12. The Architect/Engineer's responsibility shall be to review one set of shop drawing submittals for each product. If the first submittal is incomplete or does not comply with the drawings and/or specifications, the Contractor shall be responsible to bear the cost for the Architect/Engineer to recheck and handle the additional shop drawing submittals.

13. Submittals shall be reviewed and approved by the Architect/Engineer before releasing any equipment for manufacture or shipment.

14. Contractor's responsibility for errors, omissions. or deviation from the contract documents in submittals is not relieved by the Architect/Engineer's approval.

15. Schedule shall allow for adequate time to perform orderly and proper review of submittals, including time for consultants and Owner if required, and resubmittals by Contractor if necessary, and to cause no delay in Work or in activities of Owner or other contractors. a. Allow at least two weeks for Architect's/Engineer's review and processing of each submittal.

16. Architect/Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal which, in the Architect/Engineer's opinion, requires coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. The Architect/Engineer will notify the Contractor, in writing, when they exercise this right.

1. Distribution: Email submittals as attachments to all parties designated by the Architect/Engineer, unless a web-based submittal program is used.

2. Transmittals: Each submittal shall include an individual electronic letter of transmittal.

3. Format: Electronic submittals shall be in PDF format only. Scanned copies, in PDF format, of paper originals are acceptable. Submittals that are not legible will be rejected. Do not set any permission restrictions on files; protected, locked, or secured documents will be rejected.

4. File Names: Electronic submittal file names shall include the relevant specification section number followed by a description of the item submitted, as follows. Where possible, include the transmittal as the first page of the PDF instead of using multiple electronic files. a. Submittal file name: 21 XX XX.description.YYYYMMDD
b. Transmittal file name: 21 XX XX.description.YYYYMMDD

5. File Size: Files shall be transmitted via a pre-approved method. Larger files may require an alternative transfer method, which shall also be pre-approved.

D. Paper Copy Submittal Procedures:

1. Paper copies are acceptable where electronic copies are not provided.

2. The Contractor shall submit ten (10)paper copies of each shop drawing.

3. Each set shall be bound in a three-ring binder or presentation binder. Copies that are loose or in pocket folders are not acceptable.

1.9 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.

The requirements herein are in addition to the provisions of Division 01.

B. Format:

1. Use AIA Document Continuation Sheets G703 or another similar form approved by the Owner and Architect/Engineer.

2. Submit in Excel format.

3. Support values given with substantiating data.

C. Preparation:

1. Itemize work required by each specification section and list all providers. All work provided by subcontractors and major suppliers shall be listed on the Schedule of Values. List each subcontractor and supplier by company name.

2. Break down all costs into:
a. Material: Delivered cost of product with taxes paid. b. Labor: Labor cost, excluding overhead and profit.

3. Itemize the cost for each of the following:
a. Overhead and profit.
b. Bonds.
c. Insurance.
d. General Requirements: Itemize all requirements.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 21 0500-12

1. Indicated by Architect/Engineer.

2. Change of subcontractor or supplier occurs.

3. Change of product or equipment occurs.

1.10 CHANGE ORDERS
A. A detailed material and labor takeoff shall be prepared for each change order, along with labor rates and markup percentages. Change orders shall be broken down by sheet or associated individual line item indicated in the change associated narrative, whichever provides the most detailed breakdown.

Change orders with inadequate breakdown will be rejected.

B. Itemized pricing with unit cost shall be provided from all distributors and associated subcontractors.

C. Change order work shall not proceed
until authorized.

1.11 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS' INSPECTION
A. The following equipment shall not be placed in operation until a competent installation and service representative of the manufacturer has inspected the installation and certified that the equipment is properly installed, adjusted and lubricated; that preliminary operating instructions have been given; and that the equipment is ready for operation:

1. Fire Seal Systems
B. Contractor shall arrange for and obtain supplier's on-site inspection(s) at proper time(s) to assure each phase of equipment installation and/or connection is in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

C. Submit copies of start-up reports to the Architect/Engineer and include copies of Owner's Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 21 0500-13

1.12 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING & MAINTENANCE
A. Exercise care in transporting and handling to avoid damage to materials. Store materials on the site to prevent damage. Keep materials clean, dry and free from harmful conditions. Immediately remove any materials that become wet or that are suspected of becoming contaminated with mold or other organisms.

B. Protect equipment, components, and openings with airtight covers and exercise care at every stage of storage, handling, and installation of equipment to prevent airborne dust and dirt from entering or fouling equipment to include, but not limited to:

1. Motor windings.

2. Bearings.

3. Pipe connections.

4. Starter and control cabinets.

C. Equipment and components that are visibly damaged or have been subject to environmental conditions prior to building turnover to Owner that could shorten the life of the component (for example, water damage, humidity, dust and debris, excessive hot or cold storage location, etc.) shall be repaired or replaced with new equipment or components without additional cost to the building owner.

D. Keep all bearings properly lubricated and all belts properly tensioned and aligned.

E. Coordinate the installation of heavy and large equipment with the General Contractor and/or Owner. If the Mechanical Contractor does not have prior documented experience in rigging and lifting similar equipment, he/she shall contract with a qualified lifting and rigging service that has similar document
ed experience. Follow all equipment lifting and support guidelines for handling and moving.

F. Contractor is responsible for moving equipment into the building and/or site. Contractor shall review site prior to bid for path locations and any required building modifications to allow movement of equipment. Contractor shall coordinate the work with other trades.

1.13 NETWORK / INTERNET CONNECTED EQUIPMENT
A. These specifications may require certain equipment or systems to have network, Internet and/or remote access capability ("Network Capability"). Any requirement for Network Capability shall be interpreted only as a functional capability and is not to be construed as authority to connect or enable any Network Capability. Network Capability may only be connected or enabled with the express written consent of the Owner.

1.14 WARRANTY
A. Provide one-year warranty, unless otherwise noted, to the Owner for all fixtures, equipment, materials, and workmanship.

B. The warranty period for all work in this Division of the specifications shall commence on the date of final acceptance, unless a whole or partial system or any separate piece of equipment or component is put into use for the benefit of any party other than the installing contractor with prior written authoriz
ation. In this instance, the warranty period shall commence on the date when such whole system, partial system or separate piece of equipment or component is placed in operation and accepted in writing by the Owner.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 21 0500-14
C. Warranty requirements shall extend to correction, without cost to the Owner, of all Work found to be defective or nonconforming to the contract documents. The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting all damage resulting from defects or nonconformance with contract documents.

1.15 INSURANCE
A. Contractor shall maintain insurance coverage as set forth in Division 0 of these specifications.

1.16 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTION
A. Where several manufacturers' names are given, the scheduled manufacturer is the basis for job design and establishes the quality required.

B. Equivalent equipment manufactured by the other listed manufacturers may be used. Contractor shall ensure that all items submitted by these other manufacturers meet all requirements of the drawings and specifications and fits in the allocated space. When using other listed manufacturers, the Contractor shall assume responsibility for any and all modifications necessary (including, but not limited to structural supports, electrical connections, piping and ductwork connections and arrangement, plumbing connections and rough-in, and regulatory agency approval, etc.) and coordinate such with other contractors.

C. Any material, article or equipment of other unnamed manufacturers which will adequately perform the services and duties imposed by the design and is of a quality equal to or better than the material, article or equipment identified by the drawings and specifications may be used if approval is secured in writing from the Architec
t/Engineer not later than ten days prior to the bid opening.

D. This Contractor assumes all costs incurred as a result of using the offered material, article or equipment, on the Contractors part or on the part of other Contractors whose work is affected.

E. This Contractor may list voluntary add or deduct prices for alternate materials on the bid form.

These items will not be used in determining the low bidder.

F. All material substitutions requested later than ten (10) days prior to bid opening must be listed as voluntary changes on the bid form.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 JOBSITE SAFETY
A. Neither the professional activities of the Architect/Engineer, nor the presence of the Architect/Engineer or the employees and subconsultants at a construction site, shall relieve the Contractor and other entity of their obligations, duties and responsibilities including, but not limited to, construction means, methods, sequence, techniques or procedures necessary for performing, superintending or coordinating all portions of the work of construction in accordance with the contract documents and any health or safety precautions required by any regulatory agencies. The Architect/Engineer and personnel have no authority to exercise any control over any constructi on
contractor or other entity or their employees in connection with their work or any health or safety precautions. The Contractor is solely responsible for jobsite safety. The Architect/Engineer and the Architect/Engineer's consultants shall be indemnified and shall be made additional insureds under the Contractor's general liability insurance policy.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 21 0500-15

3.2 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OBSERVATION OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall provide seven (7) calendar days' notice to the Architect/Engineer prior to:

1. Placing fill over underground and underslab utilities.

2. Covering exterior walls, interior partitions and chases.

3. Installing hard or suspended ceilings and soffits.

B. The Architect/Engineer will have the opportunity to review the installation and provide a written report noting deficiencies requiring correction. The Contractor's schedule shall account for these reviews and show them as line items in the approved schedule.

C. Above-Ceiling Final Observation

1. All work above the ceilings must be complete prior to the Architect/Engineer's review. This includes, but is not limited to:
a. Pipe wall penetrations are sealed.
b. Pipe identification is installed.
c. Branch piping in the location of sprinklers shall be dropped to the ceiling.

2. In order to prevent the Above-Ceiling Final Observation from occurring too early, the Contractor shall review the status of the work and certify, in writing, that the work is ready for the Above-Ceiling Final Observation.

3. It is understood that if the Architect/Engineer finds the ceilings have been installed prior to this review and prior to 7 days elapsing, the Architect/Engineer may not recommend further payments to the contractor until such time as full access has been provided.

3.3 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 01.

IDPH Final Occupancy Checklist for Request of Inspection:

1. Each Contractor must submit all forms and certifications required by IDPH relating to their work at 85% completion of the project or when directed by the Owner/Architect/Engineer.

C. Final Jobsite Observation:

1. In order to prevent the Final Jobsite Observation from occurring too early, the Contractor is required to review the completion status of the project and certify that the job is ready for the final jobsite observation.

2. Attached to the end of this section is a typical list of items that represent the degree of job completeness expected prior to requesting a review.

3. Upon Contractor certification that the project is complete and ready for a final observation, the Contractor shall sign the attached certification and return it to the Architect/Engineer so that the final observation can be scheduled.

4. It is understood that if the Architect/Engineer finds the job not ready for the final observation and that additional trips and observations are required to bring the project to completion, the costs incurred by the Architect/Engineer's additional time and expenses will be deducted from the Contractor's contract retainage prior to final payment at the completion of the job.

1. Operation and maintenance manuals with copies of approved shop drawings.

2. Record documents including marked-up or reproducible drawings and specifications.

3. A report documenting the instructions given to the Owner's representatives complete with the number of hours spent in the instruction. The report shall bear the signature of an authorized agent of This Contractor and shall be signed by the Owner's representatives.

4. Inspection report by the State Fire Marshal of the fire protection system.

5. Start-up reports on all equipment requiring a factory installation inspection or start-up.

6. Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification sections. Deliver to project site and place in location as directed; receipt by Architect/Engineer required prior to final payment approval.

3.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. General:

1. Provide an electronic copy of the O&M manuals as described below for Architect/Engineer's review and approval. The electronic copy shall be corrected as required to address the Architect/Engineer's comments. Once corrected, electronic copies and paper copies shall be distributed as directed by the Architect/Engineer.

2. Approved O&M manuals shall be completed and in the Owner's possession prior to Owner's acceptance and at least 10 days prior to instruction of operating personnel.

B. Electronic Submitt
al Procedures:

1. Distribution: Email the O&M manual as attachments to all parties designated by the Architect/Engineer.

2. Transmittals: Each submittal shall include an individual electronic letter of transmittal.

4. File Names: Electronic submittal file names shall include the relevant specification section number followed by a description of the item submitted, as follows. Where possible, include the transmittal as the first page of the PDF instead of using multiple electronic files. a. O&M file name: O&M.div21.contractor.YYYYMMDD
b. Transmittal file name: O&Mtransmittal.div21.contractor.YYYYMMDD

5. File Size: Files shall be transmitted via a pre-approved method. Larger files may require an alternative transfer method, which shall also be pre-approved.

6. All text shall be searchable.

7. Bookmarks shall be used, dividing information first by specification section, then systems, major equipment and finally individual items. All bookmark titles shall include the nomenclature used in the construction documents and shall be an active link to the first page of the section being referenced.

C. Paper Copy Submittal Procedures:

1. Once the electronic version of the manuals has been approved by the Architect/Engineer, paper copies of the O&M manual
shall be provided to the Owner. The content of the paper copies shall be identical to the corrected electronic copy.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 21 0500-17

2. Binder Requirements: The Contractor shall submit O&M manuals in heavy duty, locking three ring binders. Incorporate clear vinyl sheet sleeves on the front cover and spine for slip- in labeling. "Peel and stick" labels are not acceptable. Sheet lifters shall be supplied at the front of each notebook. The three-ring binders shall be 1/2" thicker than initial material to allow for future inserts. If more than one notebook is required, label in consecutive order. For example; 1 of 2, 2 of 2. No other form of binding is acceptable.

3. Binder Labels: Label the front and spine of each binder with "Operation and Maintenance Instructions", title of project, and subject matter.

4. Index Tabs: Divide information by specification section, major equipment, or systems using index tabs. All tab titling shall be clearly printed under reinforced plastic tabs. All equipment shall be labeled to match the identification in the construction documents.

D. Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall include:

1. Title Page: Include title page with project title, Architect, Engineer, Contractor, all subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers, with addresses, telephone numbers, website addresses, email addresses and point of contacts. Website URLs and email addresses shall be active links in the electronic submittal.

2. Table of Contents: Include a table of contents describing specification section, systems, major
equipment, and individual items.

3. Copies of all final approved shop drawings and submittals. Include Architect's/Engineer's shop drawing review comments. Insert the individual shop drawing directly after the Operation and Maintenance information for the item(s) in the review form.

4. Copy of final approved test and balance reports.

5. Copies of all factory inspections and/or equipment startup reports.

6. Copies of warranties.

7. Schematic electrical power/controls wiring diagrams of the equipment that have been updated for field conditions. Field wiring shall have label numbers to match drawings.

8. Dimensional drawings of equipment.

9. Capacities and utility consumption of equipment.

10. Detailed parts lists with lists of suppliers.

11. Operating procedures for each system.

12. Maintenance schedule and procedures. Include a chart listing maintenance requirements and frequency.

13. Repair procedures for major components.

14. List of lubricants in all equipment and recommended frequency of lubrication.

15. Instruction books, cards, and manuals furnished with the equipment.

3.5 INSTRUCTING THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVES
A. Adequately instruct the Owner's designated representatives in the maintenance, care, and operation of all systems installed under this contract.

B. Provide verbal and written instructions to the Owner's representatives by FACTORY PERSONNEL in the care, maintenance, and operation of the equipment and systems.

C. Contractor shall make a DVD video recording of instructions to the Owner while explaining the system so additi
onal personnel may view the instructions at a later date. The video recording shall be the property of the Owner.

D. The Owner has the option to make a video recording of all instructions. Coordinate schedule of instructions to facilitate this recording.

1. Explanation of all system flow diagrams.

2. Maintenance of equipment.

3. Start-up procedures for all major equipment.

4. Explanation of seasonal system changes.

5. Description of emergency system operation.

F. Notify the Architect/Engineer of the time and place for the verbal instructions to be given to the Owner's representative so a representative can attend if desired.

G. Minimum hours of instruction for each item shall be:

1. Sprinkler System(s) - <2 > hours.

H. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed, written training agenda and submit it to the Architect/Engineer a minimum of two weeks prior to the formal training for approval. The written agenda shall include specific training points within the items described above. For example: how to adjust setpoints, troubleshooting, proper start-up, proper shut-down, seasonal changes, draining, venting, changing filters, changing belts, etc. Failure to provide and follow an approved training agenda may result in additional training required at the expense of the Contractor.

I. Operating Instructions:

1. Contractor is responsible for all instructions to the Owner's representatives for the fire protection and control systems.

2. If the Contractor does not have staff that can adequately provide the required instructions the Contractor shall include in the bid an adequate amount to reimburse the Owner for the Architect/Enginee
r to perform these services.

3.6 SYSTEM STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. The fire protection systems shall be complete and operating. System startup, testing, adjusting, and balancing to obtain satisfactory system performance is the responsibility of the Contractor. This includes calibration and adjustments of all controls, noise level adjustments and final comfort adjustments as required.

B. Complete all manufacturer-recommended startup procedures and checklists to verify proper motor rotation, electrical power voltage is within equipment limitations, equipment controls maintain pressures and temperatures within acceptable ranges, all filters and protective guards are in-place, acceptable access is provided for maintenance and servicing, and equipment operation does not pose a danger to personnel or property.

C. All operating conditions and control sequences shall be tested during the start-up period. Test all interlocks, safety shutdowns, controls, and alarms.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 21 0500-19
D. The Contractor, subcontractors, and equipment suppliers shall have skilled technicians to ensure that all systems perform properly. If the Architect/Engineer is requested to visit the job site for trouble shooting, assisting in start-up, obtaining satisfactory equipment operation, resolving installation and/or workmanship problems, equipment substitution issues or unsatisfactory system performance, including call backs during the warranty period, through no fault of the design; the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner on a time and materials basis for services rendered at the Architect/Engineer's standard hourly rates in effect when the services are requested. The Contractor shall pay the Owner for services required that are product, installation or workmanship related.

Payment is due within 30 days after services are rendered.

3.7 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. The following paragraphs supplement Division 01 requirements.

B. Maintain at the job site a separate and complete set of fire protection drawings and specifications with all changes made to the systems clearly and permanently marked in complete detail.

C. Mark drawings to indicate revisions to piping size and location, both exterior and interior; including locations of other control devices, and other units requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual equipment locations, dimensioned from column lines; actual inverts and locations of underground piping; concealed equipment, dimensioned from column lines; mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control
devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located; Change Orders; concealed control system devices.

D. Before completion of the project, a set of reproducible fire protection drawings will be given to the Contractor for transfer of all as-built conditions from the paper set maintained at the job site. All marks on reproducibles shall be clear and permanent.

E. Mark specifications to show approved substitutions; Change Orders, and actual equipment and materials used.

F. Record changes daily and keep the marked drawings available for the Architect/Engineer's examination at any normal work time.

G. Upon completing the job, and before final payment is made, give the marked-up drawings to the Architect/Engineer.

3.8 PAINTING
A. This Contractor shall paint the following items:

1. All piping in mechanical room

2. Piping exposed in kitchen
B. Paint all equipment that is marred or damaged prior to the Owner's acceptance. Paint and color shall match original equipment paint and shall be obtained from the equipment supplier if available.

C. Equipment in finished areas that will be painted to match the room decor will be painted by others.

Should this Contractor install equipment in a finished area after the area has been painted, the Contract
or shall have the equipment and all its supports, hangers, etc., painted to match the room decor.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 21 0500-20
D. Equipment cabinets, casings, covers, metal jackets, etc., in equipment rooms or concealed spaces, shall be furnished in standard or prime finish, free from scratches, abrasions, chips, etc.

E. Equipment in occupied spaces, or if standard to the unit, shall have a baked primer with baked enamel finish coat free from scratches, abrasions, chips, etc. If color option is specified or is standard to the unit, this Contractor shall, before ordering, verify with the Architect/Engineer the color preference and furnish this color.

F. Paint all equipment in unfinished areas such as boiler room, mechanical spaces, storage room, etc., furnished by this Contractor. Equipment furnished with a factory coat of paint and enamel need not be painted, provided the factory applied finish is not marred or spattered. If so, equipment shall be refinished with the same paint as was factory applied.

G. Paint all outdoor uninsulated steel piping the color selected by Owner or Architect/Engineer.

H. After surfaces have been thoroughly cleaned and are free of oil, dirt, and other foreign matter, paint all pipes and equipment with the following:

1. Bare Metal Surfaces: Apply one coat of primer suitable for the metal being painted. Finish with two coats of Alkyd base enamel paint.

2. Color of paint shall be as follows:
a. All piping in mecha
nical room:
1) Fire Protection: Red pipe/white letters
b. Piping exposed in kitchen:
1) All Piping: White

3.9 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Thoroughly clean all equipment and systems prior to the Owner's final acceptance of the project.

Clean all foreign paint, grease, oil, dirt, labels, stickers, and other foreign material from all equipment.

B. Clean all areas where moisture is present. Immediately report any mold, biological growth, or water damage.

C. Remove all rust, scale, dirt, oils, stickers and thoroughly clean exterior of all exposed piping, hangers, and accessories.

D. Remove all rubbish, debris, etc., accumulated during construction from the premises.

3.10 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all equipment, valves, etc., with other trades to maintain clear access area for servicing.

B. All equipment shall be installed in such a way to maximize access to parts needing service or maintenance. Review the final field location, placement, and orientation of equipment with the Owner's designated representative prior to setting equipment.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 21 0500-21
C. Installation of equipment or devices without regard to coordination of access requirements and confirmation with the Owner's designated representative will result in removal and reinstallation of the equipment at the Contractor's expense.

D. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with the low emitting material limits of the following standards:

1. CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions VOC from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers Version 1.1.

2. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications. All adhesives and sealants wet-applied on site shall comply with the applicable chemical content requirements of SCAQMD Rule 1168.

3. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule SCAQMD 1113 - Wet Applied Paints and Coatings. All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet the applicable VOC limits of SCAQMD Rule 1113.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 21 0500-22

READINESS CERTIFICATION PRIOR TO FINAL JOBSITE OBSERVATION To prevent the final job observation from occurring too early, we require that the Contractor review the completion status of the project and, by copy of this document, certify that the job is indeed ready for the final job observation. The following is a typical list of items that represent the degree of job completeness expected prior to your requesting a final job observation.

1. Penetrations fire sealed and labeled in accordance with specifications.

2. All pumps operating and balanced.

3. Fire protection system operational.

4. Pipes labeled.

Accepted by:

Prime Contractor _______________________________________________ By ___________________________________ Date ___________________ Upon Contractor certification that the project is complete and ready for a final job observation, we require the Contractor to sign this agreement and return it to the Architect/Engineer so that the final observation can be scheduled.

It is understood that if the Architect/Engineer finds the job not ready for the final observation and that additional trips and observations are required to bring the project to completion, the costs incurred by the Architect/Engineers for additional time and expenses will be deducted from the Contractor's contract retainage prior to final payment at the completion of the job.

END OF SECTION 21 0500
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 21 0503-1
SECTION 21 0503 - THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Through-Penetration Firestopping.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials B. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials C. ANSI/UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops D. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems E. UL Fire Resistance Directory Through Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ) F. Intertek / Warnock Hersey - Directory of Listed Products G. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials H. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops I. The Building Officials and Code Administrators National Building Code J. NFPA 5000 - Building Construction Safety Code
K. CBC California Building Code

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 21 0500.

B. Submit Firestopping Installers Certification for all installers on the project.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit for each condition requiring firestopping. Include descriptions of the specific penetrating item, actual wall/floor construction, manufacturer's installation instructions, and UL or Intertek / Warnock Hersey Assembly number.

D. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-penetration firestop system, along with the following information:

1. Types of penetrating items.

2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated.

3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each locat
ion identified by firestop design
designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

4. F ratings for each firestop system.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 21 0503-2
E. Maintain a notebook on the job site at all times that contains copies of approved submittals for all through penetration firestopping to be installed. Notebook shall be made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction at their request and turned over to the Owner at the end of construction as part of the O&M Manuals.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store, protect and handle products on site. Accept material on site in factory containers and packing.

Inspect for damage. Protect from deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. Follow manufacturer's instructions for storage.

B. Install material prior to expiration of product shelf life.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: For penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.

1. Fire-resistance-rated walls including fire partitions, fire barriers, and smoke barriers.

2. Fire-resistance-rated horizontal assemblies including floors, floor/ceiling assemblies, and ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies.

B. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to light, traffic, moisture, or physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after
construction.

C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

D. For through-penetration firestop systems in air plenums, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 50, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

E. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with the low emitting material limits of the following standards:

1. CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions VOC from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers Version 1.1.

3. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule SCAQMD 1113 - Wet Applied Paints and Coatings. All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet the applicable VOC limits of SCAQMD Rule 1113.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 21 0503-3

1.6 MEETINGS
A. Pre-installation meeting: A pre-installation meeting shall be scheduled and shall include the Construction Manager, General Contractor, all Subcontractors associated with the installation of systems penetrating fire barriers, Firestopping Manufacturer's Representative, and the Owner.

1. Review foreseeable methods related to firestopping work.

2. Tour representative areas where firestopping is to be installed; inspect and discuss each type of condition and each type of substrate that will be encountered, and preparation to be performed by other trades.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide one year warranty on parts and labor.

B. Warranty shall cover repair or replacement of firestop systems which fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance, general durability, or appear to deteriorate in any manner not clearly specified by the manufacturer as an inherent quality of the material.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through-penetration firestop systems indicated for each application that are produced by one of the following manufacturers. All firestopping systems installed shall be provided by a single manufacturer.

B. Manufacturers:

1. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division.

2. Hilti, Inc.

3. RectorSeal Corporation, Metacaulk.

4. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division.

5. Johns-Manville.

6. Specified Technologies Inc. (S.T.I.)

7. Spec Seal Firestop Products

8. AD Firebarrier Protection Systems

9. Dow Corning Corp.

10. Fire Trak Corp.

11. International Protecti
ve Coating Corp.

12. HoldRite

2.2 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
A. Provide materials and systems classified by or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey to provide firestopping equal to time rating of construction being penetrated.

B. All firestopping materials shall be free of asbestos, lead, PCB's, and other materials that would require hazardous waste removal.

C. Firestopping shall be flexible to allow for normal penetrating item movement due to expansion and contraction.

E. Provide firestopping systems capable of supporting floor loads where systems are exposed to possible floor loading or traffic.

F. Provide firestopping systems allowing continuous insulation for all insulated pipes.

G. Provide firestopping systems classified by UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey for penetrations through all fire rated construction. Firestopping systems shall be selected from the UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory Category XHEZ based on substrate construction and penetrating item size and material and shall fall within the range of numbers listed:

1. Combustible Framed Floors and Chase Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated:
a. F Rating = Floor/Wall Rating
b. L Rating = Penetrations in Smoke Barriers
Penetrating Item UL System No.

No Penetrating Item FC 0000-0999*
Metallic Pipe or Conduit FC 1000-1999
Non-Metallic Pipe or Conduit FC 2000-2999
Electrical Cables FC 3000-3999
Cable Trays FC 4000-4999
Insulated Pipes FC 5000-5999
Bus Duct and Misc. Electrical FC 6000-6999
Duct without Damper and Misc. Mechanical FC 7000-7999
Multiple Penetrations FC 8000-8999
*Alternate method of firestopping is patching opening to match original rated construction.

2. Non-Combustible Framed Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated:
a. F Rating = Wall Rating
b. L Rating = Penetrations in Smoke Barriers
Penetrating Item UL System No.

No Penetrating Item WL 0000-0999*
Metallic Pipe or Conduit WL 1000-1999
Non-Metallic Pipe or Conduit WL 2000-2999
Electrical Cables WL 3000-3999
Cable Trays WL 4000-4999
Insulated Pipes WL 5000-5999
Bus Duct and Misc. Electrical WL 6000-6999
Duct without Damper and Misc. Mechanical WL 7000-7999
Multiple Penetrations WL 8000-8999
*Alternate method of firestopping is patching opening to match original rated construction.

3. Concrete or Masonry Floors and Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated:
a. F Rating = Wall/Floor Rating
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 21 0503-5
b. L Rating = Penetrations in Smoke Barriers
Penetrating Item UL System No.

No Penetrating Item CAJ 0000-0999*
Metallic Pipe or Conduit CAJ 1000-1999
Non-Metallic Pipe or Conduit CAJ 2000-2999
Electrical Cables CAJ 3000-3999
Cable Trays CAJ 4000-4999
Insulated Pipes CAJ 5000-5999
Bus Duct and Misc. Electrical CAJ 6000-6999
Duct without Damper and Misc. Mechanical CAJ 7000-7999
Multiple Penetrations CAJ 8000-8999
*Alternate method of firestopping is patching opening to match original rated construction.

H. Any opening in walls or floors not covered by the listed series of numbers shall be coordinated with the firestopping manufacturer.

I. Any openings in floors or walls not described in the UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory, or outlined in manufacturer's information shall be sealed in a manner agreed upon by the Firestopping Manufacturer, Owner, and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Ensure all surfaces that contact seal materials are free of dirt, dust, grease, oil, rust, or loose materials. Clean and repair surfaces as required. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Ensure substrate and penetrating items have been permanently installed prior to installing firestopping systems. Ensure penetrating items have been properly spaced and have proper clearance prior to installing firestopping systems.

C. Surfaces to which sealing materials are to be installed must meet the selected UL or Intertek / Warnock Hersey system substrate criteria.

D. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer. Confine primer to area of bond.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. In existing construction, provide firestopping of openings prior to and after installation of penetrating items. Remove any existing coatings on surfaces prior to firestopping installation.

Temporary firestopping shall consist of packing openings with fire resistant mineral wool for the full thicknes
s of substrate, or an alternate method approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. All openings shall be temporarily firestopped immediately upon their installation and shall remain so until the permanent UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey listed firestopping system is installed.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 21 0503-6
B. Install penetration seal materials in accordance with printed instructions of the UL or Intertek / Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory and with the manufacturer's printed application instructions.

C. Install dams as required to properly contain firestopping materials within openings and as required to achieve required fire resistance rating. Remove combustible damming after appropriate curing.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Clean excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not cause damage.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide and install labels adjacent to each firestopping location. Label shall be provided by the firestop system supplier and contain the following information in a contrasting color:

1. The words "Warning - Through Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Firestop System Supplier; UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey system number; date installed; contrac
tor name and phone number; manufacturer's representative name, address, and phone number.

3.5 INSPECTION
A. All penetrations shall be inspected by the manufacturer's representative to ensure proper installation.

B. Access to firestop systems shall be maintained for examination by the Authority Having Jurisdiction at their request.

C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop system with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements.

D. The contractor shall allow for visual destructive review of 5% of installed firestop systems (minimum of one) to prove compliance with specifications and manufacturer's instructions and details. Destructive system removal shall be performed by the contractor and witnessed by the engineer and manufacturer's factory representative. The engineer shall have sole discretion of which firestop system installations will be reviewed. The contractor is responsible for all costs associated with this requirement including labor and material for removing and replacing the installed firestop system. If any firestop system is found to not be installed per manufacturer's specific instructions and details, all firestop systems are subject to destructive review and replacement at the engineer's discretion and the contractor's expense.

END OF SECTION 21 0503
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE SUPPRESSION SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 21 0529-1 SECTION 21 0529 - FIRE SUPPRESSION SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Hangers, Supports, and Associated Anchors.

B. Equipment Bases and Supports.

C. Sleeves and Seals.

D. Flashing and Sealing of Equipment and Pipe Stacks.

E. Cutting of Openings.

F. Escutcheon Plates and Trim.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Support Sprinkler Piping in conformance with NFPA 13.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation.

B. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.

C. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.

D. MSS SP-127 - Bracing for Piping Systems Seismic-Wind-Dynamic Design, Selection, Application E. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.

1.4 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Furnish sleeves and hanger inserts to General Contractor for placement into formwork.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. Refer to Section 21 0550 for additional requirements for seismic restraints.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE SUPPRESSION SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 21 0529-2

2.2 HANGER RODS
A. Hanger rods for single rod hangers supporting steel, copper, and CPVC piping shall conform to the following:

1. Hanger Rod Diameter:
a. 4" and smaller: 3/8"
b. 5", 6", and 8": 1/2"
c. 10" and 12": 5/8"
B. Hanger rods and accessories used in mechanical spaces or otherwise dry areas shall have ASTM B633 electro-plated zinc finish.

C. All hanger rods, nuts, washers, clevises, etc., in damp areas shall have ASTM A123 hot-dip galvanized finish applied after fabrication. This applies to the following areas:

2.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General:

1. All pipe hangers, clamps, and supports shall conform to Manufacturers Standardization Society MSS- SP-58, 69, 89, and 127 (where applicable).

B. Vertical Supports:

1. Support and laterally brace vertical pipes at every floor level in multi-story structures, and more frequently when required by applicable codes, but never at intervals over 15 feet. Support vertical pipes with riser clamps installed below hubs, couplings or lugs. Provide sufficient flexibility to accommodate expansion and contraction without compromising fire barrier penetrations and other fixed takeoff locations.
a. Products:
1) Eaton Fig. B3373 Series
2) nVent 510 Series
3) Anvil Fig. 90

2. Wall supports shall be used where vertical height of structure exceeds minimum spacing requirements.

Install wall supports at same spacing as hangers or strut supports along vertical length of pipe runs.

3. Masonry Anchors: Fasten to concrete masonry units with expansion anchors or self-tapping masonry screws. For expansion anchors into hollow concrete block, use sleeve-type anchors designed for the specific application. Do not fasten in masonry joints. Do not use powder actuated fasteners, wooden plugs, or plastic inserts.

C. Hangers and Clamps:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, hangers shall be as follows:
a. Clevis Type: Service: Bare Metal Pipe, Rigid Plastic Pipe 1) Products: Bare Steel, Plastic or Insulated Pipe
a) Anvil Fig. 260
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE SUPPRESSION SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 21 0529-3 b) Eaton Fig. 3100
c) nVent Model 400
b. Adjustable Swivel Ring Type: Service: Bare Metal Pipe - 4 inches and Smaller 1) Products: Bare Steel Pipe
a) Anvil Fig. 69
b) Eaton Fig. B3170NF
c) nVent Model FCN

2. Support may be fabricated from U-channel strut or similar shapes. Piping less than 4" in diameter shall be secured to strut with clamps of proper design and capacity as required to maintain spacing and alignment. Strut shall be independently supported from hanger drops or building structure. Size and support shall be per manufacturer's installation requirements for structural support of piping. Clamps shall not interrupt piping insulation.

3. Strut used in mechanical spaces or otherwise dry areas shall have ASTM B633 electro-plated zinc finish.

4. Strut used in damp areas listed in hanger rods shall have ASTM A123 hot-dip galvanized finish applied after fabrication.

5. Unless otherwise indicated, pipe supports for use with struts shall be as follows:
a. Clamp Type: Service: Bare Metal Pipe, Rigid Plastic Pipe 1) Clamps in direct contact with copper pipe shall include plastic pipe insert similar to Unistrut Cush-A-Clamp, Hydra-Zorb, nVent Cushion Clamp or Eaton Vibra-Clamp. 2) Pipes subject to expansion and contraction shall have clamps slightly oversized to allow limited pipe movement.
3) Products: Bare Steel, Plastic or Insulated Pipe
a) Unistrut Fig. P1100 or P2500
b)
Eaton Fig. B2000 or B2400
c) Anvil AS1200
d) nVent USC

2.4 OPENINGS IN FLOORS, WALLS AND CEILINGS
A. Exact locations of all openings for the installation of materials shall be determined by the Contractor and given to the General Contractor for installation or construction as the structure is built.

B. Coordinate all openings with other Contractors.

C. Hire the proper tradesman and furnish all labor, material and equipment to cut openings in or through existing structures, or openings in new structures that were not installed, or additional openings. Repair all spalling and damage to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. Make saw cuts before breaking out concrete to ensure even and uniform opening edges.

D. Said cutting shall be at the complete expense of each Contractor. Failure to coordinate openings with other Contractors shall not exempt the Contractor from providing openings at Contractor's expense.

E. Do not cut structural members without written approval of the Architect or Structural Engineer.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE SUPPRESSION SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 21 0529-4 Model Service Element
Material
Temperature Range
S Standard (Stainless) EPDM -40ºF to 250ºF
T Fire Seals (1 hour) Silicone -67ºF to 400ºF
FS Fire Seals (3 hours) Silicone -67ºF to 400ºF
OS Oil
Resistant/Stainless
Nitrile -40°F to 210°F

2.5 ESCUTCHEON PLATES AND TRIM
A. Fit escutcheons to all insulated or uninsulated exposed pipes passing through walls, floors, or ceilings of finished rooms.

B. Escutcheons shall be heavy gauge, cold rolled steel, copper coated under a chromium plated finish, heavy spring clip, rigid hinge and latch.

C. Install galvanized steel (unless otherwise indicated) trim strip to cover vacant space and raw construction edges of all rectangular openings in finished rooms. This includes duct and pipe openings.

2.6 PIPE PENETRATIONS
A. Seal all pipe penetrations. Seal non-rated walls and floor penetrations with grout or caulk. Backing material may be used.

B. Seal fire rated wall and floor penetrations with fire seal system as specified.

2.7 PIPE ANCHORS
A. Provide all items needed to allow adequate expansion and contraction of all piping. All piping shall be supported, guided, aligned, and anchored as required.

B. Repair all piping leaks and associated damage. Pipes shall not rub on any part of the building.

2.8 FINISH
A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FIRE SUPPRESSION SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
A. General Installation Requirements:

1. Install all items per manufacturer's instructions.

2. Coordinate the location and method of support of piping systems with all installations under other Divisions and Sections of the Specific
ations.

3. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE SUPPRESSION SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 21 0529-5

4. Supports shall extend directly to building structure. Do not support piping from duct hangers. Do not allow lighting or ceiling supports to be hung from piping supports.

B. Supports Requirements:

1. Where building structural steel is fireproofed, all hangers, clamps, auxiliary steel, etc., which attach to it shall be installed prior to application of fireproofing. Repair all fireproofing damaged during pipe installation.

2. Set all concrete inserts in place before pouring concrete.

3. Furnish, install and prime all auxiliary structural steel for support of piping systems that are not shown on the Drawings as being by others.

4. Install hangers and supports complete with lock nuts, clamps, rods, bolts, couplings, swivels, inserts and required accessories.

5. Hangers for horizontal piping shall have adequate means of vertical adjustment for alignment.

C. Pipe Requirements:

1. Support all piping and equipment, including valves, strainers, and other specialties and accessories to avoid objectionable or excessive stress, deflection, swaying, sagging or vibration in the piping or building structure during erection, cleaning, testing and normal operation of the systems.

2. Do not, however, restrain piping to cause it to snake or buckle between supports or to prevent proper movement due to expansion and contraction.

3. Support piping at equipment and valves so they can be disconnected and removed without further supporting the piping.

4. Piping shall not introduce strains or distortion to connected equipment.

5. Parallel horizontal pipes may be supported on trapeze hangers made of structural shapes and hanger rods; otherwise, pipes shall be supported with individual hangers.

6. Trapeze hangers may be used where ducts interfere with normal pipe hanging.

7. Provide additional supports where pipe changes direction, adjacent to flanged valves and strainers, at equipment connections and heavy fittings.

8. Provide at least one hanger adjacent to each joint in grooved end steel pipe with mechanical couplings.

D. Provided the installation complies with all loading requirements of truss and joist manufacturers, the following practices are acceptable:

1. Loads of 100 lbs or less may be attached anywhere along the top or bottom chords of trusses or joists with a minimum 3' spacing between loads.

2. Loads greater than 100 lbs. must be hung concentrically and may be hung from top or bottom chord, provided one of the following conditions is met:
a. The hanger is attached within 6" from a web/chord joint. b. Additional L2x2x1/4 web reinforcement is installed per manufacturer's requirements.

3. It is prohibited to cantilever a load using an angle or other structural component that is attached to a truss or joist in such a fashion that a torsional
force is applied to that structural member.

4. If conditions cannot be met, coordinate installation with truss or joist manufacturer and contact Architect/Engineer.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE SUPPRESSION SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 21 0529-6 E. After piping and insulation installation are complete, cut hanger rods back at trapeze supports so they do not extend more than 3/4" below bottom face of lowest fastener and blunt any sharp edges.

F. Do not exceed 25 lbs. per hanger and a minimum spacing of 2'-0" on center when attaching to metal roof decking (limitation not required with concrete on metal deck). This 25 lbs. load and 2'-0" spacing include adjacent electrical and architectural items hanging from deck. If the hanger restrictions cannot be achieved, supplemental framing off steel framing will need to be added.

G. Do not exceed the manufacturer's recommended maximum load for any hanger or support.

H. Spacing of hangers shall in no case exceed the following:

1. Steel (All steel pipe unless otherwise noted):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 1-1/4" & under: 12'-0"
2) 1-1/2" & larger: 15'-0"

2. Steel (Schedule 40 lightweight alternative):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 3" & under: 12'-0"
2) 3" & under: 12'-0"
I. Installation of hangers shall conform to MSS SP-58, 69, 89, and applicable NFPA standards.

END OF SECTION
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024

SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT AND

SUPPORTS
SECTION 21 0550-1
SECTION 21 0550 - SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Seismic Requirements.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. California Building Code (CBC)
B. ASHRAE - A Practical Guide to Seismic Restraint.

C. ASCE 7-16, Chapter 13.

D. SMACNA - Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems.

E. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site. Accept material on site in factory containers and packing. Inspect for damage. Protect from damage and contamination by maintaining factory packaging until installation. Follow manufacturer's instructions for storage.

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. This project is subject to the seismic bracing requirements of California Building Code, .

B. The following criteria are applicable to this project:

1. 2. Risk Category: III

3. Seismic Importance Factor: I E = 1.25Seismic Design Category: D

4. Component Amplification Factors (ap) and Component Response Modification Factors (Rp) shall be taken from Table 13.5-1 in ASCE 7-16 for the individual equipment or system being restrained.

5. Component Importance Factors (Ip) shall be taken from Section 13.1.3 in ASCE 7-16 for the individual equipment or system being restrained.

6. The total height of the structure and the height of the system to be restrained within the structure shall be determined in coordination with architectural plans and the General Contractor.

Forces shall be calculated with the above requirements and Equation 13.3-1, -2, and -3 of ASCE 7-16, unless exempted by 13.1.4.

D. Equipment shall meet California Building Code and ASCE 7 seismic qualification requirements in concurrence with ICC ES AC156 Acceptance Criteria for Seismic Qualification by Shake- Table Testing of Nonstructural Components and Systems.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024

SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT AND

SUPPORTS
SECTION 21 0550-2
E. All seismic anchorage and bracing shall comply with the St. Louis County Rules & Regulations on Anchorage & Sway Bracing - Mechanical, Electrical & Plumbing (MEP) System Components.

F. All seismic anchorage and bracing shall comply with FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-11, Fire Following Earthquakes.

1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of seismic bracing with building structural systems and architectural features, and with mechanical, fire-protection, electrical and other building features in the vicinity.

B. Coordinate concrete bases with building structural system.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide one-year warranty on parts and labor for manufacturer defects and installation workmanship.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPLIERS
A. Following is a partial list of manufacturer/supplier contact information for seismic restraints:

1. B-Line Systems, Inc. (800) 851-7415, www.b-line.com.

2. Unistrut Corporation http://www.unistrut.us/

3. Kinetics Noise Control (877) 457-2695, www.kineticsnoise.com.

4. Mason Industries, Inc. www.mason-ind.com.

5. Loos & Co., Inc. (800) 321-5667, www.loosnaples.com.

6. Tolco (909) 737-5599, www.tolco.com

7. ISAT 877.523.6060, www.isatsb.com

8. Vibro-Acoustics (416) 291-7371, https://virs.vibro-acoustics.com/

2.2 SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA
A. This section describes the requirements for seismic restraint of systems and equipment related to continued operation of the facility after a design seismic event.

B. Definitions

1. Stay in Place:
a. All systems and equipment shall be anchored and restrained such that the anchoring system is intended not to fail and equipment and/or system components will not fall.

2. Remain Operationa
l:
a. Requirements for "Stay in Place" listed above shall be met.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024

SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT AND

SUPPORTS
SECTION 21 0550-3
b. The following systems and associated equipment are intended not to fail externally or internally and are intended to continue operation following a seismic event:
1) Fire Protection

2.3 MATERIALS
A. Use the following materials for restraints:

1. Indoor Dry Locations: Steel, zinc plated.

2. Outdoors and Damp Locations: Galvanized steel.

3. Corrosive Locations: Stainless steel.

2.4 ANCHORAGE AND STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Strength: Defined in reports by ICC Evaluation Service or another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Strength in tension and shear of components used shall be at least two times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

B. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM F3125, Grade A 325.

2.5 SEISMIC BRACING COMPONENTS
A. Slotted Steel Channel: 1-5/8-by-1-5/8-inch cross section, formed from 0.1046-inch-thick steel, with 9/16-by-7/8-inch slots at a maximum of 2 inches o.c. in webs, and flange edges turned toward web.

1. Materials for Channel: ASTM A 1011, GR 33.

2. Materials for Fittings and Accessories: ASTM A 635, ASTM A 576, or ASTM A 36.

3. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channels and designed for use with that product.

4. Finish: Baked, rust-inhibiting, acrylic-enamel paint applied after cleaning and phosphate treatment, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Channel-Type Bracing Assemblies: Slotted steel channel , with adjustable hinged steel brackets
and bolts.

C. Cable-Type Bracing Assemblies: Zinc-coated, high-strength steel wire rope cable attached to steel thimbles, brackets, and bolts designed for cable service.

1. Arrange units for attachment to the braced component at one end and to the structure at the other end.

2. Wire Rope Cable: Comply with ASTM A 603. Use 49- or 133-strand cable with a minimum strength of 2 times the calculated maximum seismic force to be resisted.

D. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Slotted steel channels with internally bolted connections to hanger rod.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024

SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT AND

SUPPORTS
SECTION 21 0550-4
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to the applicable code sections and Authority Having Jurisdiction for the exact seismic restraint requirements of piping, ductwork, conduit, equipment, etc.

B. Layout of transverse and longitudinal bracing shall follow recommendations of approved design standards listed in Part 1 of this specification section.

C. All rigid floor mounted equipment shall have a resilient media between the equipment mounting hole and the anchor bolt in concrete.

D. All seismic restraint systems shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and all certified submittal data.

E. Installation of seismic restraints shall not cause any change in position of equipment, piping, or ductwork, resulting in stresses or misalignment.

F. No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be made that degrade the noise and vibration-isolation system specified.

G. Do not install any equipment, piping, duct, or conduit that makes rigid connections with the building unless isolation is not specified.

H. Coordinate work with all other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building. Any conflicts with other trades that will result in rigid contact with equipment or piping due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions shall be brought to the Architect/Engineer's attention prior to specific equipment selection.

I. Prior to installation, bring to the Architect/Engineer's attention any discrepancies between the specific
ations and the field conditions, or changes required due to specific equipment selection.

J. Bracing may occur from flanges of structural beams, upper truss cords of bar joists, cast in place inserts, or International Code Council approved seismic anchors for installation in concrete.

K. Cable restraints shall be installed slightly slack to avoid short-circuiting the isolated suspended equipment, ductwork, piping, or conduit.

L. Cable assemblies shall be installed taut on non-isolated systems. Solid braces may be used in place of cables on rigidly attached systems only.

M. Do not install cables over sharp corners.

N. Brace support rods when necessary to accept compressive loads. Welding of compression braces to the vertical support rods is not acceptable.

O. The vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases as required.

Independent steel rails are not acceptable.

P. Vertical pipe risers flexibly supported to accommodate thermal motion and/or pipe vibration shall be guided to maintain pipe stability and provide horizontal seismic restraint.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024

SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT AND

SUPPORTS
SECTION 21 0550-5
Q. Seismic restraints shall be mechanically attached to the system. Looping restraints around the system is not acceptable.

R. Do not brace a system to two different structures such as a wall and a ceiling.

S. Provide appropriately sized openings in walls, floors, and ceilings for anticipated seismic movement. Provide fire seal systems in fire-rated walls.

T. Exposed seismic supports in occupied areas shall be guarded or covered to protect occupants.

U. Coordinate seismic bracing of architecturally exposed ductwork with the Architect/Engineer.

3.2 SEISMIC RESTRAINT EXCLUSIONS
A. Refer to the applicable code sections and Authority Having Jurisdiction for allowable exclusions.

END OF SECTION 21 0550
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024

SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT AND

SUPPORTS
SECTION 21 0550-6
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE SUPPRESSION IDENTIFICATION SECTION 21 0553-1
SECTION 21 0553 - FIRE SUPPRESSION IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Identification of products installed under Division 21.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. 3M
B. Bunting
C. Calpico
D. Craftmark
E. Emedco
F. Kolbi Industries
G. Seton
H. W.H. Brady
I. Marking Services.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. All pipe markers (purchased or stenciled) shall conform to ANSI A13.1. Marker lengths and letter sizes shall be at least the following:

OD of Pipe or Insulation Marker Length Size of Letters
Up to and including 1-1/4" 8" 1/2"
1-1/2" to 2" 8" 3/4"
2-1/2" to 6" 12" 1-1/4"
8" to 10" 24" 2-1/2"
Over 10" 32" 3-1/2"
Plastic tags may be used for outside diameters under 3/4" B. Plastic Nameplates: Laminated three-layer phenolic with engraved black, 1/4" minimum letters on light contrasting background.

C. Aluminum Nameplates: Black enamel background with natural aluminum border and engraved letters furnished with two mounting holes and screws.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE SUPPRESSION IDENTIFICATION SECTION 21 0553-2
D. Plastic Tags: Minimum 1-1/2" square or round laminated three-layer phenolic with engraved, 1/4" minimum black letters on light contrasting background.

E. Brass Tags: Brass background with engraved black letters. Tag size minimum 1-1/2" square or 1-1/2" round.

F. Plastic Pipe Markers: Semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; indicating flow direction and fluid conveyed.

G. Stencil Painted Pipe Markers: Use industrial enamel spray paint per ANSI Standard A13.1.

Indicate fluid conveyed and flow direction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install all products per manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

C. Valves:

1. All valves (except shutoff valves at equipment) shall have numbered tags.

2. Provide or replace numbered tags on all existing valves that are connected to new systems or that have been revised.

3. Secure tags with heavy duty key chain and brass "S" link or with mechanically fastened plastic straps.

4. Attach to handwheel or around valve stem. On lever operated valves, drill the lever to attach tags.

5. Number all tags and show the service of the pipe.

6. Provide one Plexiglas framed valve directory listing all valves, with respective tag numbers, uses and locations. Mount directory in location chosen by the Architect/Engineer.

7. Provide one 36" x 24" ( minimum Plexiglas framed piping schematic showing valve locations with respective tag numbers. Mount directory in location chosen by the Architect/Engineer.

8. Provide two sets of laminated 8-1/2" x 11" (letter size) copies of a valve directory listing all valves, with respective tag numbers, uses, and locations. The directory shall be reviewed by the Owner and Architect/Engineer prior to laminating final copies.

Laminated copies shall have brass eyelet in at least one corner for easy hanging.

D. Pipe Markers:

1. Adhesive Backed Markers: Use Brady Style 1, 2, or 3 on pipes 3" diameter and larger.

Use Brady Style 4, 6, or 8 on pipes under 3" diameter. Similar styles by other listed manufacturers are acceptable. Secure all markers at both ends with a wrap of pressure sensitive tape completely around the pipe.

2. Snap-on Markers: Use Seton "Setmark" on pipes up to 5-7/8" OD. Use Seton "Setmark" with nylon or Velcro ties for pipes 6" OD and over. Similar styles by other listed manufacturers are acceptable.

3. Stencil Painted Pipe Markers:
a. Remove rust, grease, dirt, and all foreign substances from the pipe surface.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE SUPPRESSION IDENTIFICATION SECTION 21 0553-3
b. Apply primer on non-insulated pipes before painting. c. Use background and letter colors as scheduled later in this section.

4. Apply markers and arrows in the following locations where clearly visible:
a. At each valve.
b. On both sides of walls that pipes penetrate.
c. At least every 20 feet along all pipes.
d. On each riser and each leg of each "T" joint.
e. At least once in every room and each story traversed.

3.2 SCHEDULE
A. Pipes to be marked shall be labeled with text shown as follows, regardless of which method or material is used:

1. FIRE PROTECTION WATER: White lettering; red background

2. SPRINKLER WATER: White lettering; red background
B. All piping downstream of the fire protection backflow preventer, upstream of sprinkler zone valves, standpipe piping, and combination sprinkler standpipe piping shall be labeled Fire Protection Water. All piping downstream of sprinkler zone valves shall be labeled Sprinkler Water.

END OF SECTION 21 0553
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE SUPPRESSION IDENTIFICATION SECTION 21 0553-4
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE PROTECTION FULL DESIGN SECTION 21 1301-1
SECTION 21 1301 - FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pipe, Fittings, Valves, and Connections for Fire Protection System.

B. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code AWS D1.1-Structural Welding Code - Steel.

B. Equipment and Components: Bear UL label or marking.

C. Valves: Bear UL label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. Pressure rating shall match specified pipe system pressure rating. Remanufactured valves are not acceptable.

D. Specialist Firm: Contractor specializing in sprinkler systems with minimum three years' experience.

E. All fire protection system work shall be by a licensed C16 Contractor.

F. Fire sprinkler system pipefitters responsible for installing, altering, or repairing water-based fire protection systems will require certification by the California State Fire Marshal's office.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800.

B. ANSI/ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 150 and 300.

C. ANSI/ASME B16.4 - Cast Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 125 and 250.

D. ANSI/ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.

E. ANSI/ASME B16.9 - Factory-made Wrought Steel Butt-Welding Fittings.

F. ANSI/ASME B16.11 - Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded.

G. ANSI/ASME B16.25 - Butt-Welding Ends.

H. ANSI/ASME B36.10 - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe.

I. ANSI/AST
M A47 - Malleable Iron Castings.

J. ANSI/ASTM A135 - Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe.

K. ANSI/AWWA C110 - Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE PROTECTION FULL DESIGN SECTION 21 1301-2
L. ANSI/AWWA C151 - Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast.

M. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Section IX, Welding and Brazing Requirements.

N. ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.

O. ASTM A153 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless.

P. AWS B2.2 - Standard for Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification.

Q. AWS D10.9 - Specifications for Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing.

R. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code
S. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.

T. NFPA 24 - Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances.

U. NFPA 25 - Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems.

V. UL - Underwriter's Laboratory Fire Protection Equipment Directory.

W. CBC California Building Code
X. CFC California Fire Code

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings per Section 21 0500. Indicate pipe materials, joining methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals, sprinklers, and equipment data and ratings.

B. Submit detailed pipe and sprinkler layout as described in NFPA 13.

C. Submit electrical power/controls wiring diagrams and product data indicating general assembly, components, safety controls, and service connections.

D. Provide the Owner with one copy of NFPA 25. Standard for the Inspection Testing and Maintena
nce of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems.

1.5 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide metal storage cabinet, wrenches for each sprinkler type, and extra sprinklers per NFPA 13 and applicable building code.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store valves and sprinklers in shipping containers, with labels in place.

B. Provide temporary protective coating on iron and steel valves.

C. Maintain temporary end caps and closures in place until installation.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE PROTECTION FULL DESIGN SECTION 21 1301-3

1.7 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Furnish sleeves to General Contractor for placement in walls and floors. Sleeve location to be determined by the Fire Protection Contractor prior to construction. If additional sleeves are required, they shall be core drilled by the Fire Protection Contractor.

1.8 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Reference Coordination Drawings article in Section 21 0500 for required fire protection systems electronic CAD drawings to be provided to Coordinating Contractor for inclusion into composite coordination drawings.

1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit manufacturers' operation and maintenance data. Include written maintenance data on components of system, servicing requirements, and record drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS - WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
A. Piping - 2" and Under (Steel Pipe):

1. Design Pressure: 175 psig

2. Pipe: Schedule 40, black steel, ASTM A53, ASTM A795, UL/FM. Inner wall shall be coated with an anti-MIC (microbiologically influenced corrosion) coating.

3. Pipe: Lightweight Schedule 40 alternative, black steel, ASTM A135, ASTM A795. corrosion resistance ratio (CRR) shall be greater than 1.0 per UL Directory Listing, UL/FM. Inner wall shall be coated with an anti-MIC (microbiologically influenced corrosion) coating. Schedule 40/Lightweight Schedule 40 Joints: Threaded.

4. Pipe: Lightweight Schedule 10 alternate, black steel, ASTM A135, ASTM A795, UL/FM.

Inner wall shall be coated with an anti-MIC (microbiologically influenced corrosion) coating.

5. Lightweight Schedule 10 Joints: Rolled grooved only.

6. Fittings:
a. Threaded:
1) Cast iron, Class 125, black, UL/FM, ANSI/ASME B16.4ASTM A153. 2) Malleable iron, Class 150, black, UL/FM, ANSI/ASME B16.3ASTM A153. 3) Ductile iron, Class 150, black, UL/FM, ANSI/ASME B16.3ASTM A153.

7. Unions: Class 150 malleable iron, ANSI B16.39, ground joint with copper or copper alloy-to-iron seat.

B. Piping - 2-1/2" and Above (Steel Pipe):

1. Design Pressure: 175 psig

2. Pipe: Schedule 10, black steel, ASTM A135, ASTM A795, UL/FM. Inner wall shall be coated with an anti-MIC (microbiologically influenced corrosion) coating.

3. Pipe: Lightweight Schedule 10 alternate, black steel, ASTM A135, ASTM A795, UL/FM.

Inner wall shall be coated with an anti-MIC (microbiologically influenced corrosion) coating.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE PROTECTION FULL DESIGN SECTION 21 1301-4

4. Pipe: Schedule 40, black steel ASTM A53, ASTM A795, UL/FM. Inner wall shall be coated with an anti-MIC (microbiologically influenced corrosion) coating.

5. Joints: Grooved or flanged.

6. Fittings:
a. Grooved:
1) Ductile iron housing ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, UL/FM, enamel coating, Grade E (Type A) EPDM molded pressure-responsive gaskets suited for 40°°F to 150°°F. Stainless steel bolts and nuts.
b. Flanged:
1) Cast iron, Class 125, black, UL/FM, ANSI/ASME B16.1. c. Saddle Branch Fittings:
1) In lieu of a TEE fitting for systems using steel piping where connecting a branch line to a main, saddle branch connections utilizing a bolted clamp or a U-bolt support around the main pipe with a ductile iron sealing surface and gasket and are permitted based on these size limitations:
a) Up to 6" Mains: Branch pipe maximum size is nominally one pipe size smaller than main.
b) 8" and Larger Mains: Branch pipes maximum size is nominally two pipe sizes smaller than main.

2.2 FLEXIBLE FIRE SPRINKLER CONNECTIONS
A. Flexible Connection: Stainless steel hose, 175 psig max working pressure, fully welded non- mechanical fittings, stainless steel braid, maximum of 6' hose length, leak-tested with a minimum 7/8" internal corrugated hose diameter made of 304 stainless steel, end fittings made of carbon or stainless steel. Outlet of end fittings shall be 1/2" or 3/4" to match sprinkler connection. UL/FM.

Ceiling Bracket: G90 galvanized steel, direct attachment type, integrated snap-on clip ends, tamper resistance screws, removable attachment hub with set screw for attachment and adjustment of stainless steel hose.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Flexhead Industries
b. Victaulic VicFlex
c. Sprinkflex
d. or approved equal.

2.3 VALVES
A. Provide handwheels for gate valves. Provide gear operators for butterfly valves.

B. Provide all connections to match pipe joints. Valves shall be same size as pipe.

2.4 EQUIPMENT
A. Equipment shall be as scheduled on the drawings.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE PROTECTION FULL DESIGN SECTION 21 1301-5

2.5 RISER LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Hydraulic nameplates shall be affixed to each riser and shall include the following minimum information:

1. Installation contractor

2. Date installed

3. Riser location

4. Number of sprinklers

5. Basis of design (density GPM/ft2 and area of coverage ft2

6. Water flow rate (GPM) and residual pressure (psi) at the base of riser

7. Hose stream allowance (GPM)

8. Occupancy classification

9. Commodity classification (if applicable)

10. Maximum storage height (if applicable)
B. A dedicated antifreeze placard is required where a remote antifreeze system is provided. The placard is to be placed on the main valve serving the antifreeze system to document the manufacturer type and brand of the solution and the system volume.

2.6 PIPE LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
A. All pipe shall be marked along its length by the manufacturer in such a way as to properly identify the type of pipe. The manufacturer pipe marking shall be visible on every piece of pipe over 2 ft long. Manufacturer pipe identification shall include the manufacturer's name, model designation, and/or schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION - PIPING
A. General Installation Requirements:

1. Coordinate piping and sprinkler locations with all other trades. Ductwork, diffusers and light fixture locations shall have priority over sprinkler piping and sprinklers.

2. Ream pipe and tube ends to full inside diameter. Remove burrs. Remove scale and foreign material, inside and outside, before assembly.

3. Die cut screw joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads.

4. Coat threads with pipe joint compound or wrap with Teflon tape.

5. Locate piping to minimize obstruction of other work.

6. Route piping in concealed spaces above finished ceiling.

7. Use full and double lengths of pipe wherever possible.

8. Slope all piping for complete drainage. Install auxiliary drains for all trapped piping per NFPA 13.

9. Reducers are generally not shown. Where pipe sizes change at tee, the tee shall be the size of the largest pipe shown connecting to it.

10. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Wall/Floor Penetration:

1. Provide sleeves when penetrating floors and walls.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE PROTECTION FULL DESIGN SECTION 21 1301-6

2. Seal pipes passing through exterior walls with a wall seal per Section 21 0529. Provide Schedule 40 galvanized sleeve at least 2 pipe sizes larger than the pipe. Sleeves through floors shall extend minimum 1.5" above finished floor.

3. Fire seal all pipe and sleeve penetrations (both wall and floor) to maintain fire separation required without restraining pipe.

C. Installation Requirements in Electrical Rooms:

1. Do not install piping or other equipment above electrical switchboards or panelboards.

This includes a dedicated space extending 25 feet from the floor to the structural ceiling with width and depth equal to the equipment. Fire protection equipment dedicated to the electrical equipment room or space may be installed above equipment if other alternatives are not available.

D. Hangers and Supports:

1. Provide hangers and supports as required by NFPA 13 and UL, with the following exceptions:
a. Do not use powder driven devices, explosive devices, wooden plugs, or plastic inserts.
b. Do not install fasteners to carry the load in tension, unless absolutely necessary.

E. Exposed Piping:

1. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons where exposed pipes penetrate walls or floors.

2. Remove all scale, rust, dirt, oils, stickers and thoroughly clean exterior of all bare metal exposed piping, hangers, and accessories in preparation to be painted.

3.2 INSTALLATION - VALVES
A.

Install gate valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

3.3 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT
A. Coordinate piping and sprinkler locations with all other trades. Ductwork, diffusers and light fixture locations shall have priority over system equipment and sprinklers.

B. Sprinklers:

1. Do not allow concealed sprinkler cover plates to be painted. Sprinkler cover plates are to be factory painted only. Do not field paint.

2. Apply strippable or paper covers so concealed sprinkler cover plates do not receive field paint finish.

3.4 SYSTEMS CLEANING AND TESTING
A. General Requirement:

1. All water used for testing and remaining in the piping system shall be obtained from a potable water source.

1. Flush all underground piping with minimum flow equal to the system design flow but not less than the following:
a. 390 gpm for 4" pipes.
b. 880 gpm for 6" pipes.
c. 1560 gpm for 8" pipes.
d. 2440 gpm for 10" pipes.
e. 3500 gpm for 12" pipes.

2. Branches from existing or new underground mains to sprinkler risers shall be flushed out through two 2-1/2" hoses (with flow through open hose butts) attached to the riser with 4" temporary piping. Flushing through the drain of an alarm check or dry pipe valve is not acceptable.

C. Interior Piping:

1. Verify adequate water flow at the inspector's test connection.

2. Flush all interior piping to remove scale and other foreign material before placing system into service.

3. Hydrostatically test the entire interior piping system at a minimum of 200 psig or 50 psig more than the normal system working pressure for systems subjected to pressures more than 150 psig. Maintain test pressure for 2 hours without loss of pressure.

D. Fire Alarm System:

1. Test the alarm system by operating the inspector's test connection or the alarm test valves.

Verify that the building fire alarm system activates.

2. Adjust all monitor switches for proper operation.

END OF SECTION 21 1300
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE PROTECTION FULL DESIGN SECTION 21 1301-8
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 0500-1
SECTION 22 0500 - BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Requirements applicable to all Division 22 Sections. Also refer to Division 1 - General Requirements.

B. All materials and installation methods shall conform to the applicable standards, guidelines and codes referenced herein and within each specification section.

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Specification and the associated drawings govern the furnishing, installing, testing and placing into satisfactory operation the Mechanical Systems.

C. All work will be awarded under a single General Contract. The division of work listed below is for the Contractor's convenience and lists normal breakdown of the work.

D. Scope of Work:

1. Plumbing Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to:
a. Furnish and install all items listed in the Plumbing Material List. b. Furnish and install a new domestic water service to the building. c.

Furnish and install water meter and domestic water backflow preventer as required by Code.
d. Extend existing domestic water piping system including cold, hot, and hot water circulating piping within the building. Insulate all piping as specified. e. Revise and/or replace water heaters.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 0500-2
f. Furnish and install a new fire protection service to the building including backflow preventer as required by Code.
g. Furnish and install storm water sump pumps and basins. h. Furnish and install sump pump.
i. Furnish and install sump pump and connect to footing tile drainage system installed by General Contractor.
j. Furnish and install condensate drain piping from plumbing related equipment such as ice machines.
k. Furnish and install site storm water piping, cleanouts, and manholes. l. Extend existing sanitary sewer and vent system.
m. Furnish and install sanitary sewage ejector basins and pumps. n. Furnish and install seismic restraint and equipment designed for use in seismic conditions described in Section 22 0550.
o. Furnish and install firestopping systems for penetrations of fire-rated construction associated with this Contractor's work.
p. Complete all applicable tests, certifications, forms, and matrices.

2. Heating Work: Refer to Section 23 0500 "Basic HVAC Requirements".

3. Air Conditioning and Ventilating Work: Refer to Section 23 0500 "Basic HVAC Requirements".

4. Temperature Control Work: Refer to Section 23 0500 "Basic HVAC Requirements".

5. Fire Protection Work: Refer to Section 21 0500 "Basic Fire Suppression Requirements".

6. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Work: Refer to Section 23 0500 "Basic HVAC Requirements".

1.4 DIVISION OF WORK BETWEEN MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL & CONTROL

CONTRACTORS
A. Definitions:

1. "Mechanical Contractors" refers to the following:
a. Plumbing Contract
or.
b. Heating Contractor.
c. Air Conditioning and Ventilating Contractor.
d. Temperature Control Contractor.
e. Fire Protection Contractor.
f. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Contractor.

2. Motor Control Wiring: The wiring associated with the remote operation of the magnetic coils of magnetic motor starters or relays, or the wiring that permits direct cycling of motors by means of devices in series with the motor power wiring. In the latter case the devices are usually single phase and are usually connected to the motor power wiring through a manual motor starter having "Manual-Off-Auto" provisions.

3. Control devices such as start-stop push buttons, thermostats, pressure switches, flow switches, relays, etc., generally represent the types of equipment associated with motor control wiring.

4. Motor control wiring is single phase and usually 120 volts. In some instances, the voltage will be the same as the motor power wiring. Generally, where the motor power wiring exceeds 120 volts, a control transformer is used to give a control voltage of 120 volts.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 0500-3
a. This wiring will be from a 120 volt source and may continue as 120 volt, or be reduced in voltage (24 volt) in which case a control transformer shall be furnished as part of the temperature control wiring.

6. Control Motor: An electric device used to operate dampers, valves, etc. It may be two-position or modulating. Conventional characteristics of such a motor are 24 volts, 60 cycles, 1 phase, although other voltages may be encountered.

7. Voltage is generally specified and scheduled as distribution voltage. Motor submittals may be based on utilization voltage if it corresponds to the correct distribution voltage.

Distribution/Nominal Voltage Utilization Voltage
120 115
208 200
240 230
277 265
480 460
B. General:

2. Where the drawings require the Electrical Contractor to wire between equipment furnished by the Mechanical Contractor, such wiring shall terminate at terminals provided in the equipment.

The Mechanical Contractor shall provide complete electrical power/controls wiring diagrams and supervision to the Electrical Contractor and designate the terminal numbers for correct wiring.

1. Assumes responsibility for internal wiring of all equipment provided by the Mechanical Contractor, for example:
a. Computer Room Air Conditioning Units.
b. Condensate Return Stations.
c. Condensing Units.
d. Makeup Air Units.
e. Package Air Handling Units.

2. Assumes all responsibility for the Temperature Control wiring, when the Temperature Control Contractor is a Subcontractor to the Mechanical Contractor.

3. Shall verify all existing equipment sizes and capacities where units are to be modified, moved or replaced. Contractor shall notify Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies prior to ordering new units or replacement parts, including replacements of equipment motors.

4. Temperature Control Subcontractor's Responsibility:
a. Wiring of all devices needed to make the Temperature Control System functional. b. Verifying any control wiring on the electrical drawings as being by the Electrical Contractor. All wiring required for the Control System, but not shown on the electrical drawings, is the responsibility of the Temperature Control Subcontractor. c. Coordinating equipment locations (such as relays, transformers, etc.) with the Electrical Contractor, where wiring of the equipment is by the Electrical Contractor.

5. This Contractor is responsible for coordination of utilities with all other Contractors. If any field coordination conflicts are found, the Contractor shall coordinate with other Contractors to determine a viable layout.

D. Electrical Contractor's Responsibility:

1. Provides all combination starters, manual starters and disconnect devices shown on the Electrical Drawings or indicated to be by the Electrical Contractor on the Mechanical Drawings or Specifications.

2. Installs and wires all remote control devices furnished by the Mechanical Contractor or Temperature Control Subcontractor when so noted on the Electrical Drawings.

3. Provides motor control and temperature control wiring, where so noted on the drawings.

4. Coordinate with the Mechanical Contractor for size of motors and/or other electrical devices involved with repair or replacement of existing equipment.

5. Furnishes, installs and connects all relays, etc., for automatic shutdown of certain fans upon actuation of the Fire Alarm System as indicated and specified in Division 28.

6. This Contractor is responsible for coordination of utilities with all other Contractors. If any field coordination conflicts are found, the Contractor shall coordinate with other Contractors to determine a viable layout.

1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Definitions:

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 0500-5
a. Mechanical trades shall include, but are not limited to, mechanical equipment, ductwork, fire protection systems, plumbing piping, medical gas systems, hydronic piping, steam and steam condensate piping, and any item that may impact coordination with other disciplines.
b. Electrical trades shall include, but are not limited to, electrical equipment, conduit 1.5" and larger, conduit racks, cable trays, pull boxes, transformers, raceway, busway, lighting, ceiling-mounted devices, and any item that may impact coordination with other disciplines.
c. Technology trades shall include, but are not limited to, technology equipment, racks, conduit 1.5" and larger, conduit racks, cable trays, ladder rack, pull boxes, raceway, ceiling-mounted devices, and any item that may impact coordination with other disciplines.
d. Maintenance clearances and code-required dedicated space shall be included. e. The coordination drawings shall include all underground, underfloor, in-floor, in chase, and vertical trade items.

2. Spaces with open/cloud ceiling architecture shall indicate the overhead utilities and locate equipment as required to maintain clearance above lights. The intent for the installation is to maintain a maximum allowable vertical clearance and an organized/clean manner in the horizontal. Notify Architect/Engineer of the maximum clearance which can be maintained.

Failure to comply will result in modifications with no cost to Owner. a. In cloud ceiling architecture, when open cabling/wire and/or cable tray crosses gaps between
ceiling clouds and/or walls, cabling is to transition to conduits to span the gaps in order to conceal cabling from below.

B. Participation:

1. The contractors and subcontractors responsible for work defined above shall participate in the coordination drawing process.

C. Drawing Requirements:

1. The file format and file naming convention shall be coordinated with and agreed to by all contractors participating in the coordination process and the Owner.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 0500-6
a. Scale of drawings:
1) General plans: 1/4 Inch = 1 '-0" (minimum).
2) Mechanical, electrical, communication rooms, and including the surrounding areas within 10 feet: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
3) Shafts and risers: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
4) Sections of shafts and mechanical and electrical equipment rooms: 1/4 Inch = 1 '- 0" (minimum).
5) Sections of congested areas: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).

2. Ductwork layout drawings shall be the baseline system for other components. Ductwork layout drawings shall be modified to accommodate other components as the coordination process progresses.

3. There may be more drawings required for risers, top and bottom levels of mechanical rooms, and shafts.

D. General:

2. A plotted set of coordination drawings shall be available at the project site.

3. Coordination drawings are not shop drawings and shall not be submitted as such.

4. The contract drawings are schematic in nature and do not show every fitting and appurtenance for each
utility. Each contractor is expected to have included in the bid sufficient fittings, material, and labor to allow for adjustments in routing of utilities made necessary by the coordination process and to provide a complete and functional system.

5. The contractors will not be allowed additional costs or time extensions due to participation in the coordination process.

8. Changes to the contract documents that are necessary for systems installation and coordination shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer.

9. Access panels shall preferably occur only in gypsum board walls or plaster ceilings where indicated on the drawings.
a. Access to mechanical, electrical, technology, and other items located above the ceiling shall be through accessible lay-in ceiling tile areas.
b. Potential layout changes shall be made to avoid additi onal access panels.
c. Additional access panels shall not be allowed without written approval from the Architect/Engineer at the coordination drawing stage.
d. Providing additional access panels shall be considered after other alternatives are reviewed and discarded by the Architect/Engineer and the Owner's Representative. e. When additional access panels are required, they shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 0500-7

10. Complete the coordination drawing process and obtain sign off of the drawings by all contractors prior to installing any of the components.

11. Conflicts that result after the coordination drawings are signed off shall be the responsibility of the contractor or subcontractor who did not properly identify their work requirements or installed their work without proper coordination.

12. Updated coordination drawings that reflect as-built conditions may be used as record documents.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor's Responsibility Prior to Submitting Pricing Data:

1. The Contractor is responsible for constructing complete and operating systems. The Contractor acknowledges and understands that the Contract Documents are a two-dimensional representation of a three-dimensional object, subject to human interpretation. This representation may include imperfect data, interpreted codes, utility guidelines, three- dimensional conflicts, and required field coordination items. Such deficiencies can be corrected when identified prior to ordering material and starting installation. The Contractor agrees to carefully study and compare the individual Contract Documents and report at once in writing to the Design Team any deficiencies the Contractor may discover. The Contractor further agrees to require each subcontractor to likewise study the documents and report at once any deficiencies discovered.

2. The Contractor shall resolve all reported deficiencies with the Architect/Engineer prior to awarding any subcontract
s, ordering material, or starting any work with the Contractor's own employees. Any work performed prior to receipt of instructions from the Design Team will be done at the Contractor's risk.

B. Qualifications:

1. Only products of reputable manufacturers are acceptable.

2. All Contractors and subcontractors shall employ only workers skilled in their trades.

C. Compliance with Codes, Laws, Ordinances:

1. Conform to all requirements of the Sacramento California current Codes, Laws, Ordinances and other regulations having jurisdiction.

2. Conform to all State Codes.

3. If there is a discrepancy between the codes and regulations and these specifications, the Architect/Engineer shall determine the method or equipment used.

5. All changes to the system made after letting of the contract, to comply with codes or requirements of Inspectors, shall be made by the Contractor without cost to the Owner.

6. If there is a discrepancy between manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications, the manufac
turer's recommendations shall govern.

7. All rotating shafts and/or equipment shall be completely guarded from all contact. Partial guards and/or guards that do not meet all applicable OSHA standards are not acceptable. Contractor is responsible for providing this guarding if it is not provided with the equipment supplied.

1. The drawings for the plumbing work are completely diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of the work and to indicate the general arrangements and locations of equipment, outlets, etc., and the approximate sizes of equipment.

2. Contractor shall determine the exact locations of equipment and rough-ins, and the exact routing of pipes and ducts to best fit the layout of the job.

3. Scaling of the drawings is not sufficient or accurate for determining these locations.

4. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated arrangements and locations, such changes shall be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

5. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items, such as fittings, boxes, valves, unions, etc., may not be shown, but where required by other sections of the specifications or required for proper installation of the work, such items shall be furnished and installed.

6. If an item is either on the drawings or in the specifications, it shall be included in this contract.

8. Where used in mechanical documents, the word "furnish" shall mean supply for use, the word
"install" shall mean connect complete and ready for operation, and the word "provide" shall mean to supply for use and connect complete and ready for operation. a. Any item listed as furnished shall also be installed, unless otherwise noted. b. Any item listed as installed shall also be furnished, unless otherwise noted.

E. Field Measurements:

1. Verify all pertinent dimensions at the job site before ordering any materials or fabricating any supports, pipes or ducts.

F. Electronic Media/Files:

1. Construction drawings for this project have been prepared utilizing Revit.

2. Contractors and Subcontractors may request electronic media files of the contract drawings and/or copies of the specifications. Specifications will be provided in PDF format.

3. Upon request for electronic media, the Contractor shall complete and return a signed "Electronic File Transmittal" form provided by IMEG.

5. The electronic contract documents can be used for preparation of shop drawings and as-built drawings only. The information may not be used in whole or in part for any other project.

6. The drawings prepared
by IMEG for bidding purposes may not be used directly for ductwork layout drawings or coordination drawings.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 0500-9

C. Provide web-based project software user licenses for use by the Architect/Engineer. Access will be provided from the start of the project through the completion of the warranty phase.

1.8 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. The requirements herein are in addition to the provisions of Division 1.

B. Format:

1. Use AIA Document Continuation Sheets G703 or another similar form approved by the Owner and Architect/Engineer.

2. Submit in Excel format.

3. Support values given with substantiating data.

C. Preparation:

2. Break down all costs into:
a. Material: Delivered cost of product with taxes paid. b. Labor: Labor cost, excluding overhead and profit.

3. Itemize the cost for each of the following:
a. Overhead and profit.
b. Bonds.
c. Insurance.
d. General Requirements: Itemize all requirements.

4. For each line item having an installed cost of more than $5,000, break down costs to list major products or operations under each item. At a minimum, provide material and labor cost line items for the following:
a. Excavation and backfill for underground piping systems inside the building. b. Underground piping systems inside the building (sanitary, storm, etc.) listed separately.

Break down the material and labor for each piping system based on geography (building, floor, wing and/or phase).

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 0500-10
c. Each aboveground piping system (sanitary, storm, domestic water, etc.). Break down the material and labor for each piping system based on geography (building, floor, wing and/or phase).
d. Pipe insulation with separate material and labor line items for each piping system listed above.
e. Each piece of equipment requiring shop drawings (e.g., backflow preventer, water heater, water softener, etc.) using the project nomenclature (BFP-1, WH-1, WS-1, etc.). f. Each plumbing fixture (e.g., WC, lavatory, sink, etc.). Multiple units of the same type can be listed together, provided quantities are also listed so unit costs can be determined. g. Site utilities (5' beyond building)
h. Seismic design
i. Water balancing
j. Commissioning
k. Record drawings
l. Punchlist and closeout
D. Update Schedule of Values when:

1. Indicated by Architect/Engineer.

2. Change of subcontractor or supplier occurs.

3. Change of product or equipment occurs.

1.9 CHANGE ORDERS
A. A detailed material and labor takeoff shall be prepared for each change order, along with labor rates and markup percentages. Change orders shall be broken down by sheet or associated individual line item indicated in the change associated narrative, whichever provides the most detailed breakdown.

Change orders with inadequate breakdown will be rejected.

B. Itemized pricing with unit cost shall be provided from all distributors and associated subcontractors.

C. Change order work shall not proceed until authoriz
ed.

1.10 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS' INSPECTION
A. The following equipment shall not be placed in operation until a competent installation and service representative of the manufacturer has inspected the installation and certified that the equipment is properly installed, adjusted and lubricated; that preliminary operating instructions have been given; and that the equipment is ready for operation:

1. Fire Seal Systems

2. Seismic Restraints and Equipment Bracing
B. Contractor shall arrange for and obtain supplier's on-site inspection(s) at proper time(s) to assure each phase of equipment installation and/or connection is in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

C. Submit copies of start-up reports to the Architect/Engineer and include copies of Owner's Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 0500-11

1.11 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING & MAINTENANCE
A. Exercise care in transporting and handling to avoid damage to materials. Store materials on the site to prevent damage. Keep materials clean, dry and free from harmful conditions. Immediately remove any materials that become wet or that are suspected of becoming contaminated with mold or other organisms.

1. Motor windings.

2. Bearings.

3. Pipe connections.

4. Starter and control cabinets.

D. Keep all bearings properly lubricated and all belts properly tensioned and aligned.

E. Coordinate the installation of heavy and large equipment with the General Contractor and/or Owner. If the Mechanical Contractor does not have prior documented experience in rigging and lifting similar equipment, he/she shall contrac
t with a qualified lifting and rigging service that has similar documented experience. Follow all equipment lifting and support guidelines for handling and moving.

1.12 NETWORK / INTERNET CONNECTED EQUIPMENT
A. These specifications may require certain equipment or systems to have network, Internet and/or remote access capability ("Network Capability"). Any requirement for Network Capability shall be interpreted only as a functional capability and is not to be construed as authority to connect or enable any Network Capability. Network Capability may only be connected or enabled with the express written consent of the Owner.

1.13 WARRANTY
A. Provide one-year warranty, unless otherwise noted, to the Owner for all fixtures, equipment, materials, and workmanship.

B. The warranty period for all work in this Division of the specifications shall commence on the date of final acceptance, unless a whole or partial system or any separate piece of equipment or component is put into use for the benefit of any party other than the installing contractor with prior written authorization. In this instance
, the warranty period shall commence on the date when such whole system, partial system or separate piece of equipment or component is placed in operation and accepted in writing by the Owner.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 0500-12
C. Warranty requirements shall extend to correction, without cost to the Owner, of all Work found to be defective or nonconforming to the contract documents. The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting all damage resulting from defects or nonconformance with contract documents.

1.14 INSURANCE
A. Contractor shall maintain insurance coverage as set forth in Division 0 of these specifications.

1.15 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTION
A. Where several manufacturers' names are given, the first manufacturer is the basis for job design and establishes the quality.

D. This Contractor assumes all costs incurred as a result of using the offered material, article or equipment, on the Contractor's part or on the part of other Contractors whose work is affected.

E. This Contractor may list voluntary add or deduct prices for alternate materials on the bid form. These items will not be used in determining the low bidder.

F. All material substitutions requested later than ten (10) days prior to bid opening must be listed as voluntary changes on the bid form.

1.16 PROJECT COMMISSIONING
A. The Contractor shall work with the Commissioning Agent (CxA) as described in Section 22 0800 and provide all services necessary for compliance with LEED Prerequisite EAp1, Fundamental Commissioning, and EAc3 Enhanced Commissioning.

B. The Contractor shall work with the Commissioning Agent (CxA) as described in Section 22 0800 and provide all services as described in the Commissioning Plan.

3.1 JOBSITE SAFETY
A. Neither the professional activities of the Architect/Engineer, nor the presence of the Architect/Engineer or the employees and subconsultants at a construction site, shall relieve the Contractor and other entity of their obligations, duties and responsibilities including, but not limited to, construction means, methods, sequence, techniques or procedures necessary for performing, superintending or coordinating all portions of the work of construction in accordance with the contract documents and any health or safety precautions required by any regulatory agencies. The Architect/Engineer and personnel have no authority to exercise any control over any construction contractor or other entity or their employees in connection with their work or any health or safety precautions. The Contractor is solely responsible for jobsite safety. The Architect/Engineer and the Architect/Engineer's consultants shall be indemnified and shall be made additional insureds under the Contractor's general liability insurance policy.

3.2 EXCAVATION, FILL, BACKFILL, COMPACTION
A. General:

1. Prior to the commencement of any excavation or digging, the Contractor shall verify all underground utilities with the regional utility locator. Provide prior notice to the locator before excavations. Contact information for most regional utility locaters can be found at the following website (https://call811.com/) or by calling 811.

2. The Contractor shall do all excavating, filling, backfilling and compacting associated with the work.

Excavation:

1. Make all excavations to accurate, solid, undisturbed earth, and to proper dimensions.

2. Where excavations are made in error below foundations, concrete of same strength as specified for the foundations or thoroughly compacted sand-gravel fill, as determined by the Architect/Engineer, shall be placed in such excess excavations. Place thoroughly compacted, clean, stable fill in excess excavations under slabs on grade, at the Contractor's expense.

3. Trim bottom and sides of excavations to grades required for foundations.

4. Protect excavations against frost and freezing.

5. Take care in excavating not to damage surrounding structures, equipment, or buried pipe. Do not undermine footing or foundation.

6. Perform all trenching in a manner to prevent cave-ins and risk to workers.

7. Where original surface is pavement or concrete, the surface shall be saw cut to provide clean edges and assist in the surface restoration.

8. Where satisfactory bearing soil for foundations is not found at the indicated levels, the Architect/Engineer or their representative shall be notified immediately, and no further work shall be done until further instructions are given by the Architect/Engineer or their representative.

C. Dewatering:

1. Contractor shall furnish, install, operate, and remove all dewatering pumps and pipes needed to keep trenche
s and pits free of water.

1. Known underground piping, foundations, and other obstructions in the vicinity of construction are shown on the drawings. Use great care in making installations near underground obstruction.

2. If objects not shown on the drawings are encountered, remove, relocate, or perform extra work as directed by the Architect/Engineer.

E. Fill and Backfilling:

1. Utilities Bedding: Lay underground utilities on minimum of 6" sand bedding or CA6 crushed stone. Compact bedding under utilities smooth, with no sharp edges protruding, to protect the utilities from puncture. Shape bedding to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of utilities and for joints and fittings.

2. Envelope Around Utilities to 6" Above Utilities: Place sand orCA6 crushed stone or flowable fill to a height of 6" over utilities in 6" layers. After connection joints are made, any misalignment can be corrected by tamping backfill around the utilities.

3. Backfill From 6" Above Utilities to Earthen Grade: Place all backfill materials above the utilities in uniform layers not exceeding 6" deep.

4. Backfill From 6" Above Utilities to Below Slabs or Paved Area: Where the sand or CA6 crushed stone fill and backfill will ultimately be under a building, floor or paving, each layer of backfill materials shall be compacted to 95% of the maximum density determined by AASHTO Designation T 99 or ASTM Designation
D 698. Moisture content of soil at time of compaction
shall not exceed plus or minus 2% of optimum moisture content determined by AASHTO T 99 or ASTM D 698 test.

5. Backfill Materials:
a. Sand, CA6: Each layer shall be placed, then carefully and uniformly tamped, to eliminate lateral or vertical displacement.
b. Native Soil: Native soil materials may be used as backfill if approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. Native soils shall be free of rock or gravel larger than 3" in any dimension and shall be free of debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, high void content, and other deleterious materials. Each layer shall be placed, then carefully and uniformly tamped, to eliminate lateral or vertical displacement.
c. Flowable Fill: Cementitious, self-leveling, self-compacting slurry as defined by the ACI with compressive strength of 50-100psi at 28 days; consisting of a mixture of fine aggregate or filler, water and cementitious materials. Filler material consist of sand, fly ash, spent foundry sand, quarry fines, baghouse dust. Cementitious materials consist of Portland cement, pozzolanic materials, and self-cementing materials. Flowable fill may be placed in a pour instead of 6" layers noted above.

6. Water shall not be permit
ted to rise in unbackfilled trenches.

7. Dispose of excess excavated earth as directed.

8. Backfill all trenches and excavations immediately after installing utilities or removal of forms, unless other protection is provided.

9. Around piers and isolated foundations and structures, backfill and fill shall be placed and consolidated simultaneously on all sides to prevent wedge action and displacement. Fill and backfill materials shall be spread in 6 inch uniform horizontal layers with each layer compacted separately to required density.

1. Where trenches are cut through existing graded, planted, or landscaped areas, the areas shall be restored to the original condition. Replace all planting removed or damaged to its original condition. A minimum of 6 inches of topsoil shall be applied where disturbed areas are to be seeded or sodded.

2. Concrete or asphalt type pavement, seal coat, rock, gravel or earth surfaces removed or damaged shall be replaced with comparable materials and restored to original condition.

3.3 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OBSERVATION OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall provide seven (7) calendar days' notice to the Architect/Engineer prior to:

1. Placing fill over underground and underslab utilities.

2. Covering exterior walls, interior partitions and chases.

3. Installing hard or suspended ceilings and soffits.

C. Above-Ceiling Final Observation

1. All work above the ceilings must be complete prior to the Architect/Engineer's review. This includes, but is not limited to:
a. Pipe insulation is installed and fully sealed.
b. Pipe wall penetrations are sealed.
c. Pipe identification and valve tags are installed.

2. In order to prevent the Above-Ceiling Final Observation from occurring too early, the
Contractor shall review the status of the work and certify, in writing, that the work is ready for the Above-Ceiling Final Observation.

3.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. General:

2. Approved O&M manuals shall be completed and in the Owner's possession prior to Owner's acceptance and at least 10 days prior to instruction of operating personnel.

B. Electronic Submittal Procedures:

1. Distribution: Email the O&M manual as attachments to all parties designated by the Architect/Engineer.

2. Transmittals: Each submittal shall include an individual electronic letter of transmittal.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 0500-16

4. File Names: Electronic submittal file names shall include the relevant specification section number followed by a description of the item submitted, as follows. Where possible, include the transmittal as the first page of the PDF instead of using multiple electronic files. a. O&M file name: O&M.div22.contractor.YYYYMMDD
b. Transmittal file name: O&Mtransmittal.div22.contractor.YYYYMMDD

5. File Size: Files shall be transmitted via a pre-approved method. Larger files may require an alternative transfer method, which shall also be pre-approved.

6. Provide the Owner with an approved copy of the O&M manual on compact discs (CD), digital video discs (DVD), or flash drives with a permanently affixed label, printed with the title "Operation and Maintenance Instructions", title of the project and subject matter of disc/flash drive when multiple disc/flash drives are required.

7. All text shall be searchable.

8. Bookmarks shall be used, dividing information first by specification section, then systems, major equipment and finally individual items. All bookmark titles shall include the nomenclature used in the construction documents and shall be an active link to the first page of the section
being referenced.

C. Paper Copy Submittal Procedures:

1. Once the electronic version of the manuals has been approved by the Architect/Engineer, 2 paper copies of the O&M manual shall be provided to the Owner. The content of the paper copies shall be identical to the corrected electronic copy.

2. Binder Requirements: The Contractor shall submit O&M manuals in heavy duty, locking three ring binders. Incorporate clear vinyl sheet sleeves on the front cover and spine for slip-in labeling. "Peel and stick" acceptable. Sheet lifters shall be supplied at the front of each notebook. The three-ring binders shall be 1/2" thicker than initial material to allow for future inserts. If more than one notebook is required, label in consecutive order. For example; 1 of 2, 2 of 2. No other form of binding is acceptable.

3. Binder Labels: Label the front and spine of each binder with "Operation and Maintenance Instructions", title of project, and subject matter.

D. Operation and Maintena
nce Instructions shall include:

2. Table of Contents: Include a table of contents describing specification section, systems, major equipment, and individual items.

4. Copy of final approved test and balance reports.

5. Copies of all factory inspections and/or equipment startup reports.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 0500-17

6. Copies of warranties.

7. Schematic electrical power/controls wiring diagrams of the equipment that have been updated for field conditions. Field wiring shall have label numbers to match drawings.

8. Dimensional drawings of equipment.

9. Capacities and utility consumption of equipment.

10. Detailed parts lists with lists of suppliers.

11. Operating procedures for each system.

12. Maintenance schedule and procedures. Include a chart listing maintenance requirements and frequency.

13. Repair procedures for major components.

14. List of lubricants in all equipment and recommended frequency of lubrication.

15. Instruction books, cards, and manuals furnished with the equipment.

16. Owner and Contractor attendance list for domestic water systems operation, maintenance, and flushing training.

3.5 INSTRUCTING THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVES
A. Adequately instruct the Owner's designated representatives in the maintenance, care, and operation of all systems installed under this contract.

B. Provide verbal and written instructions to the Owner's representatives by FACTORY PERSONNEL in the care, maintenance, and operation of the equipment and systems.

C. The Owner has the option to make a video recording of all instructions. Coordinate schedule of instructions to facilitate this recording.

D. The instructions shall include:

1. Explanation of all system flow diagrams.

2. Maintenance of equipment.

3. Start-up procedures for all major equipment.

4. Explanation of seasonal system changes.

5. Explanation of Owner’s Responsibilities to operate, maintain, and flush domestic water system (i.e., ASHRA
E Standard 188).

E. Notify the Architect/Engineer of the time and place for the verbal instructions to be given to the Owner's representative so a representative can attend if desired.

F. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed, written training agenda and submit it to the Architect/Engineer a minimum of two weeks prior to the formal training for approval. The written agenda shall include specific training points within the items described above. For example: how to adjust setpoints, troubleshooting, proper start-up, proper shut-down, seasonal changes, draining, venting, changing filters, changing belts, etc. Failure to provide and follow an approved training agenda may result in additional training required at the expense of the Contractor.

G. Operating Instructions:

1. Contractor is responsible for all instructions to the Owner's representatives for the mechanical and control systems.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 0500-18

3.6 SYSTEM STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. The plumbing systems shall be complete and operating. System startup, testing, adjusting, and balancing to obtain satisfactory system performance is the responsibility of the Contractor. This includes calibration and adjustments of all controls, noise level adjustments and final adjustments as required.

C. Contractor shall adjust the plumbing systems and controls at season changes during the one year warranty period, as required, to provide satisfactory operation and to prove performance of all systems in all seasons.

D. All operating conditions and control sequences shall be tested during the start-up period. Test all interlocks, safety shutdowns, controls, and alarms.

E. The Contractor, subcontractors, and equipment suppliers shall have skilled technicians to ensure that all systems perform properly. If the Architect/Engineer is requested to visit the job site for trouble shooting, assisting in start-up, obtaining satisfactory equipment operation, resolving installation and/or workmanship problems, equipment substitution issues or unsatisfactory system performance, including call backs during the warranty period, through no fault of the design; the Contractor shall reimburse
the Owner on a time and materials basis for services rendered at the Architect/Engineer's standard hourly rates in effect when the services are requested. The Contractor shall pay the Owner for services required that are product, installation or workmanship related. Payment is due within 30 days after services are rendered.

3.7 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. The following paragraphs supplement Division 1 requirements.

B. Maintain at the job site a separate and complete set of plumbing drawings and specifications with all changes made to the systems clearly and permanently marked in complete detail.

C. Mark drawings to indicate revisions to piping size and location, both exterior and interior; including locations devices, requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual equipment locations, dimensioned from column lines; actual inverts and locations of underground piping; concealed equipment, dimensioned from column lines; mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located; Change Orders; concealed control system devices.

D. Before completion of the project, a set of reproducible plumbing drawings will be given to the Contractor for transfer of all as-built conditions from the paper set maintained at the job site. All marks on reproducibl
es shall be clear and permanent.

E. Mark specifications to show approved substitutions; Change Orders, and actual equipment and materials used.

F. Record changes daily and keep the marked drawings available for the Architect/Engineer's examination at any normal work time.

3.8 PAINTING
A. This Contractor shall paint the following items:

1. All piping in mechanical room

C. Equipment in finished areas that will be painted to match the room decor will be painted by others.

Should this Contractor install equipment in a finished area after the area has been painted, the Contractor shall have the equipment and all its supports, hangers, etc., painted to match the room decor.

D. Equipment cabinets, casings, covers, metal jackets, etc., in equipment rooms or concealed spaces, shall be furnished in standard or prime finish, free from scratches, abrasions, chips, etc.

F. Paint all equipment in unfinished areas such as boiler room, mecha nical spaces, storage room, etc.,
furnished by this Contractor. Equipment furnished with a factory coat of paint and enamel need not be painted, provided the factory applied finish is not marred or spattered. If so, equipment shall be refinished with the same paint as was factory applied.

G. Paint all outdoor uninsulated steel piping the color selected by Owner or Architect/Engineer.

H. After surfaces have been thoroughly cleaned and are free of oil, dirt, and other foreign matter; paint all pipes and equipment with the following:

1. Bare Metal Surfaces - Apply one coat of primer suitable for the metal being painted. Finish with two coats of Alkyd base enamel paint.

2. Insulated Surfaces - Paint insulation jackets with two coats of semi-gloss acrylic latex paint.

3. Color of paint shall be as follows:
a. All piping in mechanical room:
1) Domestic Cold Water: Blue pipe/white letters
2) Domestic Hot Water: Red pipe/white letters
3) Sanitary Waste: Green pipe/black letters
4) Natural Gas: Yellow pipe/black letters
b. Piping exposed in kitchen:
1) All Piping: White
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 0500-20

3.9 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Thoroughly clean all equipment and systems prior to the Owner's final acceptance of the project. Clean all foreign paint, grease, oil, dirt, labels, stickers, and other foreign material from all equipment.

B. Clean all areas where moisture is present. Immediately report any mold, biological growth, or water damage.

C. Remove all rust, scale, dirt, oils, stickers and thoroughly clean exterior of all exposed piping, hangers, and accessories.

D. Remove all rubbish, debris, etc., accumulated during construction from the premises.

3.10 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all equipment, valves, dampers, operators, etc., with other trades to maintain clear access area for servicing.

C. Installation of equipment or devices without regard to coordination of access requirements and confirmation with the Owner's designated representative will result in removal and reinstallation of the equipment at the Contractor's expense.

D. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with the low emitting material limits of the following standards:

1. SPECIFIER: For California projects.

2. CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemic
al Emissions VOC from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers Version 1.1.

3. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.

All adhesives and sealants wet-applied on site shall comply with the applicable chemical content requirements of SCAQMD Rule 1168.

4. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule SCAQMD 1113 - Wet Applied Paints and Coatings. All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet the applicable VOC limits of SCAQMD Rule 1113.

3.11 IAQ MAINTENANCE FOR OCCUPIED FACILITIES UNDER CONSTRUCTION A. Contractors shall make all reasonable efforts to prevent construction activities from affecting the air quality of the occupied areas of the building or outdoor areas near the building. These measures shall include, but not be limited to:

1. All contractors shall endeavor to minimize the amount of contaminants generated during construction. Methods to be employed shall include, but not be limited to:
a. Minimizing the amount of dust generated.
b. Reducing solvent fumes and VOC emissions.
c. Maintain good housekeeping practices, including sweeping and periodic dust and debris removal. There should be no visible haze in the air.

2. Request that the Owner designate an IAQ representative.

3. Review and receive approval from the Owner's IAQ representative for all IAQ-related construction activities and negative pressure containment plans.

4. Inform the IAQ representative of all conditions that could adversely impact IAQ, including operations that will produce higher than normal dust production or odors.

5. Schedule activities that may cause IAQ conditions that are not acceptable to the Owner's IAQ representative during unoccupied periods.

6. Request copies of and follow all of the Owner's IAQ and infection control policies.

7. Unless no other access is possible, the entrance to construction site shall not be through the existing facility.

8. To minimize growth of infectious organisms, do not permit damp areas in or near the construction area to remain for over 24 hours.

9. In addition to the criteria above, provide measures as recommended in the SMACNA "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction".

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 0500-22

1. Penetrations fire sealed and labeled in accordance with specifications.

2. All pumps operating and balanced.

3. All plumbing fixtures installed and caulked.

4. Pipe insulation complete, pipes labeled and valves tagged.

5. Owner and Contractor attendance list for domestic water systems operation, maintenance, and flushing training.

Accepted by:

END OF SECTION 22 0500
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING SECTION 22 0505-1
SECTION 22 0505 - PLUMBING DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Mechanical Demolition.

B. Cutting and Patching.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and equipment shall be as specified in individual Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. THE DRAWINGS ARE INTENDED TO INDICATE THE GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK

AND DO NOT SHOW EVERY PIPE, DUCT, OR PIECE OF EQUIPMENT THAT MUST BE REMOVED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE AND VERIFY CONDITIONS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING A BID.

B. Where walls, ceilings, etc., are shown as being removed on general drawings, the Contractor shall remove all mechanical equipment, devices, fixtures, piping, ducts, systems, etc., from the removed area.

C. Where ceilings, walls, partitions, etc., are temporarily removed and replaced by others, This Contractor shall remove, store, and replace equipment, devices, fixtures, pipes, ducts, systems, etc.

D. Verify that abandoned utilities serve only abandoned equipment or facilities. Extend services to facilities or equipment that shall remain in operation following demolition.

E. Coordinate work with all other Contractors and the Owner. Schedule removal of equipment to avoid conflicts.

F. This Contractor shall verify all existing equipment sizes and capacities where equipment is scheduled to be replaced or modified, prior to ordering new equipment.

G. Bid submittal shall mean the Contractor has visited the project site and verified existing conditions and scope of work.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Disconnect plumbing systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING SECTION 22 0505-2
B. Provide temporary connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction.

When work must be performed on operating equipment, use personnel experienced in such operations.

3.3 Existing Plumbing System: Maintain service to all plumbing fixtures until new piping is installed. Obtain permission from Owner at least 48 hours before shutting down system for any reason. Make changeover to new piping with minimum outage. Do not disconnect any roof drainage piping until new piping is in place and operational. DEMOLITION AND

EXTENSION OF EXISTING MECHANICAL WORK
A. Demolish and extend existing plumbing work under provisions of Division 2 and this Section.

B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.

C. Remove abandoned piping to source of supply and/or main lines.

D. Remove exposed abandoned pipes, including abandoned pipes above accessible ceilings. Cut pipes above ceilings, below floors and behind walls. Cap remaining lines. Repair building construction to match original. Remove all clamps, hangers, supports, etc. associated with pipe and duct removal.

E. Disconnect and remove mechanical devices and equipment serving equipment that has been removed.

F. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.

G. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing installations, or as specified.

H. Remove unused sections of domestic water piping back to mains and cap. Capped pipe shall be less than 2 feet from main to prevent "dead legs".

I. Temporarily cap all openings to the sanitary and vent system to prevent odor from entering the work area and building.

3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. This Contractor is responsible for all penetrations of existing construction required to complete the work of this project. Refer to Section 22 0529 for additional requirements.

B. Penetrations in existing construction should be reviewed carefully prior to proceeding with any work.

C. Penetrations shall be neat and clean with smooth and/or finished edges. Core drill where possible for clean opening.

D. Repair existing construction as required after penetration is complete to restore to original condition. Use similar materials and match adjacent construction unless otherwise noted or agreed to by the Architect/Engineer prior to start of work.

E. Floor slab on grade is a structural slab. All penetrations shall be X-rayed prior to cutting and/or drilling to avoid rebar or utilities encased in floor construction. Provide rebar dowels to replace damaged rebar and pin existing slab with patched slab. Refer to structural plans for additional information.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING SECTION 22 0505-3
F. Floor slab is post-tensioned. All penetrations shall be X-rayed prior to cutting and/or drilling to avoid any tension cables or utilities encased in floor construction.

G. This Contractor is responsible for all costs incurred in repair, relocations, or replacement of any cables, conduits, or other services if damaged without proper investigation.

3.5 CLEANING AND REPAIR
A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused.

B. Clean all systems adjacent to project which are affected by the dust and debris caused by this construction.

C. PLUMBING ITEMS REMOVED AND NOT RELOCATED REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF THE OWNER. CONTRACTOR SHALL PLACE ITEMS RETAINED BY THE OWNER IN A LOCATION COORDINATED WITH THE OWNER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL

DISPOSE OF MATERIAL THE OWNER DOES NOT WANT TO REUSE OR RETAIN FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES.

3.6 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Install temporary filter media over outside air intakes which are within 100 feet of the limits of construction or as noted on the drawings. This Contractor shall complete any cleaning required for existing systems which are affected by construction dust and debris.

B. Review locations of all new penetrations in existing floor slabs or walls. Determine construction type and review for possible interferences. Bring all concerns to the attention of the Architect/Engineer before proceeding.

END OF SECTION 22 0505
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING SECTION 22 0505-4
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 MOTORS SECTION 22 0513-1
SECTION 22 0513 - MOTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Single Phase and Three Phase Electric Motors.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.

B. AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

C. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 (latest published edition) - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

D. ANSI/IEEE 112 - Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators.

E. ANSI/NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.

F. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

G. Energy Independence and Act of 2007.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and suitable weatherproof coverings. For extended outdoor storage, follow manufacturer's recommendations for equipment and motor.

1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data including assembly drawings, bearing data including replacement sizes, and lubrication instructions.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture of commercial and industrial motors and accessories, with a minimum of three years documented manufacturing experience.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to the drawings for required electrical characteristics. Voltage is generally specified and scheduled as distribution voltage. Motor submittals may be based on utilization voltage if it corresponds to the correct distribution voltage.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 MOTORS SECTION 22 0513-2
Distribution/Nominal Voltage Utilization Voltage
120 115
208 200
240 230
277 265
480 460
B. Design motors for continuous operation in 40ºC environment, and for temperature rise in accordance with ANSI/NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, service factor, and motor enclosure type.

C. Visible Nameplate: Indicating horsepower, voltage, phase, hertz, RPM, full load amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, service factor, power factor, insulation class.

D. Electrical Connection: Boxes, threaded for conduit. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide conduit connection in end frame.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, motors 3/4 HP and smaller shall be single phase, 60 hertz, open drip- proof or totally enclosed fan-cooled type.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, motors 1 HP and larger shall be three phase, 60 hertz, squirrel cage type, NEMA Design Code B (low current in-rush, normal starting torque), open drip-proof or totally enclosed fan-cooled type.

G. Each contractor shall set all motors furnished by him.

H. All motors shall have a minimum service factor of 1.15.

I. All motors shall have ball or roller bearings with a minimum L-10 fatigue life of 150,000 hours in direct-coupled applications and 50,000 hours for belted applications. Belted rating shall be based on radial loads and pulley sizes called out in NEMA MG1-14.43.

J. Bearings shall be sealed type for 10 HP and smaller motors. Bearings shall be regreasable type for larger motors.

Aluminum end housings are not permitted on motors 15 HP or larger.

L. Motor Driven Equipment:

1. No equipment shall be selected or operate above 90% of its motor nameplate rating. Motor size may not be increased to compensate for equipment with efficiency lower than that specified.

2. If a larger motor than specified is required on equipment, the contractor supplying the equipment is responsible for all additional costs due to larger starters, wiring, etc.

M. Provide all belted motors with a means of moving and securing the motor to tighten belts. Motors over 2 HP shall have screw type tension adjustment. Motors over 40 HP shall have dual screw adjusters. Slide bases shall conform to NEMA standards.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 MOTORS SECTION 22 0513-3
N. Motors for pumps 1/12 HP or greater and less than 1 HP shall be electronically-commutated motors or shall have a minimum motor efficiency of 70% when rated in accordance with DOE 10 CFR 431.

These motors shall also have the means to adjust motor speed for either balancing or remote control.

2.2 ELECTRICALLY COMMUTATED MOTORS (ECM)
A. Motor shall be variable speed, constant torque, brushless DC motor for direct-drive applications.

Electronics shall be encapsulated for moisture protection and shall integral surge protection. Motor shall be pre-wired for specific voltage and phase.

B. Motor frame shall be NEMA 48; UL recognized components shall be provided for the motor construction.

C. All EC motors shall be a minimum of 85% efficient at all speeds.

D. Motors shall be permanently lubricated; utilize ball bearings to match with the connected driven equipment.

E. Provide motor with onboard motor control module. Motor speed shall be limited to provide electronic over current protection. Starter shall provide soft start to reduce inrush current and shall be controllable from 20% to 100% of full rated speed.

F. Operational mode shall be as scheduled and shall be one of the following:

1. Constant Flow

2. Constant Temperature

3. Constant Pressure
Full-Load Efficiencies %
Open Drip-Proof Totally Enclosed Fan
Cooled
HP 1200
rpm
1800
rpm
3600 rpm 1200
rpm
1800
rpm
3600
rpm

1.0 82.5 85.5 77.0 82.5 85.5 77.0

1.5 86.5 86.5 84.0 87.5 86.5 84.0

2.0 87.5 86.5 85.5 88.5 86.5 85.5

3.0 88.5 89.5 85.5 89.5 89.5 86.5

5.0 89.5 89.5 86.5 89.5 89.5 88.5

7.5 90.2 91.0 88.5 91.0 91.7 89.5

10.0 91.7 91.7 89.5 91.0 91.7 90.2

15.0 91.7 93.0 90.2 91.7 92.4 91.0

20.0 92.4 93.0 91.0 91.7 93.0 91.0

25.0 93.0 93.6 91.7 93.0 93.6 91.7

30.0 93.6 94.1 91.7 93.0 93.6 91.7

40.0 94.1 94.1 92.4 94.1 94.1 92.4

50.0 94.1 94.5 93.0 94.1 94.5 93.0

60.0 94.5 95.0 93.6 94.5 95.0 93.6

75.0 94.5 95.0 93.6 94.5 95.4 93.6
100.0 95.0 95.4 93.6 95.0 95.4 94.1
125.0 95.0 95.4 94.1 95.0 95.4 95.0
150.0 95.4 95.8 94.1 95.8 95.8 95.0
200.0 95.4 95.8 95.0 95.8 96.2 95.4
250.0 95.4 95.8 95.0 95.8 96.2 95.8
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 MOTORS SECTION 22 0513-4
Full-Load Efficiencies %
Open Drip-Proof Totally Enclosed Fan
Cooled
HP 1200
rpm
1800
rpm
3600 rpm 1200
rpm
1800
rpm
3600
rpm
300.0 95.4 95.8 95.4 95.8 96.2 95.8
350.0 95.4 95.8 95.4 95.8 96.2 95.8
400.0 95.8 95.8 95.8 95.8 96.2 95.8
450.0 96.2 96.2 95.8 95.8 96.2 95.8
500.0 96.2 96.2 95.8 95.8 96.2 95.8
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All rotating shafts and/or equipment shall be completely guarded from all contact. Partial guards and/or guards that do not meet all applicable OSHA standards are not acceptable. Contractor is responsible for providing this guarding if it is not provided with the equipment supplied.

B. For flexible coupled drive motors, mount coupling to the shafts in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's recommendations. Align shafts to manufacturer's requirements or within 0.002 inch per inch diameter of coupling hub.

C. For belt drive motors, mount sheaves on the appropriate shafts per manufacturer's instructions. Use a straight edge to check alignment of the sheaves. Reposition sheaves as necessary so the straight edge contacts both sheave faces squarely. After sheaves are aligned, loosen the adjustable motor base so the belt(s) can be added, and tighten the base so the belt tension is in accordance with the drive manufacturer's recommendations. Frequently check belt tension and adjust if necessary during the first day of operation and again after 80 hours of operation.

END OF SECTION 22 0513
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 22 0529-1
SECTION 22 0529 - PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Hangers, Supports, and Associated Anchors.

B. Equipment Bases and Supports.

C. Sleeves and Seals.

D. Flashing and Sealing of Equipment and Pipe Stacks.

E. Cutting of Openings.

F. Escutcheon Plates and Trim.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation.

B. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.

C. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices D. MSS SP-127 - Bracing for Piping Systems Seismic-Wind-Dynamic Design, Selection, Application.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 22 0500. Include plastic pipe manufacturers' support spacing requirements.

1.4 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Furnish sleeves and hanger inserts to General Contractor for placement into formwork.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. Refer to Section 22 0550 for additional requirements for seismic restraints.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 22 0529-2

2.2 HANGER RODS
A. Hanger rods for single rod hangers shall conform to the following:

1. Steel, Cast Iron, and Glass Pipe:
a. Hanger Rod Diameter:
1) 2-1/2" and smaller: 3/8"
2) 3" through 3-5/8": 3/8"
3) 4" through 6": 1/2"
4) 8": 5/8"
5) 10": 3/4"
6) 12": 7/8"
7) 14" and 16": 1"
8) 18" and 24": 1-1/4")

2. Copper and Plastic Pipe:
a. Hanger Rod Diameter:
1) 2-1/2" and smaller: 3/8"
2) 3") through 3-5/8": 3/8"
3) 4") through 6": 1/2"
4) 8": 5/8"
5) 10": 3/4"
6) 12": 7/8"
7) 14" and 16": 1"
8) 18" and 24": 1-1/4"
B. Rods for double rod hangers may be reduced one size. Minimum rod diameter is 3/8 inches.

C. Hanger rods and accessories used in mechanical spaces or otherwise dry areas shall have ASTM B633 electro-plated zinc finish.

D. All hanger rods, nuts, washers, clevises, etc., in damp areas shall have ASTM A123 hot-dip galvanized finish applied after fabrication. This applies to the following areas:

2.3 PIPE AND STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS
A. General:

1. Pipe hangers, clamps, and supports shall conform to Manufacturers Standardization Society MSS SP-58, 69, 89, and 127 (where applicable).

2. On all insulated piping, provide at each support an insert of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation, between the pipe and insulation jacket, to prevent insulation from sagging and crushing. Refer to insulation specifications for materials and additional information.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 22 0529-3

3. Copper piping located in an exposed area, including indirect waste piping in kitchens and janitor's closets, shall use split ring standoff hangers for copper tubing. Support shall include plastic pipe insert similar to Unistrut Cush-A-Clamp, Hydra-Zorb, nVent Cushion Clamp or Eaton Vibra-Clamp. Use electro-galvanized or more corrosion resistant and threaded rod for floor applications. Use anchors applicable to the wall type with corrosion resistant threaded rod for wall applications.
a. Products:
1) nVent/M-Co Model #456
2) Eaton Fig. 3198HCT
3) Anvil Fig. CT138R
B. Vertical Supports:

1. Support and laterally brace vertical pipes at every floor level in multi-story structures, unless otherwise noted by applicable codes, but never at intervals over 15 feet Support vertical pipes with riser clamps installed below hubs, couplings, or lugs. Provide sufficient flexibility to accommodate expansion and contraction to avoid compromising fire barrier penetrations or stressing piping at fixed takeoff locations. a. Products:
1) Eaton Fig B3373 Series
2) nVent 510 Series
3) Anvil Fig. 90

2. Cold Pipe: Place restrained neoprene mounts beneath vertical pipe riser clamps to prevent sweating of cold pipes. Select neoprene mounts based on the weight of the pipe to be supported. Insulate over mounts.
a. Products:
1) Mason RBA, RCA or RDA
2) Mason BR

3. Cold Pipe Alternative: Insulated pipe riser clamp with no thermal bridging between clamp and pipe; water repellant calcium silicate insulation material adhered inside the clamp; ASTM A653 galvanized steel clamp.
a. Products:
1) Pipeshields E100

4. Wall supports shall be used where vertical height of structure exceeds minimum spacing requirements. Install wall supports at same spacing as hangers or strut supports along vertical length of pipe runs. Wall supports shall be coordinated with the Structural Engineer.

5. Masonry Anchors: Fasten to concrete masonry units with expansion anchors or self- tapping masonry screws. For expansion anchors into hollow concrete block, use sleeve- type anchors designed for the specific application. Do not fasten in masonry joints. Do not use powder actuated fasteners, wooden plugs, or plastic inserts.

1. Oversize all hangers, clamps, and supports on insulated piping to allow insulation and jacket to pass through unbroken. This applies to both hot and cold pipes.

2. Hangers in direct contact with bare copper pipe shall include plastic pipe insert similar to Unistrut Cush-A-Clamp, Hydra-Zorb, nVent Cushion Clamp or Eaton Vibra-Clamp within their temperature limits of -65°F to +275°F.

3. Vertical cold pipe drops and rough-ins to fixtures shall be supported by insulated pipe clamps to prevent thermal bridging and condensation.

4. On all insulated piping, provide a semi-cylindrical metallic shield and vapor barrier jacket.

5. Ferrous hot piping 4 inches and larger shall have steel saddles tack welded to the pipe at each support with a depth not less than specified for the insulation. Factory fabricated inserts may be used.
a. Products:
1) Anvil Fig. 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, 165
2) Eaton Fig. 3160, 3161, 3162, 3163, 3164, 3165
3) nVent Model 630, 631, 632, 633, 634, 635

6. Unless otherwise indicated, hangers shall be as follows:
a. Clevis Type: Bare Metal Pipe, Rigid Plastic Pipe, Insulated Cold Pipe, Insulated Hot Pipe - 3 inches & Smaller
1) Products: Bare Steel Plastic or Insulated Pipe:
a) Anvil Fig. 260
b) Eaton Fig. 3100
c) nVent Model 400
2) Products: Bare Copper Pipe Felt or PVC Coated:
a) Eaton Fig. B3104F or B3100CTC
b) Anvil Fig. CT65
c) nVent Fig. 402
b. Adjustable Swivel Ring Type: Bare Metal Pipe - 4 inches and Smaller 1) Products: Bare Steel Pipe:
a) Anvil Fig. 69
b) Eaton Fig. B3170NF
c) nVent Model FCN
2) Products: Bare Copper Pipe:
a) Eaton Fig. B3170CTC
b) nVent 102A0 Series
c) Anvil Fig. CT-69
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 22 0529-5

7. Support may be fabricated from U-channel strut or similar shapes. Piping less than 4" in diameter shall be secured to strut with clamps of proper design and capacity as required to maintain spacing and alignment. Strut shall be independently supported from hanger drops or building structure. Size and support shall be per manufacturer's installation requirements for structural support of piping. Clamps shall not interrupt piping insulation. a. Strut used in mechanical spaces or otherwise dry areas shall have ASTM B633 electro-plated zinc finish.
b. Strut used in damp areas listed in hanger rods shall have ASTM A123 hot-dip galvanized finish applied after fabrication.

8. Unless otherwise indicated, pipe supports for use with struts shall be as follows:
a. Clamp Type: Bare Metal Pipe, Rigid Plastic Pipe, Insulated Cold Pipe, Insulated Hot Pipe - 3 inches and smaller
1) Clamps in direct contact with copper pipe shall include plastic pipe insert similar to Unistrut Cush-A-Clamp, Hydra-Zorb, nVent Cushion Clamp or Eaton Vibra-Clamp.
2) Pipes subject to expansion and contraction shall have clamps oversized to allow limited pipe movement.
3) Products: Bare Steel, Plastic or Insulated Pipe:
a) Unistrut Fig. P1100 or P2500
b) Eaton Fig. B2000 or B2400
c) Anvil Fig. AS1200
d) nVent USC
4) Products: Bare Copper Pipe:
a) Eaton Fig. BVT
b) nVent CADDY Cushion Clamp
5) Roller Type: Insulated Hot Pipe - 4 inches and larger D. Upper (Structural) Attachments:

1. Unless otherwise shown, upper attachments for hanger rods or support struts shall be as follows:
a. Steel Structure Clamps: C-Type Wide Flange Beam Clamps (for use on top and/or bottom of wide flanges. Not permitted for use with bar-joists.):
1) Products:
a) Anvil Fig. 86
b) Eaton Fig. B3033/B3034
c) nVent Model 300 & 310
b. Steel Structure Clamps: Scissor Type Beam Clamps (for use with bar-joists and wide flange):
1) Products:
a) Anvil Fig. 228, 292
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 22 0529-6
b) Eaton Fig. B3054
c) nVent Model 360
c. Concentrically Loaded Open Web Joist Hangers (for use with bar joists):
1) Products:
a) MCL. M1, M2 or M3
d. Concrete: Concrete Inserts, Single Rod Galvanized:
1) Products:
a) Anvil Fig. 282
b) Eaton Fig. B3014
c) nVent Model 355
e. Concrete: Concrete Inserts, Continuous Strip Galvanized:
1) Products:
a) Unistrut Corp P3200 Series
b) Eaton Fig. B22
c) nVent CONB
d) Anvil AS249

2.4 FOUNDATIONS, BASES, AND SUPPORTS
A. Basic Requirements:

1. Furnish and install foundations, bases, and supports (not specifically indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications of either the General Construction or Mechanical work as provided by another Contractor) for mechanical equipment.

2. All concrete foundations, bases and supports, shall be reinforced. All steel bases and supports shall receive a prime coat of zinc chromate or red metal primer. After completion of work, give steel supports a final coat of gray enamel.

B. Concrete Bases (Housekeeping Pads):

1. Refer to Section 22 0550 for additional requirements for concrete bases in seismic applications.

2. Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, concrete bases shall be nominal 4 inches thick and shall extend 3 inches on all sides of the equipment (6 inches larger than factory base), except where pad extension would interfere with working space at equipment control panels and electrical panels.

3. Where a base is less than 12 inches from a wall, extend the base to the wall to prevent a "dirt-trap".

4. Concrete materials and workmanship required for the Contractor's work shall be provided by the Contractor. Materials and workmanship shall conform to the applicable standards of the Portland Cement Association. Reinforce with 6"x6", W1.4-W1.4 welded wire fabric. Concrete shall withstand 3,000 pounds compression per square inch at 28 days.

5. Equipment requiring bases is as follows:
a. Water Heater
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 22 0529-7
C. Supports:

1. Provide sufficient clips, inserts, hangers, racks, rods, and auxiliary steel to securely support all suspended material, equipment and conduit without sag.

2. Hang heavy equipment from concrete floors or ceilings with Architect/Engineer- approved concrete inserts, furnished and installed by the Contractor whose work requires them, except where indicated otherwise.

2.5 ROOF PENETRATIONS
A. Roof Curb Enclosure: Provide weatherproof roof curb and enclosure for pipe penetrations.

Refer to drawings for details.

B. Conical Pipe Boot: Seal pipes with surface temperature below 150°°F penetrating single-ply roofs with conical stepped, UV-resistant silicone, EPDM or neoprene pipe flashings and stainless steel clamps equal to Portals Plus Pipe Boots or Pipetite. Color: White shall match roofing membrane.

C. Break insulation only at the clamp for pipes between 60°°F and 150°°F. Seal outdoor insulation edges watertight.

2.6 SLEEVES AND LINTELS
A. Each Contractor shall provide sleeves and lintels for all duct and pipe openings required for the Contractor's work in masonry walls and floors, unless specifically shown as being by others.

B. Fabricate all sleeves from standard weight black steel pipe or as indicated on the drawings.

Provide continuous sleeve. Cut or split sleeves are not acceptable.

C. Fabricate all lintels for masonry walls from structural steel shapes or as indicated on the drawings. Have all lintels approved by the Architect or Structural Engineer.

D. Sleeves through the floors on exposed risers shall be flush with the ceiling, with planed squared ends extending 1" above the floor in unfinished areas, and flush with the floor in finished areas, to accept spring closing floor plates.

E. Sleeves shall not penetrate structural members or masonry walls without approval from the Structural Engineer. Sleeves shall then comply with the Architect/Engineer's design.

F. Openings through unexcavated floors and/or foundation walls below the floor shall have a smooth finish with sufficient annular space around material passing through opening so slight settling will not place stress on the material or building structure.

G. Install all sleeves concentric with pipes. Secure sleeves in concrete to wood forms. This Contractor is responsible for sleeves dislodged or moved when pouring concrete.

H. Where pipes rise through concrete floors that are on earthen grade, provide 3/4" resilient expansion joint material (e.g., foam, rubber, asphalt-coated fiber, bituminous-impregnated felt, or cork) wrapped around the pipe, the full depth of concrete, at the point of penetration. Secure to prevent shifting during concrete placement and finishing.

I. Size sleeves large enough to allow expansion and contraction movement. Provide continuous insulation wrapping.

1. Where shown on the drawings, pipes passing through walls, ceilings, or floors shall have their annular space (sleeve or drilled hole - not tapered hole made with knockout plug) sealed by properly sized sealing elements consisting of a synthetic rubber material compounded to resist aging, ozone, sunlight, water and chemical action.

2. Sleeves, if used, shall be standard weight steel with primed finish and waterstop/anchor continuously welded to sleeve. If piping carries only fluids below 120°°F, sleeves may be thermoplastic with integral water seal and textured surface.

3. Sleeves shall be at least 2 pipe sizes larger than the pipes.

4. Pressure shall be maintained by stainless steel bolts and other parts. Pressure plates may be of composite material for Models S and OS.

5. Sealing element shall be as follows:

Element
Model Service Material Temperature Range
S Standard (Stainless) EPDM -40°F to 250°F
T High/Low Temperature (Steam) Silicone -67°F to 400°F T Fire Seals (1 hour) Silicone -67°F to 400°F
FS Fire Seals (3 hours) Silicone -67°F to 400°F
OS Oil Resistant/Stainless Nitrile -40°F to 210°F

6. Manufacturers:
a. Thunderline Corporation "Link-Seals"
b. O-Z/Gedney Company
c. Calpico, Inc.
d. Innerlynx
e. Metraflex Company (cold service only)
f. Polywater PHSD

2.7 ESCUTCHEON PLATES AND TRIM
A. Fit escutcheons to all insulated or uninsulated exposed pipes passing through walls, floors, or ceilings of finished rooms.

B. Escutcheons shall be heavy gauge, cold rolled steel, copper coated under a chromium plated finish, heavy spring clip, rigid hinge and latch.

C. Install galvanized steel (unless otherwise indicated) trim strip to cover vacant space and raw construction edges of all rectangular openings in finished rooms. This includes pipe openings.

2.8 PIPE PENETRATIONS
A. Seal all pipe penetrations. Seal non-rated walls and floor penetrations with grout or caulk.

Backing material may be used.

B. Seal fire rated wall and floor penetrations with fire seal system as specified.

2.9 PIPE ANCHORS
A. Provide all items needed to allow adequate expansion and contraction of all piping. All piping shall be supported, guided, aligned, and anchored as required.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 22 0529-9
B. Repair all piping leaks and associated damage. Pipes shall not rub on any part of the building.

2.10 FINISH
A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
A. General Installation Requirements:

1. Install all items per manufacturer's instructions.

2. Coordinate the location and method of support of piping systems with all installations under other Divisions and Sections of the Specifications.

3. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

4. Supports shall extend directly to building structure. Do not support piping from duct hangers unless coordinated with sheet metal contractor prior to installation. Do not allow lighting or ceiling supports to be hung from piping supports.

B. Supports Requirements:

2. Set all concrete inserts in place before pouring concrete.

3. Furnish, install and prime all auxiliary structural steel for support of piping systems that are not shown on the Drawings as being by others.

4. Install hangers and supports complete with lock nuts, clamps, rods, bolts, couplings, swivels, inserts and required accessories.

5. Hangers for horizontal piping shall have adequate means of vertical adjustment for alignment.

C. Pipe Requirements:

1. Support all piping and equipment, including valves, strainers, traps and other specialties and accessories to avoid objectionable or excessive stress, deflection, swaying, sagging or vibration in the piping or building structure during erection, cleaning, testing and normal operation of the systems.

2. Do not, however, restrain piping to cause it to snake or buckle between supports or to prevent proper movement due to expansion and contraction.

3. Support piping at equipment and valves so they can be disconnected and removed without further supporting the piping.

4. Piping shall not introduce strains or distortion to connected equipment.

5. Parallel horizontal pipes may be supported on trapeze hangers made of structural shapes and hanger rods; otherwise, pipes shall be supported with individual hangers.

6. Trapeze hangers may be used where ducts interfere with normal pipe hanging.

7. Provide additional supports where pipe changes direction, adjacent to flanged valves and strainers, at equipment connections and heavy fittings.

8. Provide at least one hanger adjacent to each joint in grooved end steel pipe with mechanical couplings.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 22 0529-10
D. Provided the installation complies with all loading requirements of truss and joist manufacturers, the following practices are acceptable:

1. Loads of 100 lbs. or less may be attached anywhere along the top or bottom chords of trusses or joists with a minimum 3' spacing between loads.

4. If conditions cannot be met, coordinate installation with truss or joist manufacturer and contact Architect/Engineer.

E. After piping and insulation installation are complete, cut hanger rods back at trapeze supports so they do not extend more than 3/4" below bottom face of lowest fastener and blunt any sharp edges.

G. Do not exceed the manufacturer's recommended maximum load for any hanger or support.

H. Steel/Concrete Structure: Spacing of hangers shall not exceed the compressive strength of the insulation inserts, and in no case shall exceed the following:

1. Steel and Fiberglass (Std. Weight or Heavier - Liquid Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 1-1/4" & under: 7'-0"
2) 1-1/2": 9'-0"
3) 2": 10'-0"
4) 2-1/2": 11'-0"
5) 3": 12'-0"
6) 4" & larger: 12'-0"

2. Steel (Std. Weight or Heavier - Vapor Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 1-1/4" and under: 9'-0"
2) 1-1/2": 12'-0"
3) 2" & larger: 12'-0"
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 22 0529-11

3. Hard Drawn Copper & Brass (Liquid Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 3/4" and under: 5'-0"
2) 1": 6'-0"
3) 1-1/4": 7'-0"
4) 1-1/2" 8'-0"
5) 2": 8'-0"
6) 2-1/2": 9'-0"
7) 3": 10'-0"
8) 4": 12'-0"
9) 6": 12'-0"

4. Hard Drawn Copper & Brass (Vapor Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 3/4" & under: 7'-0"
2) 1": 8'-0"
3) 1-1/4": 9'-0"
4) 1-1/2": 10'-0"
5) 2": 11'-0"
6) 2-1/2" & larger: 12'-0"

5. Plastic Pipe:
a. Hangers shall be spaced based on the piping system manufacturer's instructions or, if no system instructions are available, space hangers at 4'-0" maximum centers.

6. Ultra-Flexible Pipe, and Flexible Hose, and Soft Copper Tubing:
a. Continuous channel with hangers maximum 8'-0" OC.

I. Steel/Concrete Structure: Spacing of Hangers shall not exceed the compressive strength of the insulation inserts, and in no case shall exceed the spacing as defined in 2019 CPC, Table 313.3 as applied to each piping system.

1. Steel and Fiberglass (Std. Weight or Heavier - Liquid Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 1-1/4" & under: 7'-0"
2) 1-1/2": 9'-0"
3) 2": 10'-0"
4) 2-1/2": 11'-0"
5) 3": 12'-0"
6) 4" & larger: 12'-0"

2. Steel (Std. Weight or Heavier - Vapor Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 1/2" and under: 6'-0"
2) 3/4" to 1": 8'-0"
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 22 0529-12
3) 1-1/4" and under: 9'-0"
4) 1-1/2": 10'-0"
5) 2" & larger: 10'-0"

3. Hard Drawn Copper & Brass (Liquid Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 3/4" and under: 5'-0"
2) 1": 6'-0"
3) 1-1/4": 6'-0"
4) 1-1/2" 6'-0"
5) 2": 8'-0"
6) 2-1/2": 9'-0"
7) 3": 10'-0"
8) 4": 10'-0"
9) 6": 10'-0"

4. Hard Drawn Copper & Brass (Vapor Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 3/4" & under: 6'-0"
2) 1": 6'-0"
3) 1-1/4": 6'-0"
4) 1-1/2": 6'-0"
5) 2": 10'-0"
6) 2-1/2" & larger: 10'-0"

5. Plastic Pipe:
a. Hangers shall be spaced based on the piping system manufacturer's instructions or, if no system instructions are available, space hangers at 4'-0" (1220 mm) maximum centers.

6. Ultra-Flexible Pipe, and Flexible Hose, and Soft Copper Tubing:
a. Continuous channel with hangers maximum 8'-0" OC.

J. Wood Structure: Spacing of hangers shall not exceed the compressive strength of the insulation inserts, and in no case shall exceed the following:

1. Steel and Fiberglass (Std. Weight or Heavier - Liquid Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 1-1/4" & under: 7'-0"
2) 1-1/2": 9'-0"
3) 2": 10'-0"
4) 2-1/2": 11'-0"
5) 3": 12'-0"
6) 4" through 6": 12'-0"
7) 8": 9'-0"
8) 10": 6'-0"
9) 12": 4'-0"
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 22 0529-13

2. Steel (Std. Weight or Heavier - Vapor Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 1/2" and under: 6'-0"
2) 3/4" to 1": 8'-0"
3) 1-1/4" and under: 9'-0"
4) 1-1/2": 10'-0"
5) 2" & larger: 10'-0"
6) 3": 12'-0"
7) 4" through 8": 12'-0"
8) 10": 9'-0"
9) 12": 6'-0"

3. Hard Drawn Copper & Brass (Liquid Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 3/4" & under: 5'-0"
2) 1": 6'-0"
3) 1-1/4": 6'-0"
4) 1-1/2": 6'-0"
5) 2": 8'-0"
6) 2-1/2": 9'-0"
7) 3": 10'-0"
8) 4": 10'-0"
9) 6": 10'-0"

4. Hard Drawn Copper & Brass (Vapor Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 3/4" & under: 6'-0"
2) 1": 6'-0"
3) 1-1/4": 6'-0"
4) 1-1/2": 6'-0"
5) 2": 10'-0"
6) 2-1/2" & larger: 10'-0"

5. Plastic Pipe:
a. Hangers shall be spaced based on the piping system manufacturer's instructions or, if no system instructions are available, space hangers at 4'-0" maximum centers.

6. Ultra-Flexible Pipe, Flexible Hose, and Soft Copper Tubing:
a. Continuous channel with hangers maximum 8'-0" OC.

K. Installation of hangers shall conform to MSS SP-58, 69, 89 and the applicable Plumbing Code.

END OF SECTION 22 0529
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS SECTION 22 0529-14
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION SECTION 22 0553-1
SECTION 22 0553 - PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Identification of products installed under Division 22.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.

B. ASTM B-1, B-3, and B-8 for copper conductors.

C. ASTM D-1248 for Polyethylene Extrusion Materials, ICEA S-70-547 Weatherproof Resistant Polyethylene Conductors, ICEA S-61-402/NEMA WC5 Thermoplastic Insulated Wire & Cable, ICEA S-95-658/NEMA WC70 Non-Shielded 0 " 2kV Cables.

D. CGA Pamphlet C-9, Standard Color-Marking of Compressed Gas Cylinders for Medical Use.

E. NFPA-99: Health Care Facilities.

F. UL 1581 Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 22 0500. Include list of items identified, wording, letter sizes, and color coding.

B. Include valve chart and schedule listing valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. 3M
B. Bunting
C. Calpico
D. Craftmark
E. Emedco
F. Kolbi Industries
G. Seton
H. W.H. Brady
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION SECTION 22 0553-2

2.2 MATERIALS
A. All pipe markers (purchased or stenciled) shall conform to ANSI A13.1. Marker lengths and letter sizes shall be at least the following:

OD of Pipe or Insulation Marker Length Size of Letters
Up to and including 1-1/4" 8" 1/2"
1-1/2" to 2" 8" 3/4"
2-1/2" to 6" 12" 1-1/4"
8" to 10" 24" 2-1/2"
Over 10" 32" 3-1/2"
Plastic tags may be used for outside diameters under 3/4" PART 3 - Plastic Nameplates: Laminated three-layer phenolic with engraved black, 1/4" minimum letters on light contrasting background.EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install all products per manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

C. Valves:

1. All valves (except shutoff valves at equipment) shall have numbered tags.

2. Provide or replace numbered tags on all existing valves that are connected to new systems or that have been revised.

3. Provide all existing valves used to extend utilities to this project with numbered tags.

Review tag numbering sequence with the Owner prior to ordering tags.

4. Secure tags with heavy duty key chain and brass "S" link or with mechanically fastened plastic straps.

5. Attach to handwheel or around valve stem. On lever operated valves, drill the lever to attach tags.

6. Number all tags and show the service of the pipe.

7. Provide one Plexiglas framed valve directory listing all valves, with respective tag numbers, uses and locations. Mount directory in location chosen by the Architect/Engineer.

Pipe Markers:

1. Adhesive Backed Markers: Use Brady Style 1, 2, or 3 on pipes 3" diameter and larger. Use Brady Style 4, 6, or 8 on pipes under 3" diameter. Similar styles by other listed manufacturers are acceptable. Secure all markers at both ends with a wrap of pressure sensitive tape completely around the pipe.

2. Snap-on Markers: Use Seton "Setmark" on pipes up to 5-7/8" OD. Use Seton "Setmark" with nylon or Velcro ties for pipes 6" OD and over. Similar styles by other listed manufacturers are acceptable.

3. Apply markers and arrows in the following locations where clearly visible:
a. At each valve.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION SECTION 22 0553-3
b. On both sides of walls that pipes penetrate.
c. At least every 20 feet along all pipes.
d. On each riser and each leg of each "T" joint.
e. At least once in every room and each story traversed.

E. Equipment:

1. All equipment not easily identifiable such as controls, relays, gauges, etc.; and all equipment in an area remote from its function shall have nameplates or plastic tags listing name, function, and drawing symbol. Do not label exposed equipment in public areas.

2. Provide engraved plastic tags at all hydronic or steam system makeup water meters.

3. Mechanical equipment that is not covered by the U.S. National Appliance Energy Conservation Act (NAECA) of 1987 shall carry a permanent label installed by the manufacturer stating that the equipment complies with the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1.

3.2 SCHEDULE
A. Pipes to be marked shall be labeled with text as follows, regardless of which method or material is used:

1. HIGH TEMP HOT WATER OVER 240°F: Black lettering; yellow background

2. CONDENSATE DRAIN: White lettering; green background

3. DOMESTIC COLD WATER: White lettering; green background

4. DOMESTIC HOT WATER - 115°F: White lettering; green background

5. DOMESTIC HOT WATER - 140°F: White lettering; green background

6. DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING - 115°F: White lettering; green background

7. DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING - 140°F: White lett
ering; green background

8. SANITARY SEWER: Black lettering; yellow background

9. VENT: Black lettering; yellow background

10. STORM SEWER (PRIMARY AND SECONDARY): White lettering; green background

11. All Underground Pipes: Varies
B. Non-Potable Piping: All piping conveying non-potable water shall be permanently identified by continuously painted or continuous adhesive backed marker along entire length of pipe and branches so the piping is readily distinguishable from piping carrying potable water. Pipe markers shall be located as described above.

1. NON-POTABLE WATER: White lettering; purple background

2. IRRIGATION WATER: White lettering; purple background

3. DEIONIZED WATER: White lettering; purple background

4. DISTILLED WATER: White lettering; purple background

5. RO WATER: White lettering; purple background
C. Ceiling Markers:

1. CLEAN OUT Condensate, San, Etc.

2. WATER HAMMER ARRESTOR

3. CONTROL VALVE

4. TRAP PRIMER

5. HWC BALANCING/CONTROL VALVE
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION SECTION 22 0553-4
END OF SECTION 22 0553
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 22 0593-1 SECTION 22 0593 - PLUMBING TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of plumbing systems.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Agency shall be a company specializing in the adjusting and balancing of systems specified in this section with minimum three years' experience. Perform work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer, NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing and Adjusting Supervisor, SMARTA Certified Air and Hydronic Balancer, or TABB Certified Supervisor.

B. Work shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the references listed at the start of this section.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. AABC - National Standards for Total System Balance, 2002.

B. ASHRAE - 2003 HVAC Applications Handbook; Chapter 37, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.

C. TABB - International Standards for Environmental Systems Balance.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit copies of report forms, balancing procedures, and the name and qualifications of testing and balancing agency for approval within 30 days after award of Contract.

1.5 REPORT FORMS
A. Submit reports on AABC, SMACNA or NEBB forms. Use custom forms approved by the Architect/Engineer when needed to supply specified information.

B. Include in the final report a schematic drawing showing each system component, including balancing devices, for each system. Each drawing shall be included with the test reports required for that system. The schematic drawings shall identify all testing points and cross-reference

these points to the report forms and procedures.

C. Refer to PART 4 for required reports.

1.6 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE
A. The TAB Contractor shall include an extended warranty of 90 days after owner receipt of a completed balancing report, during which time the Owner may request a recheck of terminals, or resetting of any outlet, coil, or device listed in the test report. This warranty shall provide a minimum of 24 manhours of onsite service time. If it is determined that the new test results are not within the design criteria, the balancer shall rebalance the system according to design criteria.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 22 0593-2 B. Warranty/Guarantee must meet one of the following programs: TABB International Quality Assurance Program, AABC National Project Performance Guarantee, NEBB's Conformance Certification.

1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate schedule with other trades. Provide a minimum of seven days' notice to all trades and the Architect/Engineer prior to performing each test.

B. Project will be constructed in phases. Provide balancing report after each phase is complete.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All procedures must conform to a published standard listed in the References article of this section. All equipment shall be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Any system not listed in this specification but installed under the contract documents shall be balanced using a procedure from a published standard listed in the References article.

B. The Balancing Contractor shall incorporate all pertinent documented construction changes (e.g., submittals/shop drawings, change orders, RFIs, ASIs, etc.) and include in the balancing report.

C. Recorded data shall represent actual measured or observed conditions.

D. Cut insulation, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing is complete, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials as specified. Restore vapor barrier and finish as specified.

E. Permanently mark setting
of valves and other adjustment devices allowing for settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.

F. Leave systems in proper working order, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, plugging test holes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.

G. Installations with systems consisting of multiple components shall be balanced with all system components operating.

3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Before beginning work, verify that systems are complete and operable. Ensure the following:

1. General Equipment Requirements:
a. Equipment is safe to operate and in normal condition. b. Equipment with moving parts is properly lubricated.
c. Temperature control systems are complete and operable. d. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 22 0593-3 e. Direction of rotation of all pumps is correct.
f. Access doors are closed and end caps are in place.

2. Pipe System Requirements:
a. Hydronic systems have been cleaned, filled, and vented. b. Strainer screens are clean and in place.
c. Shutoff, throttling and balancing valves are open.

B. Report any defects or deficiencies to Architect/Engineer.

C. Promptly report items that are abnormal or prevent proper balancing.

D. If, for design reasons, system cannot be properly balanced, report as soon as observed.

E. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.3 PREPARATION
A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to the Architect/Engineer for spot checks during testing.

B. Instruments shall be calibrated within six months of testing performed for project, or more recently if recommended by the instrument manufacturer.

3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. ± 10% of scheduled values:

1. Adjust piping systems to ±10% of design values.

3.5 ADJUSTING
A. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that disruption has been rectified.

B. Once balancing of systems is complete, at least one valve must be 100% open.

C. After testing, adjusting and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify system is operating as reported in the report. Document any discrepancies.

D. Contractor responsible for each motor shall also be responsible for replacement sheaves.

Coordinate
with contractor.

E. Contractor responsible for pump shall trim impeller to final duty point as instructed by this contractor on all pumps not driven by a VFD. Coordinate with contractor.

3.6 SUBMISSION OF REPORTS
A. Fill in test results on appropriate forms.

B. Complete all applicable tests, certifications, forms, and matrices listed in the Illinois Department of Public Health (IDPH) Final Occupancy Checklist Certifications for Request of Inspection.

4.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Title Page:

1. Project name.

2. Project location.

3. Project Architect.

4. Project Engineer (IMEG Corp.).

5. Project General Contractor.

6. TAB Company name, address, phone number.

7. TAB Supervisor's name and certification number.

8. TAB Supervisor's signature and date.

9. Report date.

B. Report Index
C. General Information:

1. Test conditions.

2. Nomenclature used throughout report.

3. Notable system characteristics/discrepancies from design.

4. Test standards followed.

5. Any deficiencies noted.

6. Quality assurance statement.

D. Instrument List:

1. Instrument.

2. Manufacturer, model, and serial number.

3. Range.

4. Calibration date.

4.2 PLUMBING SYSTEMS
A. Pump Data:

1. Drawing symbol.

2. Service.

3. Manufacturer, size, and model.

4. Impeller size: specified, actual, and final (if trimmed).

5. Flow Rate (gpm): specified and actual.

6. Pump Head: specified, operating and shutoff.

7. Suction Pressure: operating and shutoff.

8. Discharge Pressure: operating and shutoff.

B. Electric Motors:

1. Drawing symbol of equipment served.

2. Manufacturer, model, frame.

3. Nameplate: HP, phase, service factor, RPM, operating amps, efficiency.

4. Measured: Amps for each phase.

1. Drawing symbol.

2. Service.

3. Location.

4. Size.

5. Manufacturer and model.

6. Flow rate (gpm): specified and actual.

7. Pressure drop: specified and actual.

END OF SECTION 22 0593
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 22 0593-6 (This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION SECTION 22 0716-1
SECTION 22 0716 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Equipment Insulation.

B. Equipment Insulation Finishes.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in insulation application with five years minimum experience.

B. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 (where required).

C. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with the low emitting material limits of the following standards:

1. CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions VOC from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers Version 1.1.

2. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168 ÓÓ Adhesive and Sealant Applications. All adhesives and sealants wet-applied on site shall comply with the applicable chemical content requirements of SCAQMD Rule 1168.

3. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule SCAQMD 1113 - Wet Applied Paints and Coatings. All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet the applicable VOC limits of SCAQMD Rule 1113.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 (latest published edition) - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

B. ANSI/ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate C. ANSI/ASTM C534 - Elastomeric Foam Insulation
D. ANSI/ASTM C921 - Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation E. ANSI/ASTM D1668 - Glass Fabric for Waterproofing
F. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

G. National Commercial & Industrial Insulation Standards - 1999 Edition - as published by Midwest Insulation Contractors Association and endorsed by National Insulation Contractors Association.

H. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

I. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings per Section 22 0500. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for equipment scheduled.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - Armacell. Type C Only
PART 4 - Certainteed Manson. Type A, B
PART 5 - Johns Manville/Schuller. Type A, B, C
PART 6 - Owens/Corning Fiberglas Corporation. Type A, B PART 7 - Rubatex. Type C Only

7.1 INSULATION
A. Type A: Glass Fiber Blanket; ANSI/ASTM C612; 0.40 maximum 'K' value at 300°°F; 3.0 lb./cu ft.; suitable to 850°°F, 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed.

7.2 INSULATION FINISHES
A. Type 2: All Service Jacket; ASTM C921; Factory or Field Applied; all-purpose polymer or polypropylene service jacket; Beach puncture resistance ratio of at least 50 units. Tensile strength: 35 psi minimum. Seal all joints with manufacturer approved tape and adhesive to maintain vapor barrier. Indoor use only, if used outdoors add type 4 finish.

B. Type 3: Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation; After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of latex enamel paint approved by insulation manufacturer for outdoor use.

C. Type 4: Aluminum Jacket; ASTM B209; 0.016" thick stucco embossed finish; install with 3/4" aluminum bands 12" on center.

PART 8 - EXECUTION

8.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install all materials per manufacturer's instructions, codes and industry standards.

B. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesive and insulation.

C. Do not insulate factory insulated equipment.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION SECTION 22 0716-3
D. Apply insulation as close as possible to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Secure to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.

E. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold equipment, use vapor barrier mastic.

F. Do not insulate over nameplates or ASME stamps. Bevel and seal insulation around such, unless omitting insulation would cause condensation problem. When such is the case, appropriate tagging shall be provided to identify the presence of these items.

G. When equipment with insulation requires periodic opening for maintenance, repair, or cleaning; install specially fabricated removable insulation sections. Covers shall have mechanical fasteners and be reusable.

H. Install 26 gauge galvanized sheet metal corner protection angles where insulation extends to the floor. Minimum 2" coverage of insulation.

I. Insulate all equipment surfaces that are not factory insulated and are intended to operate below 60°F and/or above 100°F. Verify insulation type and thickness with equipment manufacturer and Architect/Engineer.

J. Insulate all supports on equipment operating below ambient temperature.

8.2 INSULATION
A. Type A and B:

1. Apply with edges tightly butted and joints staggered.

2. Secure with welded pins and washers, 4" from each edge and 16" on center, or 1/2" x

0.015" galvanized steel bands, 12" on center.

8.3 SCHEDULE
A. Domestic Hot Water Storage Tank (up to 250°°F): 2" thick Type B; Finish 1 or 2.

END OF SECTION 22 0716
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION SECTION 22 0716-4
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION SECTION 22 0719-1
SECTION 22 0719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Piping Insulation.

B. Insulation Jackets.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in piping insulation application with five years minimum experience.

B. Materials: Listed and labeled for flame spread/smoke developed rating of no more than 25/50 when tested per ASTM E84 or UL 723 as required by code. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

C. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

D. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with the low emitting material limits of the following standards:

1. CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions VOC from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers Version 1.1.

2. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applicat ions.

All adhesives and sealants wet-applied on site shall comply with the applicable chemical content requirements of SCAQMD Rule 1168.

3. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule SCAQMD 1113 - Wet Applied Paints and Coatings. All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet the applicable VOC limits of SCAQMD Rule 1113.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 (latest published edition) - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

B. ANSI/ASTM C533 - Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.

C. ANSI/ASTM C534 - Elastomeric Foam Insulation.

D. ASTM C591 - Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Insulation.

F. ASTM C1729 - Standard Specification for Aluminum Jacketing for Insulation.

G. ASTM C1767 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Jacketing for Insulation.

H. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

I. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

J. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

K. National Commercial & Industrial Insulation Standards - 1999 Edition - as published by Midwest Insulation Contractors Association and endorsed by National Insulation Contractors Association.

L. California Title 24 - Building Energy Efficiency Standards.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings per Section 22 0500. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION
A. Type A: Glass fiber; ANSI/ASTM C547; 0.24 maximum 'K' value at 75°F; non-combustible. All- purpose polymer or polypropylene service jacket, listed and labeled at no more than 25/50 when tested per ASTM E84 or UL 723 as required by code.

B. Type B: Flexible elastomeric foam insulation; closed-cell, sponge or expanded rubber (polyethylene type is not permitted); ANSI/ASTM C534 Grade 1 Type I for tubular materials; flexible plastic; 0.25 maximum 'K' value at 75°F, listed and labeled at no more than 25/50 when tested per ASTM E84 or UL 723 as required
by code. Maximum 1" thick per layer where multiple layers are specified.

2.2 VAPOR BARRIER JACKETS
A. All-purpose polymer or polypropylene service jacket vapor barrier with self-sealing adhesive joints.

Beach puncture resistance ratio of at least 50 units. Tensile strength: 35 psi minimum. Single, self-seal acrylic adhesive on longitudinal jacket laps and butt strips.

2.3 JACKET COVERINGS
A. Aluminum Jackets: ASTM C1729; 0.016" thick (thicker where required by ASTM C1729); stucco embossed finish with Z edge seams and aluminum bands for outdoor use. Where colored jacket covers are called for, provide factory-applied hard film acrylic paint in color selected by Architect.

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Install insulation after piping has been tested. Pipe shall be clean, dry and free of rust before applying insulation.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General Installation Requirements:

1. Install materials per manufacturer's instructions, building codes and industry standards.

2. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations. This applies to all insulated piping.

Maintain fire rating of all penetrations.

B. Insulated Piping Operating Below 60°F:

1. On piping operating below 60°F in locations that are not mechanically cooled (e.g., penthouses, mechanical rooms, tunnels, chases at exterior walls, etc.), Type B insulation shall be used.

2. All balance valves with fluid operating below 60°°F shall be insulated with a removable plug wrapped with vapor barrier tape to allow reading and adjusting of the valve.

C. Insulated Piping Operating Between 60°F and 140°F:

1. Do not insulate flanges and unions, but bevel and seal ends of insulation at such locations.

Insulate all fittings, valves and strainers.

D. Exposed Piping:

1. Locate and cover seams in least visible locations.

2. Where exposed insulated piping extends above the floor, provide a sheet metal guard around the insulation extending 12" above the floor. Guard shall be 0.016" cylindrical smooth or stucco aluminum and shall fit tightly to the insulation.

3. On exposed piping serving kitchen equipment or plumbing fixtures, the piping shall be insulated unless local
code allows it to be uninsulated. In no instance should the uninsulated portion of the piping be more than 4ft in developed length.

3.3 SUPPORT PROTECTION
A. Provide a shield on all insulated piping at each support between the insulation jacket and the support.

B. On all insulated piping greater than 1-1/2", provide shield with insulation insert of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation at each support, between the pipe and insulation jacket, to prevent insulation from sagging and crushing. Inserts shall be as follows:

1. The insert shall be suitable for planned temperatures, be suitable for use with specific pipe material, and shall be a minimum 180° cylindrical segment the same length as metal shields.

Inserts shall be:
a. Molded hydrous calcium silicate (only use for pipes with operating temperatures above 90°F, with a minimum compressive strength of 100 psi is acceptable for pipe sizes 14" and below. For pipe sizes larger than 14", provide rolled steel plate in addition to the shield.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION SECTION 22 0719-4
b. As an alternative to separate pipe insulation insert and saddle, properly sized manufactured integral rigid insulation insert and shield assemblies may be used. 1) Products:
a) Buckaroo CoolDry
b) Cooper/B-Line Fig. B3380 through B3384
c) Pipe Shields A1000, A2000
c. Insulation Couplings:
1) Molded thermoplastic slip coupling, -65°F to 275°F, sizes up to 4-1/8" OD, and receive insulation thickness up to 1". Suitable for use indoors or outdoors with UV stabilizers. Vertical insulation riser clamps shall have a 1,000lb vertical load rating. On cold pipes operating below 60°F, cover joint and coupling with vapor barrier mastic to ensure continuous vapor barrier.
2) PET thermoplastic foam load bearing core with elastomeric foam ends and lap- seal jacket.
3) Horizontal Strut Mounted Insulated Pipe Manufacturers:
a) Klo-Shure or equal
b) Armafix Ecolight
4) Vertical:
a) Manufacturers: Klo-Shure Titan or equal
d. Rectangular blocks, plugs, or wood material are not acceptable. e. Temporary wood blocking may be used by the Piping Contractor for proper height; however, these must be removed and replaced with proper inserts by the Insulation Contractor. Refer to Supports and Anchors specification section for additional information.

C. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.

D. Install metal shields between all hangers or supports and the pipe insulation. Shields shall be galvanized sheet metal, half-round with flared edges. Adhere shields to insulation. On cold piping, seal the shields vapor-tight
to the insulation as required to maintain the vapor barrier, or add separate vapor barrier jacket.

E. Shields shall be at least the following lengths and gauges:

Pipe Size Shield Size
1/2" to 3-1/2" 12" long x 18 gauge
4" 12" long x 16 gauge
5” to 6" 18" long x 16 gauge
8” to 14" 24" long x 14 gauge
16” to 24" 24" long x 12 gauge
F. Elastomeric foam insulation shields/saddle; molded thermoplastic rigid pipe saddle sized for insulation outside diameter. Length as indicated above.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION SECTION 22 0719-5
G. Ferrous hot piping 4 inches and larger, provide steel saddle at rollers as described in Section 22 0529 "Plumbing Supports and Anchors".

H. Minimum 1/4" rolled galvanized steel plates shall be provided in addition to the sleeves as reinforcement on large pipes to reduce point loading on roller, trapeze hanger and strut support locations depending on insulation compressive strength. Refer to section above for exact locations.

3.4 INSULATION
A. Type A Insulation:

1. All Service Jackets: Seal all longitudinal joints with self-seal laps using a single pressure sensitive adhesive system. Do not staple.

2. Insulation without self-seal lap may be used if installed with Benjamin Foster 85-20 or equivalent Chicago Mastic, 3M or Childers lap adhesive.

3. Apply insulation with laps on top of pipe.

4. Fittings, Valve Bodies and Flanges: For 4" and smaller pipes, insulate with 1 lb. density insulation wrapped under compression to a thickness equal to the adjacent pipe insulation. For pipes over 4", use mitered segments of pipe insulation. Finish with preformed plastic fitting covers. Secure fitting covers with pressure sensitive tape at each end. Overlap tape at least 2" on itself. For pipes operating below 60°°F seal fitting covers with vapor retarder mastic in addition to tape.

B. Type B Insulation:

1. Install per manufacturer's instructions or ASTM C1710.

2. Elastomeric Cellul
ar Foam: Where possible, slip insulation over the open end of pipe without slitting. Seal all butt ends, longitudinal seams, and fittings with adhesive. At elbows and tees, use mitered connections. Do not compress or crush insulation at cemented joints. Joints shall be sealed completely and not pucker or wrinkle. Exterior installations shall contain factory applied polymeric, moisture, and UV resistant covering with ends sealed with adhesive and similar cover; or Contractor shall paint the outside of outdoor insulation with two coats of latex enamel paint recommended by the manufacturer.

3. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
a. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. b. Insulation must be installed in compression to allow for expansion and contraction.

Insulation shall be pushed onto the pipe, never pulled. Stretching of insulation may result in open seams and joints.

4. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
a. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.
b. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.
c. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulati
on.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION SECTION 22 0719-6

3.5 JACKET COVER INSTALLATION
A. Metal Covering:

1. Provide vapor barrier as specified for insulation type. Cover with aluminum jacket covering with seams located on the bottom of horizontal piping. Include fittings, joints and valves.

2. Seal all interior and exterior butt joints with metal draw bands and sealant. Seal all exterior joints watertight.

3. Interior joints do not need to be sealed.

4. Use metal covering on the following pipes:
a. All exposed piping in finished spaces unless noted otherwise on the drawings. b. All exposed piping in mechanical or equipment rooms below 8'-0" above floor. c. All exposed piping in mechanical rooms that is subject to damage from normal operations. (Example: Piping that must be stepped over routinely.) d. All exposed piping in tunnels designated as passageways, equipment access, or egress.

B. Plastic Covering:

1. Provide vapor barrier as specified for insulation type. Cover with plastic jacket covering.

Position seams to shed water.

2. Use plastic insulation covering on all exposed pipes including, but not limited to:
a. All exposed piping in mechanical or equipment rooms below 8'-0" above floor. b. All exposed piping in mechanical rooms that is subject to damage from normal operations. (Example: Piping that must be stepped over routinely.) c. All exposed piping in tunnels designated as passageways, equipment access, or egress.

3.6 SCHEDULE
A. Refer to drawings for insulati
on schedule.

END OF SECTION 22 0719
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SECTION 22 0800-1
SECTION 22 0800 - COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Description
B. Responsibilities
C. Related Work
D. Test Equipment

1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. The purpose of this section is to specify Division 22 responsibilities in the commissioning process.

B. The systems to be commissioned are listed in the Commissioning Plan (Cx Plan). Refer to Section 01 9100.

C. Commissioning requires the participation of the Division 22 Contractor to ensure that all systems are operating in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents. The general commissioning requirements and coordination are detailed in Section 01 9100. Division 22 Contractor shall be familiar with all parts of Section 01 9100 and the commissioning plan issued by the CxA, and shall execute all commissioning responsibilities assigned to them in the Contract Documents.

1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Refer to the Cx Plan in the appendix of Section 01 9100.

1.4 RELATED WORK
A. Specific commissioning requirements are given in the following sections of these specifications. All the following sections apply to the Work of this section.

1. Section 01 7823 - Operations and Maintenance

2. Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training

3. Section 01 9100 - Commissioning

4. Section 21 0800 - Commissioning of Fire Suppression

5. Section 23 0800 - Commissioning of HVAC

6. Section 26 0800 - Commissioning of Electrical
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SECTION 22 0800-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall provide all test equipment necessary to fulfill the testing requirements of this Division. This equipment includes, but is not limited to, the following:

1. Handheld temperature and relative humidity meter.

2. Infrared thermometer gun.

3. Analog differential pressure gauge and associated tubing.

4. Portable computer with access to the building automation system.

B. All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified in the related specifications. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply:

1. Temperature sensors and digital thermometers shall have a certified calibration within the past year to an accuracy of 0.5°F and a resolution of +/- 0.1°F.

2. Pressure sensors shall have an accuracy of +/- 2.0% of the value range being measured (not full range of meter) and have been calibrated within the last year.

3. All equipment shall be calibrated according to the manufacturer's recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged. Calibration tags shall be affixed or certificates readily available.

C. Refer to Section 01 9100 for additional Division 22 requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Refer to the Cx Plan in the appendix of Section 01 9100.

END OF SECTION 22 0800
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 1000-1
SECTION 22 1000 - PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pipe and Pipe Fittings.

B. Valves.

C. Check Valves.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. Remanufactured valves are not acceptable.

B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and applicable state labor regulations.

C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ANSI/ASME Sec 9 or ANSI/AWS D1.1.

D. Piping, Fittings, Valves, and Flux for Potable Water Systems: All components shall be lead free per Federal Act S.3874, Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act.

E. Pipe hangers and supports shall be spaced per 2019 CPC, Table 313.3, as applied to each pipe system listed.

Refer to Section 22 0529 for hanger and support components. Seismic supports shall be submitted as a deferred approval using OPM guidelines. Shop drawings shall be submitted for review to the AHJ: State, local or agency reviewing the project, DSA, HCAI. Upon approval, these shop drawings shall be included in the record set.

F. Potable water piping and fittings shall comply with California Assembly Bill AB1953 limiting lead content.

Also described in 2019 CPC: 604.2 Lead Content.

G. Valves for potable water systems shall comply with California Assembly Bill AB1953 limiting lead content.

Also described in 2019 CPC: 604.2 Lead Content.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder-Joint Pressure Fitti ngs.

B. ANSI/ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV.

C. ANSI/ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV.

D. ANSI/ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 NS 300.

E. ANSI/ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.

F. ANSI/ASME B16.9 - Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt Welding Fittings.

G. ANSI/ASME Sec 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 1000-2
H. ANSI/ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.

I. ANSI/ASTM C443 - Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets.

J. ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.

K. ANSI/AWWA C110 - Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings 3" through 48", for Water and Other Liquids.

L. ANSI/AWWA C111 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.

M. ANSI/AWWA C151 - Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids.

N. ANSI/AWWA C153 - Compact Ductile Iron Fittings 3" through 48", for Water and Other Liquids.

O. ASSE 1003 - Water Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic Water Supply Systems.

P. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.

Q. ASTM A74 - Hub and Spigot Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

R. ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures.

S. ASTM A312 - Standard for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes.

T. ASTM A554 - Standard for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing.

U. ASTM A674 - Standard Practice for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe for Water or Other Liquids.

V. ASTM A888 - Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

W. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.

X. ASTM B306 - Copper Drainage
Tube (DWV).

Y. ASTM C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

Z. ASTM C1540 - Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

AA. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.

BB. ASTM D1785 - Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120.

CC. ASTM D2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications.

DD. ASTM D2661 - ABS DWV Pipe & Fittings.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 1000-3
EE. ASTM D2665 - PVC DWV Pipe & Fittings.

FF. ASTM D2846 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems
GG. ASTM D3033 - Type PSP (Polyvinylchloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

HH. ASTM D3034 - Type PSM (Polyvinylchloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

II. ASTM F402 - Standard Practice for Safe Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners Used for Joining Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings.

JJ. ASTM F437 - Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.

KK. ASTM F439 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.

LL. ASTM F477 - Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipes.

MM. ASTM F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.

NN. ASTM F656 - Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings
OO. ASTM F876 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing.

PP. ASTM F1960 - Standard Specification for Cold Expansion Fittings with PEX Reinforcing Rings for Use with Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing.

QQ. AWS A5.8 - Brazed Filler Metal.

RR. CISPI 301 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems.

SS. CISPI 310 - Joints for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems.

TT.

FM 1680 - Couplings Used in Hubless Cast Iron Systems.

UU. NFPA 24 - Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances.

VV. NSF - National Sanitation Foundation
WW. CCR - California Code of Regulation
XX. CBC - California Building Code
YY. CPC - California Plumbing Code

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings per Section 22 0500.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 1000-4

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place.

1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Reference Coordination Drawings article in Section 22 0500 for required plumbing systems electronic CAD drawings to be provided to Coordinating Contractor for inclusion into composite coordination drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CAST IRON PIPE
A. Cast Iron; Standard Weight; Hub and Spigot Joints:

2.2 COPPER PIPE
A. Copper Pipe; Type L; Solder Joints:

1. Pipe: Type L hard drawn seamless copper tube, ASTM B88.

2. Design Pressure: 175 psi; Maximum Design Temperature: 200°°F.

3. Joints: Solder with 100% lead-free solder and flux, ASTM B32.

4. Fittings: Wrought copper solder joint, ANSI B16.22.

B. Copper Pipe; Type L; Mechanical Press Connection:

1. Pipe: Type L hard drawn seamless copper tube, ASTM B88.

2. Design Pressure: 175 psi; Maximum Design Temperature: 200°°F.

3. Joints: Mechanical press connection.

4. Fittings: Copper, ANSI B-16.22, with embedded EPDM O-ring / sealing element engineered for this application, NSF-61.

5. Fitting Identification: Press ends shall provide the ability to identify an unpressed fitting from the floor prior to testing. The function of this feature is to provide the installer quick and easy identification of connections that have not been pressed prior to putting the system into operation.

6. Special Requirements: Mechanical press fitting manufacturer shall provide Contractor training prior to install
ation.

7. Manufacturers:
a. Viega ProPress
b. Apollo Press, a division of Aalberts - IPS
c. Nibco Press System Fittings and Valves
d. Merit Brass
e. Mueller Streamline PRS
C. Copper Pipe; Type L; Mechanically Coupled Grooved Joints:

1. Pipe: Type L hard drawn seamless copper tube, ASTM B88, roll grooved per AWWA-C606 standard and mechanical coupling manufacturers specifications.

2. Design Pressure: 300 psi; Maximum Design Temperature: 180°°F.

3. Joints: Mechanically coupled grooved type.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 1000-5

4. Mechanical Couplings: Ductile iron, ASTM A-536, (Grade 65-45-12), rigid grooved type cast with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads, coated with non-toxic, no-lead paint, ASTM A449 compliant bolts and hex nuts zinc electroplated plated, ASTM B-633. Installation ready, for direct stab installation without field disassembly. Design Basis: Victaulic Style 607.Gaskets: Molded pressure responsive design, center-leg gasket with pipe stop to ensure proper groove engagement, alignment, and pipe insertion depth. Fluoroelastomer Grade P or EPDM Grade E, ASTM D-2000, suitable for domestic water with temperatures ranging from 32°F to 180°F.

5. Fittings: Copper, ASTM B-75 and ANSI B-16.22, full flow wrought copper or cast bronze ANSI B16.18, manufactured by mechanical coupling manufacturer to copper tube dimensions. (Flaring of tube or fitting ends to accommodate alternate sized couplings is not permitted).

6. Flanges: Grooved end type, Ductile iron, ASTM A-536, (Grade 65-45-12), Flange shall conform to ANSI Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel flange bolt hole pattern, coated with non-toxic, no-lead paint, bolts and hex nuts zinc electroplated plated, ASTM B-633. a. Flange adapters to be used for connecting grooved piping to equipment flanges only. Grooved flange adapters shall not be used to connect lug style valves to grooved piping. Design Basis:

Victaulic Style 641.

7. System shall be UL classifie
d in accordance with NSF-61 for potable water service, and meet the lead content requirements of NSF-372.

8. Manufacturers:
a. Gruvlok
b. Victaulic
c. Grinnell
D. Copper Pipe; Type K; Solder Joints:

1. Pipe: Type K annealed copper tube, ASTM B88.

2. Design Pressure: 150 psi. Maximum Design Temperature: 200°F.

3. Joints: Solder with 100% lead-free solder and flux ASTM B32][BCuP silver braze, AWS A5.8.

4. Fittings: Wrought copper solder joint, ANSI B16.22.

E. Copper Pipe; Type K; Mechanical Press Connection:

1. Pipe: Type K annealed copper tube, ASTM B88.

2. Design Pressure: 150 psi. Maximum Design Temperature: 200°F.

3. Joints: Mechanical press connection.

4. Fittings: Copper, ANSI B-16.22, with embedded EPDM O-ring, NSF-61 / sealing element engineered for this application.

6. Special Requirements: Mechanical press fitting manufacturer shall provide contractor training prior to installation.

7. Manufacturers:
a. Viega ProPress
b. Apollo Press, a division of Aalberts - IPS
c. Nibco Press System Fittings and Valves
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 1000-6
d. Merit Brass
e. Mueller Streamline PRS.

2.3 VALVES
A. Shutoff Valves:

1. For pipe systems where mechanical press connections are allowed, shutoff valves with mechanical press connections are acceptable subject to the requirements in the paragraphs below.

2. Ball Valves:
a. BA-1: 3" and under, 150 psi saturated steam, 600 psi CWP, full port, threaded or solder ends (acceptable only if rated for soldering in line with 470°F melting point of lead-free solder), stainless steel ball and trim, Teflon seats and seals.
1) Body: Lead free NSF-372, bronze of a copper alloy containing less than 15% zinc.

Apollo Valves; a division of AalbertsœœIPS #77CLF140/240 Series, Milwaukee #UPBA450S, Watts #LFB6080G2-SS, Nibco #T-585-70-66 (lead free option), Jomar T-200CSSG.

B. Throttling Valves

1. Globe Valves:
a. GL-1: 2" and under, 150 psi saturated steam, 300 psi CWP, screwed, bronze, lead free NSF- 372. Milwaukee #UP502, Hammond #UP440.

2. Plug Valves:
a. PL-1: 2" and under, 125 psi steam @ 450°F, 175 psi CWP @ 180°F, cast iron body, screwed, full port. Walworth #1700, DeZurik #425, S-RS49.
b. PL-2: 2-1/2" thru 4", 125 psi steam @ 450°F, 175 psi CWP @ 180°F, flanged, cast iron body, full port. Walworth #1700F, DeZurik #425, F-RS49.
c. PL-3: 6" and larger, 125 psi steam @ 450°F, 175 psi CWP, cast iron body, flanged, resilie nt
faced plug, gear and handwheel operator, full port. Walworth #1700F, DeZurik #118, F-RS24. d. PL-13: 2" and under, 175 psi CWP, 250°F elastomer, screwed, bronze body, resilient plug facing (RS-55), adjustable memory stop, non-removable lever handle. DeZurik #120-S. e. PL-15: 2-1/2" thru 8", 150 psi CWP, 250°F elastomer, flanged, bronze body, resilient plug facing (RS-55 or RS-56), adjustable memory stop. DeZurik #120-F.

2.4 STRAINERS
A. For pipe systems where mechanical press connections are allowed, strainers with mechanical press connections are acceptable subject to the requirements in the paragraphs below.

B. ST-1: Threaded Ends, 4" and under, lead free bronze or 304 stainless steel body, threaded connections, threaded removable cover, 0.045 304 stainless steel perforated screen, 125 psi S @ 350°F, 200 psi CWP @ 150°F. Apollo Valves, a division of Aalberts-IPS YB-LF (59LF), Metraflex SSFT, Mueller / Watts LF351, Watts LF777, Jomar T-651G, Zurn SXL.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 1000-7

2.5 CHECK VALVES
A. For pipe systems where mechanical press connections are allowed, check valves with mechanical press connections are acceptable subject to the requirements in the paragraphs below.

2.6 VALVE BOX/CURB BOX
A. VB-1: 2" and under, extension type curb box with arch pattern base and sufficient length to allow top to terminate flush with finished grade. Cast iron lid with integrally cast brass bushing and marked "water" in integrally cast raised letters. Furnished with valve operating wrench of sufficient length to extend 3' above finished grade when engaged with valve. Construction of curb box shall meet all local codes and requirements. Mueller H-10000 Series, A.Y. McDonald 5600 Series, Tyler Pipe 6500 Series.

B. VB-2: 2" and under, extension type curb box with Minneapolis pattern base and sufficient length to allow top to terminate flush with finished grade. Cast iron lid with integrally cast brass bushing and marked "water" in integrally cast raised letters. Furnished with valve operating wrench of sufficient length to extend 3' above finished grade when engaged with valve. Construction of curb box shall meet all local codes and requirements. Mueller H-10000 Series, A.Y. McDonald 5600 Series.

2.7 VALVE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide all connections to match pipe joints. Valves shall be same size as pipe unless noted otherwise.

2.8 CONNECTIONS BETWE

EN DISSIMILAR METALS
A. Connections between dissimilar metals shall be insulating dielectric types that provide a water gap between the connected metals, and that either allow no metal path for electron transfer or that provide a wide water gap lined with a non-conductive material to impede electron transfer through the water path.

B. Joints shall be rated for the temperature, pressure, and other characteristics of the service in which they are used, including testing procedure.

C. Aluminum, iron, steel, brass, copper, bronze, galvanized steel and stainless steel are commonly used and require isolation from each other with the following exceptions:

1. Iron and steel connected to each other.

2. Brass, copper, and bronze connected to each other.

3. Brass or bronze valves and specialties connected in closed systems with steel, iron, or stainless steel on both sides of the brass or bronze valves and specialties. Where two or more brass or bronze items occur together, they shall be connected with brass nipples. Brass or bronze valves and specialties cannot be used as a dielectric separation between pipe materials.

D. Dielectric protection is required at connections to equipment of a material different than the piping.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 1000-8
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Install all products per manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

C. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

D. Remove all scale, rust, dirt, oils, stickers and thoroughly clean exterior of all bare metal exposed piping, hangers, and accessories in preparation to be painted.

E. Connect to equipment with flanges or unions. Unions or flanges for servicing and disconnect are not required in installations using grooved joint couplings.

F. Use only piping materials rated for the maximum temperature of the application, e.g., do not use PVC for dishwasher drainage or piping that receives boiler blowdown.

G. Roof Penetration (Vent) Flashing:

1. Built-up Roofing: Flash vents with 3# seamless sheet lead of sufficient size to extend 15" into roofing felts for built-up roofs.

H. Existing building sewers or building drains which are shown on the documents to be reused shall be inspected and recorded by closed circuit television for their condition. Report findings back to the Architect, Engineer, and Owner before proceeding with work so any necessary rework can take place if needed.

3.2 SYSTEM, PIPING AND VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Cold Water, Hot Water, Tempered Water - Potable and Non-Potable (Above Ground):

1. Copper Pipe; Type L; Solder Joints: All Sizes

2. Copper Pipe; Type L; Mechanic
al Press Connection: 4" and Under

3. Copper Pipe; Type L; Mechanically Coupled Grooved Joints: 2-1/2" to 8"

4. Stainless Steel; Schedule 5; Type 304; Mechanical Press Connection: 4" and Under

5. Stainless Steel; 304; Grooved Joints: 2" through 12"

6. Galvanized Steel; Standard Weight; Mechanically Coupled Grooved Joints: 6" and Over

7. Galvanized Steel; Standard Weight; Threaded Joints: 6" and Over

8. Cross-Linked Polyethylene (PEX); Cold Expansion Joints : 3" and Under

9. Virgin Rigid Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC); SDR-11; Solvent Weld Joints: 2" and Under

10. Virgin Rigid Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) ;Schedule 80; Solvent Weld Joints: 2-1/2" to 8"

11. Shutoff Valves: BF-1

12. Throttling Valves:GL-1

13. Check Valves: CK-1

14. Strainers: ST-1
B. Cold Water, Hot Water, Tempered Water - Potable and Non-Potable (Underground):

1. Copper Pipe; Type K; Solder Joints: All Sizes

2. Copper Pipe; Type K; Mechanical Press Connection: 4" and Under

3. Cross-Linked Polyethylene (PEX); Cold Expansion Joint: 3" and Under IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 1000-9
C. Sanitary Waste and Vent, Gravity (Above Ground):

1. Cast Iron; Standard Weight; Hub and Spigot Joints: All Sizes

2. Cast Iron; Standard Weight; No-Hub Sleeve Gaskets: 1-1/2" to 15"

3. Copper Pipe: Type DWV; Solder Joints: 1-1/4" to 4"

4. PVC-DWV or ABS-DWV; Schedule 40; Solvent Weld Joints: All Sizes

5. Galvanized Steel; Standard Weight; Threaded Joints: 4" and under

6. Stainless Steel; Type 304; Hub and Spigot Joint: All Sizes D. Sanitary Indirect Drainage (Above Ground):

1. Cast Iron; Standard Weight; Hub and Spigot Joints: All Sizes

2. Cast Iron; Standard Weight; No-Hub Sleeve Gaskets: 1-1/2" to 15"

3. Copper Pipe: Type DWV; Solder Joints: 1-1/4" to 4"

4. Galvanized Steel; Standard Weight; Threaded Joints: 4" and under

5. Stainless Steel; Type 304; Hub and Spigot Joint: All Sizes E. Sanitary Waste and Vent, Gravity (Underground - Inside Building):

1. Cast Iron; Standard Weight; Hub and Spigot Joints: All Sizes

2. Cast Iron; Standard Weight; No-Hub Sleeve Gaskets: 1-1/2" to 15"

3. PVC-DWV or ABS-DWV; Schedule 40; Solvent Weld Joints: All Sizes F. Sanitary Waste and Vent, Gravity (Underground - Outside Building):

1. Cast Iron; Standard Weight; Hub and Spigot Joints: All Sizes

2. Cast Iron; Standard Weight; No-Hub Sleeve Gaskets: 1-1/2" to 15"

3. Concrete; Reinforced Class III; Tongue and Groove Pipe: 12" and over

4. Concrete; Reinforced Class III; Modified Bell and Spigot or Tongue and Groove Pipe - Flat Gasket:
12" to 18"

5. Concrete; Reinforced Class III; Tongue and Groove Pipe - Mastic with Geotextile Wrap: 21" and over

6. Ductile Iron Pipe; Pressure Water Pipe; Push-On Joints - Pressure Pipe: 4" and larger

7. PVC Pressure Pipe; Schedule 40/SDR26; Push-On Joints - Pressure Pipe: All sizes G. Sanitary Waste - Pumped (Underground - Outside Building)

1. Ductile Iron Pipe; Pressure Water Pipe; Push-On Joints - Pressure Pipe: All Sizes

2. Ductile Iron Pipe; Pressure Water Pipe; Mechanical Joints: All Sizes

3. PVC-DWV or ABS-DWV; Schedule 40; Solvent Weld Joints: All Sizes H. Sanitary Waste - Pumped (Underground - Inside Building):

1. Copper Pipe; Type K; Solder Joints: All Sizes

2. Copper Pipe; Type K; Mechanical Press Connection: 4" and under

3. PVC-DWV or ABS-DWV; Schedule 40; Solvent Weld Joints: All Sizes I. Sanitary Waste - Pumped (Above Ground - Inside Building):

1. Copper Pipe; Type K; Solder Joints: All Sizes

2. Copper Pipe; Type K; Mechanical Press Connection: All Sizes

3. Galvanized Steel; Standard Weight; Threaded Joints: 4" and under

4. PVC-DWV or ABS-DWV; Schedule 40; Solvent Weld Joints: All Sizes

5. Shutoff Valves: BA-1
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 1000-10

6. Check Valves: CK-1
J. Condensate/Equipment Drainage:

1. Cast Iron; Standard Weight; Hub and Spigot Joints: All Sizes

2. Cast Iron; Standard Weight; No-Hub Sleeve Gaskets: 1-1/2" to 15"

3. Copper Pipe: Type DWV; Solder Joints: 1-1/4" to 4"

3.3 TESTING PIPING
A. Sanitary Drainage, Sanitary Vent, Storm Drainage:

1. Test all piping with water to prove tight.

2. Test piping before insulation is applied.

3. Hydrostatically test all soil, waste, and vent piping inside of building with 10 feet head of water for 15 minutes. Inspect before fixtures are connected. If leaks appear, repair them and repeat the test.

4. Hydrostatically test interior downspouts with 10 feet head of water for 15 minutes with no leaks.

5. A smoke/air test at the same pressure may be used in lieu of the hydrostatic water test. Exception:

Smoke/air test shall not be performed on plastic piping.

6. Test force mains with water at 105% of the operating pump discharge pressure for 15 minutes.

7. Test pressures stated above shall be as listed or as required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction, whichever is most stringent.

8. Test piping per CPC requirements.

B. Hot Water - Potable and Non-Potable, Cold Water - Potable and Non-Potable, Tempered Water - Potable and Non-Potable, Service Water:

1. Test pipes underground or in chases and walls before piping is concealed.

2. Test all
pipes before the insulation is applied. If insulation is applied before the pipe is tested and a leak develops which ruins the insulation, replace damaged insulation.

3. Test the pipe with 100 psig water pressure or equal inert gas such as nitrogen. Exception: Inert gas test shall not be used to test plastic piping.

4. Hold test pressure for at least 2 hours.

5. Test to be witnessed by the Architect/Engineer's representative, if requested by the Architect/Engineer.

C. Fire Service:

1. Hydrostatically test the entire system for two hours at 200 psig. Maximum leakage shall be:
a. Interior Piping: 0 quarts per hour.
b. Underground Piping: 2 quarts per 100 joints per hour.

D. All Other Piping:

1. Test piping at 150% of normal operating pressure.

2. Piping shall hold this pressure for one hour with no drop in pressure.

3. Test piping using water, nitrogen, or air as compatible with the final service of the pipe. Do not use combustible fluids.

4. Drain and clean all piping after testing is complete.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 1000-11

3.4 CLEANING PIPING
A. Assembly:

1. Before assembling pipe systems, remove all loose dirt, scale, oil and other foreign matter on internal or external surfaces by means consistent with good piping practice subject to approval of the Architect/Engineer's representative. Blow chips and burrs from machinery or thread cutting operation out of pipe before assembly. Wipe cutting oil from internal and external surfaces.

2. During fabrication and assembly, remove slag and weld spatter from both internal and external joints by peening, chipping and wire brushing.

3. Notify the Architect/Engineer's representative before starting any post erection cleaning in sufficient time to allow witnessing the operation. Consult with and obtain approval from the Architect/Engineer's representative regarding specific procedures and scheduling. Dispose of cleaning and flushing fluids properly.

4. Prior to blowing or flushing erected piping systems, disconnect all instrumentation and equipment, open wide all valves, and be certain all strainer screens are in place.

B. Air Blow:

1. Blow out pipe and components with clean compressed air. Instrument air, argon, nitrogen and sulfuric acid lines shall be blown out with dry, oil free air or nitrogen gas. "Oil Free" is defined as air compressed in a centrifugal, Teflon ring, carbon ring or water pumped air compressor. Where air supply is judged to be inadequate to continually attain cleaning velocity, alternate pressurization and sudden relie
f procedure may be used until discharge at all blow out points is clean. Use 80-90 psig pressure unless otherwise indicated.

2. Air blow applies to the following systems:
a. Acetylene
b. Carbon Dioxide
c. Nitrogen (use oil free air or nitrogen gas)
d. Argon (use oil free air or nitrogen gas)
e. Instrument Air (use oil free air or nitrogen gas)
f. Distilled Water (use maximum of 50 psig pressure)
g. Chemical Feed
h. Air Compressor Intakes
i. Sulfuric Acid (use oil free air or nitrogen gas)
C. All Water Piping:

1. Flush all piping using faucets, flush valves, etc. until the flow is clean.

2. After flushing, thoroughly clean all inlet strainers, aerators, and other such devices.

3. If necessary, remove valves to clean out all foreign material.

D. Fire Service:

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 1000-12

3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General Installation Requirements:

1. Provide dielectric connections between dissimilar metals.

2. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Install to conserve building space.

3. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

4. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or equipment.

5. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points.

6. Install bell and spigot piping with bells upstream.

7. Where pipe supports are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds.

8. Seal pipes passing through exterior walls with a wall seal per Section 22 0529. Provide Schedule 40 galvanized sleeve at least 2 pipe sizes larger than the pipe.

9. All non-potable outlets shall be clearly marked with a permanently affixed laminated sign with 3/8" high lettering saying "Non-Potable Water Not for Human Consumption." Sign shall have black lettering on a yellow background.

10. All vertical pipe drops to sinks or other equipment installed below the ceiling shall be routed within a wall cavity, unless specifically noted otherwise to be surface mounted. For renovation projects, this Contractor is responsible for opening and patching existing walls for installation of piping. Wall patching shall match existing condition.

B. Installation Requirements in Electrical Rooms:

1. Do not install
piping or other equipment above electrical switchboards or panelboards. This includes a dedicated space extending 25 feet from the floor to the structural ceiling with width and depth equal to the equipment.

C. Installation Requirements in MRI (Magnetic Resonance Imaging - Healthcare):

1. All piping in MRI rooms shall be non-ferrous regardless of materials described on Part 2.

D. Valves/Fittings and Accessories:

1. Install shutoff valves that permit the isolation of equipment/fixtures in each room without isolating any other room or portion of the building. Individual fixture angle stops do not meet this requirement.

Exception: Back-to-back rooms in no more than two adjacent rooms.

2. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

3. Provide access doors for concealed valves and fittings.

4. Install valve stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

5. Provide one plug valve wrench for every ten plug valves 2" and smaller, minimum of one. Provide each plug valve 2-1/2" and larger with a wrench with set screw.

6. Install corrugated, stainless steel tubing system according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Include striker plates to protect tubing from puncture where tubing is restrained and cannot move.

E. Underground Piping:

1. Install buried water piping outside the building with at least 5 feet of cover. Refer to Section 22 0500 for Excava
tion, Fill, Backfill and Compaction requirements

2. Install buried borosilicate glass pipe with the protective polystyrene covering intact. Lay the pipe on bedding and backfill per manufacturer instructions.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 1000-13

3. Underground fire protection service piping shall have at least 6-1/2 feet of cover, or as recommended by NFPA 24.

4. Install thrust blocking and restraints on all underground fire protection service piping per NFPA 24 and as shown on drawings.

5. Install underground, sleeved, corrugated, stainless steel tubing system according to manufacturer's written instructions. Extend vent from sleeve to exterior of building and terminate with screened elbow.

6. Direct buried, uninsulated steel pipe shall have a factory applied external protective coating consisting of two coats with an intermediate layer of 18 mil fibrous glass mat. Coating thickness shall total not less than 3/32". The outer coating shall be further protected by a wrapping of heavy Kraft paper. This external protection shall extend and be exposed for a minimum of 1 foot beyond the buried or concealed portion of the pipe.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Pipe Line Service Co., Franklin Park, Illinois
2) Lithcote Corp., Melrose Park, Illinois

7. As an option, the Contractor may provide factory applied protective coatings consisting of a polyethylene plastic film bonded to the pipe surface by a hot applied thermo-plastic adhesive. a. Manufacturers:
1) Republic Steel Corp. "X-Tru-Coat"

8. Exercise care in handling, storing and laying pipe to avoid damaging factory applied coatings. If any damage occurs, repair the coati
ng to a condition equal to the original.

9. Field application of protective coatings to joints, fittings and to any damaged factory applied coatings shall be similar to factory applied coatings specified above and shall be done in strict accordance with recommendations of the supplier of pipe coatings.

10. After completion of the fabrication, laying and field coating of the joints and fittings, but prior to backfilling, inspect the entire line in the presence of the Architect/Engineer's representative with an electronic holiday detector. Any defects in the protective coatings shall be repaired in accordance with requirements for original coatings.

11. Coat flange bolts and nuts in pits and below ground at the time of installation with a corrosion protective coating.

F. Sanitary and Storm Piping:

1. Install all sanitary and storm piping inside the building with a slope as shown on the drawings.

2. Install horizontal offset at all connections to roof drains to allow for pipe expansion.

3. Slope sanitary and storm piping outside the building to meet invert elevations shown on drawings and to maintain a minimum velocity of 2 feet per second.

4. Sway Bracing: Where horizontal sanitary and/or storm pipes 4 inches and larger change flow direction greater than 45°, rigid bracing or thrust restraint s shall be installed to resist movement of the
upstream pipe in the direction of pipe flow. The rigid bracing or thrust restraint shall be connected to structure. A change of flow direction from horizontal into a vertical pipe does not require the upstream pipe to be braced.

5. All sanitary and storm piping shall have at least 42" of cover when leaving the building.

6. Starter fittings with internal baffles are not permitted.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 1000-14

3.6 PIPE ERECTION AND LAYING
A. Carefully inspect all pipe, fittings, valves, equipment and accessories before installation. Any items that are unsuitable, cracked or otherwise defective shall be removed from the job immediately.

B. All pipe, fittings, valves, equipment and accessories shall have factory applied markings, stampings, or nameplates with sufficient data to determine their conformance with specified requirements.

C. Exercise care at every stage of storage, handling, laying and erecting to prevent entry of foreign matter into piping, fittings, valves, equipment and accessories. Do not install any item that is not clean.

D. Until system is fully operational, all openings in piping and equipment shall be kept closed except when actual work is being performed on that item or system. Closures shall be plugs, caps, blind flanges or other items specifically designed and intended for this purpose.

E. Run pipes straight and true, parallel to building lines with minimum use of offsets and couplings. Provide only offsets required to provide needed headroom or clearance and to provide needed flexibility in pipe lines.

F. Make changes in direction of pipes only with fittings or pipe bends. Changes in size only with fittings. Do not use miter fittings, face or flush bushings, or street elbows. All fittings shall be of the long radius type, unless otherwise shown on the drawings or specifie
d.

G. Provide flanges or unions at all final connections to equipment, traps and valves.

H. Arrange piping and connections so equipment served may be totally removed without disturbing piping beyond final connections and associated shutoff valves.

I. Use full and double lengths of pipe wherever possible.

J. Unless otherwise indicated, install all piping, including shutoff valves and strainers, to coils, pumps and other equipment at line size with reduction in size being made only at control valve or equipment.

K. Cut all pipe to exact measurement and install without springing or forcing except in the case of expansion loops where cold springing is indicated on the drawings.

L. Underground pipe shall be laid in dry trenches maintained free of accumulated water. Refer to Section 22 0500 for Excavation, Fill, Backfill and Compaction requirements.

M. Unless otherwise indicated, branch take-offs shall be from top of mains or headers at either a 45° or 90° angle from the horizontal plane for air lines, and from top, bottom or side for liquids.

N. Do not use geotextile fabric with footing tile if silt content of soil exceeds 40% or if clay content exceeds 50%. The fabric shall be installed around 1" river rock or 2" limestone.

3.7 DRAINING AND VENTING
A.

Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, all horizontal water lines, including branches, shall pitch 1" in 40 feet to low points for complete drainage, removal of condensate and venting.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 1000-15
B. Maintain accurate grade where pipes pitch or slope for venting and drainage. No pipes shall have pockets due to changes in elevation.

C. Provide drain valves at all low points of water piping systems for complete or sectionalized draining.

D. Use eccentric reducing fittings on horizontal runs when changing size of pipes for proper drainage and venting. Install gravity drain pipes with bottom of pipe and eccentric reducers in a continuous line; all other liquid lines with top of pipe and eccentric reducers in a continuous line.

E. Provide air vents at high points and wherever else required to eliminate air in all water piping systems.

F. Install air vents in accessible locations. If necessary to trap and vent air in a remote location, install an 1/8" pipe from the tapping location to an accessible location and terminate with a venting device.

G. All vent and drain piping shall be of same materials and construction for the service involved.

3.8 PLUMBING VENTS
A. Vent as shown on the drawings and in accordance with all codes having jurisdiction.

B. Extend the high side of the soil and waste stacks at least 12" above roof.

C. Flash pipes at roof with premolded EPDM pipe flashing cones adhered to roof membrane by General Contractor. Secure top of cone with stainle
ss steel clamp and seal watertight.

D. Increase vent pipes through the roof two pipe sizes with long increasers located at least 12" below the roof.

E. In no case shall the vent through the roof be less than 4" in diameter.

F. Vent pipes through the roof shall be located a minimum of 25 feet from any air intake opening on the roof.

3.9 BRANCH CONNECTIONS
A. For domestic water and vent systems only, make branch connections with standard tee or cross fittings of the type required for the service.

B. Reducers are generally not shown. Where pipe sizes change at tee, the tee shall be the size of the largest pipe shown connecting to it.

C. Do not use double wye or double combination wye and eighth bend DWV fittings in horizontal piping.

D. Branch connections from the headers and mains may be mechanically formed using an extraction device.

The branch piping connection shall be brazed connection for the following services only:

1. Domestic water piping above ground.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 1000-16
E. Further limit use of mechanically formed fittings as follows:

1. Must have at least same pressure rating as the main.

2. Main must be Type K or L copper tubing.

3. Permanent marking shall indicate insertion depth and orientation.

4. Branch pipe shall conform to the inner curve of the piping main.

5. Main must be 1" or larger.

6. Branch must be 3/4" or larger.

F. Forged weld-on fittings are limited as follows:

1. Must have at least same pressure rating as the main.

2. Main must be 2-1/2" or larger.

3. Branch line is at least two pipe sizes under main size.

3.10 JOINING OF PIPE
A. Brazed Joints (Copper Pipe):

1. Make up joints with silver alloy brazing filler metal conforming to ASTM B260 "Brazing Filler Metal" BAg-1 or BAg-2. Cut copper tubing so ends are perfectly square and remove all burrs inside and outside. Thoroughly clean sockets of fittings and ends of tubing to remove all oxide, dirt and grease just prior to brazing. Apply non-corrosive flux of the type recommended by filler alloy manufacturer, evenly, but sparingly, over all surfaces to be joined. Heat joints uniformly using oxygen-acetylene torch with tip size recommended by fitting manufacturer. Wipe and brush joint clean after alloy has set.

2. Remove discs from solder end valves during brazing.

B. Mechanically Coupled Grooved Joints (Copper and Stainl ess Steel Pipe):

1. Product Warranty:
a. Standard: One-year product warranty. A factory-trained manufacturer's representative shall visit the site for contractor training and installation observation. 1) On-site Training: Manufacturer's factory trained representative shall provide training of contractor¢¢s field personnel in use of grooving tools and installation of product.

Documentation of installing contractor training with manufacturer¢¢s representative shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer.
2) Job Site Visitation: Manufacturer's representative shall periodically visit job site to ensure manufacturer¢¢s installation practices are being followed.

C. Mechanical Press Connection (Copper and Stainless Steel Pipe):

1. Copper press fitting shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.

2. Fully insert tubing into the fitting and mark tubing.

3. Prior to making connection, the fitting alignment shall be checked against the mark made on the tube to ensure the tubing is fully engaged in the fitting.

4. Joint shall be pressed with a tool approved by the manufacturer.

5. Installers shall be trained by manufacturer personnel or representative. Provide documentation upon request.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 1000-17
D. Electrically Fused Joints (Acid Waste and Acid Vent ):

1. Fused joints shall be made in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

2. All installers shall undergo training provided by the manufacturer or manufacturer's representative.

3. Follow the manufacturer's cold weather installation procedures.

3.11 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
A. Disinfection of the domestic water piping shall be completed within three (3) weeks prior to building occupancy. Contractor is responsible for disinfecting water piping if used by workers during construction; disinfection during construction does not eliminate the requirement for final disinfection prior to occupancy.

Flushing of piping shall be completed within two (2) weeks prior to building occupancy.

B. Provide necessary connections at the start of individual sections of mains for adding chlorine.

C. Before starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.

D. Follow the disinfection of potable water procedure outlined in this project’s applicable plumbing code. For example: IPC 610.1, UPC 609.10, CPC 609.9, and Illinois 890.1180. Where local codes do not outline a disinfection procedure, follow the International Plumbing Code procedure 610.1.

E. Bleed water from all outlets to ensure chlorine distribution throughout the entire domestic water system.

F. Take water samples, no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 2% of outlets and from water entry.

Obtain, analyz
e, and test samples in accordance with AWWA C651, Section 5 - Verification.

3.12 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide new sanitary and/or storm sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elevations needed for sewer connections, confirm inverts and verify these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing.

B. Provide new water service with water meter with bypass valves. Provide sleeve in wall for service main per Section 22 0529.

END OF SECTION 22 1000
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 1000-18
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES SECTION 22 1030-1
SECTION 22 1030 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cleanouts.

B. Traps.

C. Trap Seals and Primers.

D. Floor Drains and Sinks
E. Hub Drains and Standpipes
F. Strainers.

G. Balancing Valves.

H. Water Hammer Arresters.

I. Dielectric Fittings (Connections Between Dissimilar Metals).

J. Air Vents.

K. Drain Valves.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by same manufacturer throughout.

B. Perform work in accordance with State of California Plumbing Codes and municipality of local area standards.

C. Piping, Fittings, Valves, and Flux for Potable Water Systems: All components shall be lead free per Federal Act S.3874, Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act.

D. Valves for potable water systems shall comply with California Assembly Bill AB1953 limiting lead content. Also described in 2016 CPC: 604.2 Lead Content.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A112.21.1 - Floor Drains.

B. ASSE 1010 - Water Hammer Arresters.

C. ANSI A112.6.3 - Floor and Trench Drains; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

D. ANSI 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers; American Society of Sanitary Engineering.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES SECTION 22 1030-2
E. ANSI 1012 - Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent; American Society of Sanitary Engineering.

F. ASSE 1013 - Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers; American Society of Sanitary Engineering; 1.

G. ASSE 1019 - Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants, Freeze Resistant Automatic Draining Type; American Society of Sanitary Engineering.

H. ASSE 1047 - Reduced Pressure Detector Assemblies.

I. PDI WH-201 - Water Hammer Arresters.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 22 0500.

B. Include sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.

C. Manufacturer shall provide special seismic certification per HCAi CAN 2-1708a.5 with submittal.

Submittals without certification will be returned and not reviewed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS
A. Provide cleanouts as shown and specified on the drawings as well as required by code.

B. Coordinate floor cleanout cover with surrounding floor finish. Provide either solid, recessed for tile or terrazzo or carpet marker as applicable.

C. Cleanouts on exposed pipes shall be cast iron with heavy duty cast brass plug with raised head.

D. Cleanout shall be same size as the pipe up to 6" and 6" for larger pipes.

2.2 YARD CLEANOUTS
A. Provide yard cleanouts as shown and specified on the drawings as well as required by code.

B. Cleanout shall be same size as pipe up to 6" and 6" for larger pipes.

2.3 TRAPS
A. Provide all indivi
dual connections to the sanitary system with P-traps, except where such drains discharge directly into a properly trapped collection basin or sump. Unless otherwise specified or shown, traps shall be:

1. Chromium plated cast brass when used with plumbing fixtures or when installed exposed in finished spaces.

2. Insulated at accessible lavatories.

3. Cast iron, deep-seal pattern where concealed above ceiling, below grade or in unfinished areas.

4. Deep-seal pattern of the same material and/or coating where drainage lines are of special materials or coatings such as polypropylene, PVDF, CPVC, etc.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES SECTION 22 1030-3
B. All traps shall have accessible, removable cleanouts, except where installed on floor drains with removable strainers.

C. Each trap shall be completely filled with water at the end of construction but before building turnover to the Owner. All floor drains, floor sinks, trench drains, etc. shall be filled with water.

2.4 TRAP SEALS AND PRIMERS
A. Provide trap seals as specified on the drawings.

B. Provide trap primers as shown and specified on the drawings.

C. Where trap primers are shown on drawings, coordinate with corresponding floor drains to ensure they include a side inlet connection for the trap primer line.

2.5 FLOOR DRAINS AND SINKS
A. Floor drains and sinks shall be in the form of a receptor with grate/strainer set flush with the surrounding floor.

B. Provide floor drains and sinks as shown and specified on the drawings as well as required by code.

2.6 HUB DRAINS AND STANDPIPES
A. A hub drain shall be in the form of a hub or pipe without a grate/strainer extending through the floor for receiving indirect waste. A hub drain has a flood level rim above the finished floor.

B. Provide hub drains as shown and specified on the drawings as well as required by code.

2.7 STRAINERS
A. Unless otherwise indicated, strainers shall be Y-pattern and have stainless steel screens with perforati
ons as follows:

1. Air:
a. 1/4" - 2": 1/32" perforations
b. 2-1/2" - 10": 3/64" perforations
c. 12" - 18": 1/16" perforations

2. Water:
a. 1/4" - 2": 3/64" perforations
b. 2-1/2" - 10": 1/16" perforations
c. 12" - 18": 1/8" perforations

2.8 UNIONS
A. Copper pipe - wrought copper fitting - ground joint.

B. Black Steel (Schedule 40) Pipe - malleable iron, ground joint, 150 psi, bronze to bronze seat.

C. Galvanized Steel Pipe - galvanized malleable iron, ground joint, 150 psi, bronze to bronze seat.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES SECTION 22 1030-4

2.9 BALANCING VALVE
A. Rated for 125 psi working pressure and 250°°F operating temperature, taps for determining flow with a portable meter, positive shutoff valves for each meter connection, memory feature, tight shutoff, and a permanent pressure drop between 1' and 2' water column at full flow with valve 100% open.

Furnish with molded, removable insulation covers.

B. Provide a nomograph to determine flow from meter reading (and valve position on units which sense pressure across a valve). Graph shall extend below the specified minimum flow.

2.10 BALANCING VALVE WITH FLOW INDICATION
A. Balancing valve with built-in visual flow meter, adjustable flow control with memory stop feature, external temperature gauge, and tight shutoff.

B. Maximum working pressure: 150 psi. Maximum Temperature 230°°F. Maximum differential pressure: 15 psi. Maximum inlet temperature: 195°°F.

C. Low-lead brass valve, stainless steel springs, EPDM seals.

D. Manufacturer shall size balancing valves for the scheduled flow rate. Flow rate shall be measurable on the self-contained visual flow meter.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Calieffi 132 Series

2. Watts CSD (provide with separate external temperature gauge)

2.11 AUTO-THERMOSTATIC ADJUSTABLE BALANCING VALVE
A. Adjustable thermostatic balancing valve for domestic hot water recirculation circuits. Dry well with temperature gauge and probe. Internal thermostatic balancing cartridge automatically modulates flow to ensure constant temperature. Adjustable from 95°°F to 140°°F. Set temperature to 5°°F below system tempe
rature.

B. Sizes: 1/2" and 3/4" with NPT female connections. Flow rating: 2.1 Cv maximum, 0.23 Cv minimum,

0.52 Cv design. Suitable fluid: Water.

C. Maximum working pressure: 230 psi. Maximum differential pressure: 15 psi. Maximum inlet temperature: 195°°F.

D. Low-lead brass valve, stainless steel and copper adjustable thermostatic cartridge, EPDM hydraulic seals, stainless steel springs, adjustment knob with temperature adjustment scale, and tamperproof adjustment locking screw with probe dry-well port with bypass valve for thermal disinfection function with shutoff valve and check valve with temperature gauge. If manufactured unit does not contain integral gauge, Contractor shall install external gauge immediately upstream of unit.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Caleffi Thermosetter 116

2. Acorn TZV-1

3. B&G Temp Setter
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES SECTION 22 1030-5

2.12 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Provide water hammer arresters as shown and specified on the drawings as well as required by code.

B. ANSI A112.26.1; sized and located in accordance with PDI WH-201, precharged for operation between -100°°F and 300°°F and maximum 250 psig working pressure.

2.13 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS (CONNECTIONS BETWEEN DISSIMILAR METALS) A. Connections between dissimilar metals shall be insulating dielectric types that provide a water gap between the connected metals, and that either allow no metal path for electron transfer or that provide a wide water gap lined with a non-conductive material to impede electron transfer through the water path.

B. Joints shall be rated for the temperature, pressure, and other characteristics of the service in which they are used, including testing procedure.

C. Aluminum, iron, steel, brass, copper, bronze, and stainless steel are commonly used and require isolation from each other with the following exceptions:

1. Iron, steel, and stainless steel connected to each other.

2. Brass, copper, and bronze connected to each other.

3. Brass or bronze valves and specialties connected in closed systems with steel, iron, or stainless steel on both sides of the brass or bronze valves and specialties. Where two or more brass or bronze items occur together, they shall be connected with brass nipples. Brass or bronze valves and special
ties cannot be used as a dielectric separation between pipe materials.

D. Dielectric protection is required at connections to equipment of a material different than the piping.

2.14 AIR VENTS
A. Provide means for venting air at all high points in the piping system and at all other points where air may be trapped.

B. At end of main and other points where large volume of air may be trapped - Use 1/4" globe valve, angle type, 125 psi, Crane #89, attached to coupling in top of main, 1/4" discharge pipe turned down with cap.

2.15 DRAIN VALVES
A. Drain valves shall be shutoff valves as specified for the intended service with added 3/4" male hose thread outlet and cap.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION
A. Coordinate construction to receive drains at required invert elevations.

B. Install all items per manufacturer's instructions.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES SECTION 22 1030-6
C. Water Hammer Arresters:

1. Install water hammer arresters in accessible locations. Provide access doors as required.

Coordinate type with Architect/Engineer/Owner.

2. Water hammer arrestors shall be installed in cold and hot water lines upstream of all plumbing fixtures or equipment, with a quick acting valve or multiple quick acting valves. Quick acting valves shall be defined as solenoid actuated valves, manual flush valves, sensor activated faucets and flush valves, squeeze handle spray faucets, and other similar type valves.

3. Install multiple water hammer arrestors in toilet group branch piping greater than 20 feet in developed length from the cold and hot water mains.

D. Cleanouts:

1. Provide cleanouts where shown on the drawings and as required by code, but in no case farther apart than 50 feet in pipe less than 6" size and 100 feet apart in 6" and larger pipes inside the building. Provide cleanouts at bases of all sanitary and storm risers as shown on the drawings and as required by code.

2. Provide a cleanout at the upstream end of a horizontal waste pipe in a plumbing chase serving multiple pluming fixtures; for example a bank of water closets or lavatories.

3. Provide cleanouts on the branch line connected to individual plumbing fixtures as required by code; for exampl
e just below a sink, lavatory or urinal.

4. Extend underfloor cleanouts up to the floor with long sweep elbows.

5. Install a full size, two-way cleanout within 5 feet of the foundation inside or outside of building.

6. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanouts for rodding of drainage system.

7. Wall cleanouts shall be installed above the flow line of the pipe they serve, but no less than 12" above the finished floor.

E. Yard Cleanouts:

1. Install cleanouts on maximum 90 foot centers (including riser) for pipes 8" and smaller.

2. Extend cleanout to grade. Encase cleanout in 5" thick concrete pad extending 6" beyond cleanout, set low enough not to interfere with lawn mowers.

F. Floor Drains and Floor Sinks:

1. Drains in upper floors shall have a flashing of EPDM or similar membrane sheet. The sheet shall be at least 36" X 36" square with the drain in the center. Clamp membrane in auxiliary clamping ring of floor drain.

2. Use alternate sealing method when installing drains in existing floor slabs.

3. Coordinate sloping requirements with the architectural plans and specifications.

4. Top of floor drain and sinks grate/strainer shall not extend above the finished floor eleva tion.

5. Top of floor drain and sink grate/strainer shall not extend above the finished floor elevation.

Grate/strainer shall be installed flush with surrounding finished floor. Should the Plumbing Contractor believe this presents a conflict with code, the issue should be evaluated before installation of the floor drain or sink begins. Proceeding with installing a floor drain or sink raised above the finished floor without prior approval will result in the Contractor being required to remove the drain or sink in question and reinstall it at the approved elevation.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES SECTION 22 1030-7
G. Hub Drains and Standpipes:

1. The top of a hub drain/standpipe shall extend above the finished floor elevation. Refer to drawings for dimensions above the finished floor.

2. Access shall be provided to drains and standpipes for rodding.

H. Balancing Valves:

1. Install balancing valves with straight, unobstructed pipe section both upstream and downstream as required, per manufacturer's installation instructions.

END OF SECTION 22 1030
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES SECTION 22 1030-8
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 TANKS - PLUMBING SECTION 22 1200-1
SECTION 22 1200 - TANKS - PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with State of California Plumbing Codes and municipality of local area standards.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 22 0500. Include manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. For domestic hot water storage tanks, include tank lining instructions.

C. Manufacturer shall provide special seismic certification per HCAI CAN 2-1708a.5 with submittal. Submittals without certification will be returned and not reviewed.

1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Construct pressurized tanks to ASME Code for unfired pressure vessels.

B. Comply with applicable government regulations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDENSER WATER INDOOR SUMP
A. Tank: High density cross-linked polyethylene upright tank rated for 180°F continuous duty.

B. Sides shall be at least 3/8" thick, or as required for height of tank.

C. Design for self-support at full tank conditions.

D. Refer to drawings for size and dimensions.

E. Provide flanged inlets and outlets as shown on the drawings.

F. Manufacturer:

1. Poly-Processing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Support indoor tanks from building structure or construct support stand.

B. Flush and clean fuel tanks prior to delivery to site and keep sealed during construction.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 TANKS - PLUMBING SECTION 22 1200-2
C. Provide all flexible connections required due to tank flex during fill operation.

END OF SECTION 22 1200
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS SECTION 22 1329-1
SECTION 22 1329 - SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Sewage Pumps.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 22 0500.

B. Submit certified pump performance curves with pump and system operating point plotted.

Include NPSH curve when applicable.

C. Pumps with motors operating above the RPM the pump curves are based on shall have impellers trimmed to deliver GPM and head scheduled.

D. Submit electrical power/controls wiring diagrams and product data indicating general assembly, components, safety controls, and service connections.

E. Submit certification that pumps, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 22 0550. Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." F. Manufacturer shall provide special seismic certification with submittal. Submittals without certification will be returned and not reviewed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Statically and dynamically balance rotating parts.

B. Construction shall permit complete servicing without breaking piping or motor connections.

C. Pumps shall operate at 1750 rpm unless specified otherwise.

D. Pump connections shall be flanged, whenever available.

E. Motors shall comply with Section 22 0513.

F. The discharge pipe sizes shall meet or exceed the scheduled pump.

2.2 SEWAGE PUMPS
A. Provide pumps as specified on the drawings.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS SECTION 22 1329-2
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install all products per manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.

C. Support piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.

D. Mount control panel on adjacent wall within required distance for cables and wiring. Provide unistrut mounting frame for the control panel if wall space is not available. Properly anchor frame to floor.

E. Ensure pumps operate at specified fluid temperatures without vapor binding or cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25% of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

F. Pumps shall be factory aligned. If alignment is not satisfactory, as determined by the Architect/Engineer, manufacturer shall provide a factory trained representative to field align the shafts.

G. Suspend non-submersible, vertical sewage pumps from basin/pit covers. Make direct connections to sanitary drainage piping.

H. Set submersible sewage pumps on basin/pit floors. Make direct connections to sanitary drainage piping.

1. Anchor guide-rail supports to basin/pit bottoms and sidewalls or covers. Install pumps so pump and discharge pipe disconnecting flanges make positive seals when pumps are lowered into place.

I. Install sewage pump basins and connect to drainage and vent piping. Brace interior of basins according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent distortion or collapse during concrete placement. Set basin cover and fasten to basin top flange. Install cover so top surface is flush with finished floor.

END OF SECTION 22 1329
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 SUMP PUMPS SECTION 22 1429-1
SECTION 22 1429 - SUMP PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Sump Pumps.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 22 0500.

B. Submit certified pump performance curves with pump and system operating point plotted.

Include NPSH curve when applicable.

C. Pumps with motors operating above the RPM the pump curves are based on shall have impellers trimmed to deliver GPM and head scheduled.

D. Submit electrical power/controls wiring diagrams and product data indicating general assembly, components, safety controls, and service connections.

E. Submit certification that pumps, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 22 0550. Include the following:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Statically and dynamically balance rotating parts.

B. Construction shall permit complete servicing without breaking piping or motor connections.

C. Pumps shall operate at 1750 rpm unless specified otherwise.

D. Pump connections shall be flanged, whenever available.

E. Motors shall comply with Section 22 0513.

F. The discharge pipe sizes shall meet or exceed the scheduled pump.

2.2 SUMP PUMPS
A. Provide pumps as specified on the drawings.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 SUMP PUMPS SECTION 22 1429-2
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install all products per manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance including removal of motors, impellers, couplings and accessories.

C. Support piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.

F. Pumps shall be factory aligned. If alignment is not satisfactory, as determined by the Architect/Engineer, manufacturer shall provide a factory trained representative to field align the shafts.

G. Set submersible sump pumps on basin/pit floor. Make direct connections to storm drainage piping.

H. Install sump pump basins and connect to drainage piping. Brace interior of basins according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent distortion or collapse during concrete placement.

Set basin cover and fasten to basin top flange. Install cover so top surface is flush with finished floor.

END OF SECTION 22 1429
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 22 3000-1
SECTION 22 3000 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Water Heaters.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Products and installation of specified products shall conform to recommendations and requirements of the following organizations:

1. American Gas Association (AGA).

2. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF).

3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).

4. National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NBBPVI).

5. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA).

6. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL).

B. Perform work in accordance with State of California Plumbing Codes and municipality of local area standards.

C. Water Heater Performance Requirements: Equipment efficiency not less than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 when tested in accordance with DOE 10 CFR, ANSI Z21.10.1 and ANSI Z21.10.3.

D. Conform to ASME Section VIII for construction of water heaters and heat exchangers. Provide boilers registered with National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 (latest published edition) - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

C. ANSI/UL 1453 - Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters.

D. ASSE 1005 - Water Heater Drain Valves, 3/4" Iron Pipe Size.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 22 0500.

B. Include dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping.

C. Include heat exchanger dimensions, size of tappings, and performance data.

D. Include dimensions of tanks, tank lini
ng methods, anchors, attachments, lifting points, tappings, and drains.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 22 3000-2
E. For equipment connected to an electric power source, submit short circuit rating (SCCR) of integrated unit.

F. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions including control and electrical power/controls wiring diagrams.

G. Submit manufacturer's certificate that pressure vessels meet or exceed specified requirements.

H. Submit operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number.

I. Submit certification that, water heaters, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 22 0550. Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." J. Submit a current water analysis from the actual water source serving the existing building for softening equipment verification before sending shop drawings to the Architect/Engineer.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Water heaters shall conform to AGA, ANSI/NFPA 54, ANSI/NFPA 70, ANSI/UL 1453 as applicable.

B. Conform to ANSI/ASME Section 8 Division 1 for fabrication of steel pressure vessels.

C. Conform to ANSI/ASME Section 10 for manufacture of fiber-reinforced plastic pressure vessels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER HEATERS
A.

All water heaters shall be as scheduled on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install all items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.2 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A. Install water heaters on concrete bases. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases. Refer to Section 22 0529.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 22 3000-3
B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to drawings, manufacturer's instructions, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

C. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend drain piping full size from relief valve and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain. Discharge pipe material shall be same as domestic water piping.

END OF SECTION 22 3000
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 22 3000-4
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 22 4000-1
SECTION 22 4000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. All plumbing fixtures.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A112.6.1M - Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use.

B. ANSI A112.18.1 - Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings.

C. ANSI A112.19.1M - Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures.

D. ASME A112.19.4 - Porcelain Enameled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures.

E. ANSI A112.19.5 - Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks, and Urinals.

F. AHRI 1010 - Drinking Fountains and Self-Contained Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking Water Coolers.

G. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Title III.

H. The Energy Policy Act (EPAct) of 2005.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 22 0500. Submittals shall include fixture carriers for record purposes only. Architect/Engineer does not review or approve carriers except for manufacturer.

B. Include fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes.

C. For fixtures and trim requiring electrical connections, submit product data indicating general assembly, components, electrical power/controls wiring diagrams, and service connections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DSA FIXTURE REQUIREMENT
A. Plumbing fixtures and accessories provided in a toilet room or bathing room are required to comply with CBC Section 11B-213.2 and shall comply with CBC Section 11B-213.3.

B. Effective March 1, 2017, all single-user toilet facilities shall be identified as Gender-Neutral facilities by a door symbol that complies with CBC Sections 11B-216.8 and 11B-703.2.6.3. No pictogram, text, or braille is required
on the symbol. If tactile jamb signage is provided, the signage shall comply with the appropriate technical requirements of CBC Section 11B-703. Examples of appropriate designations are "ALL- GENDER RESTROOM", "RESTROOM" or "UNISEX RESTROOM". DSA BU 17-01.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 22 4000-2
C. Accessible plumbing fixtures shall comply with all the requirements in CBC Division 6.

D. Clearance around accessible water closets and in toilet compartments shall be 60 inches minimum measured perpendicular from the side wall and 56 inches minimum measured perpendicular from the rear wall per CBC Section 11B-604.4.1.

E. Heights and location of all accessible fixtures shall be mounted according to CBC Sections 11B-602 through 11B-612.

F. Fixture controls shall comply with CBC Sections 11B-601.3 for drinking fountains, 11B-604.6 for water closets, 11B-604.9.5 for children's water closets, 11B-605.4 for urinals, 11B-606.4 for lavatories and sinks, 11B-607.5 for bathtubs, 11B-608.5 for showers, and 11B-611.3 for washing machines and clothes dryers.

G. Accessible sinks shall be 6-1/2" deep maximum. Sinks shall be mounted with the front of the higher of the rim and counter surface 34" maximum above the finish floor or ground.

H. Water supply and drain pipes under lavatories and sinks shall be insulated or otherwise configured to protect against contact. There shall be no sharp or abrasive surfaces under lavatories and sinks. CBC Section 11B-606.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Wall Hung Fixture Carriers:

1. Material: All Metal, ASME/ANSI A112.6.1M.

2. Manufacturers:
a. Zurn
b. JR Smith
c. Wade
d. Josam
e. Watts
f. Mifab
g. Sun Drainage Products
h. Sioux Chief
B. All fixtures shall be as scheduled on the drawings.

All lavatory and sink trim shall be from the same manufacturer where possible.

D. All fixtures shall be lead free. Faucets, traps, stops, and other fixture accessories shall not contain more lead than allowed per the latest State or Federal Act.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General Installation Requirements:

1. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation.

2. Install each fixture with trap easily removable for servicing and cleaning. Use screwed tailpiece couplings. Connect fixture waste to stack with slip fitting.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 22 4000-3

3. Provide fixtures with supply lines, stop valves, reducers, escutcheons, and any other items required for a complete and operational plumbing fixture assembly.

4. Install components level and plumb.

5. Caulk joint between finish floor and floor mounted fixtures and between finish walls and wall mounted fixtures with silicon caulk. Caulk the joint, between rim and fixture where a fixture builds into a counter top, with caulking compound. Refer to DIVISION 7 for "Caulking" requirements.

Color to match fixture.

6. Where there is a possibility of water following pipe brackets, etc., into a wall; caulk escutcheons, space around brackets, etc., to exclude water. Refer to DIVISION 7 for "Caulking" requirements.

7. Refer to Plumbing Material List for fixture mounting heights.

8. All non-potable outlets shall be clearly marked with a permanently affixed laminated sign with 3/8" high lettering saying "Non-Potable Water Not for Human Consumption." Sign shall have black lettering on a yellow background.

B. Wall-Mounted Fixture Requirements:

1. All wall-mounted fixtures shall have compatible carriers designed for their intended service and suitable for the space available and configuration of fixtures. All carriers shall extend to the floor and be anchored to the slab as intended by the carrier manufacturer.

C. Floor-Mounted Fixture Requirements:

1. Where floor mounted fixtures are installed on a sloped floor, the open void below the fixture shall be grouted, level
ed, and caulked to eliminate stress on the fixture and to prevent water migration to the floor below.

D. Exposed or Inside Accessible Cabinets Traps, Valve and Pipe Requirements:

1. All traps exposed under fixtures or inside accessible cabinets shall be chrome plated brass.

2. All water or waste piping for plumbing fixtures that is exposed or inside cabinets shall be chrome plated.

3. All exposed flush valves for water closets and urinals shall have a chrome plated hanger to anchor the piping to the wall.

4. All exposed water supply piping and fittings in a finished space to a shower valve, hose bibb, or other water outlet shall be chrome plated.

E. ADA Accessible Exposed Sink and Lavatory Trim:

1. All exposed sink and lavatory traps, piping and angle stops installed at accessible sink and lavatory locations shall include offset style drain tailpiece, p-trap installed near and parallel with back wall, and insulation kit specially manufactured for this installation. Armaflex with duct tape is not acceptable.

F. ADA Accessible Water Closet Requirements:

1. Handicapped accessible water closet flush valve or flush tank handles shall be on the left hand or right hand side of the fixture, whichever is nearer
to the center of the stall.

2. Coordinate flush valves in handicap accessible locations with grab bars installed by the General Contractor. Make modifications as necessary to flush valve piping to avoid conflict with grab bars.

Common solutions include shortened or offset vacuum breaker tailpieces.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 22 4000-4

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow.

B. At completion, clean plumbing fixtures, equipment, and faucet aerator screens.

3.3 FIXTURE ROUGH-IN SCHEDULE
A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with table on plumbing drawings of minimum sizes for particular fixtures.

END OF SECTION 22 4000
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500-1
SECTION 23 0500 - BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Requirements applicable to all Division 23 Sections. Also refer to Division 01 - General Requirements.

B. All materials and installation methods shall conform to the applicable standards, guidelines and codes referenced herein and within each specification section.

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Specification and the associated drawings govern the furnishing, installing, testing and placing into satisfactory operation the Mechanical Systems.

C. Scope of Work:

1. Plumbing Work: Refer to Section 22 0500 "Basic Plumbing Requirements". a. Furnish and install refrigerant piping, accessories, and final charge of refrigerant. b. Furnish and install condensate drain piping from cooling related equipment such as air handlers and cooling coil drain pans.
c. Furnish and install seismic restraint and equipment designed for use in seismic conditions described in Section 23 0550.
d. Furnish and install
firestopping systems for penetrations of fire-rated construction associated with this Contractor's work.

2. Air Conditioning and Ventilating Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to:
a. Furnish and install package indoor air handling units complete with dampers, filters, coils, fans, and motors.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500-2
b. Furnish and install air-cooled condensing units and curbs. c. Furnish and install complete supply air ductwork systems including all fittings, insulation, and outlets.
d. Furnish and install complete return air ductwork systems including all fittings, insulation, and inlets.
e. Furnish and install complete exhaust ductwork systems including all fittings, insulation, inlets, and fans.
f. Furnish and install mechanical room ventilation systems including louvers, ductwork, insulation, and fans.
g. Furnish and install all temperature control systems. h. Furnish and install all fire dampers.
i. Furnish and install seismic restraint and equipment designed for use in seismic conditions described in Section 23 0550.
j. Furnish and install firestopping systems for penetrations of fire-rated construction associated with this Contractor's work.

3. Temperature Control Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to:
a. Furnish and install a complete temperature control system as specified in Section 23 0900.
b. Temperature control system shall consist of a full Direct Digital Control (DDC) system including all accessories, sensors, and programming. c. Furnish automatic control valves and dampers for installation by others. d. Furnish and install seismic restraint and equipment designed for use in seismic conditions described in Section 23 0550.
e. Furnish and install firestopping systems for penetrations of fire-rated construction associated with this Contractor's work.

4. Fire Protection Work: Refer to Section 21 0500 "Basic Fire Suppression Requirements".

5. Testing, Adjusting, and Balanc
ing Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to:
a. Furnish complete testing, adjusting, and balancing as specified in Section 23 0593, including, but not limited to, air systems, hydronic systems, plumbing systems, and verification of control systems.
b. Complete all applicable tests, certifications, forms, and matrices

1.4 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A. The following items shall be relocated, installed and/or connected by this Contractor:

1.5 WORK SEQUENCE
A. All work that will produce excessive noise or interference with normal building operations, as determined by the Owner, shall be scheduled with the Owner. It may be necessary to schedule such work during unoccupied hours. The Owner reserves the right to determine when restricted construction hours will be required.

B. Schedule overtime for the following work:

C. Itemize all work and list associated hours and pay scale for each item.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500-3

1.6 DIVISION OF WORK BETWEEN MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL & CONTROL

CONTRACTORS
A. Definitions:

3. Control devices such as start-stop push buttons, thermostats, pressure switches, flow switches, relays, etc., generally represent the types of equipment associated with motor control wiring.

5. Temperature Control Wiring: The wiring associated with the operation of a motorized damper, solenoid valve or motorized valve, etc., either modulating or two-position, as opposed to wiring which direct
ly powers or controls a motor used to drive equipment such as fans, pumps, etc.
a. This wiring will be from a 120 volt source and may continue as 120 volt, or be reduced in voltage (24 volt) in which case a control transformer shall be furnished as part of the temperature control wiring.

6. Control Motor: An electric device used to operate dampers, valves, etc. It may be two- position or modulating. Conventional characteristics of such a motor are 24 volts, 60 cycles, 1 phase, although other voltages may be encountered.

7. Voltage is generally specified and scheduled as distribution voltage. Motor submittals may be based on utilization voltage if it corresponds to the correct distribution voltage.

Distribution/Nominal Voltage Utilization Voltage
120 115
208 200
240 230
277 265
480 460
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500-4
B. General:

Materials and install
ation to conform to Class 1 or 2 requirements, California Electrical Code Article 725.

C. Mechanical Contractor's Responsibility:

1. Assumes responsibility for internal wiring of all equipment provided by the Mechanical Contractor, for example:
a. Boiler Feed Pumps.
b. Burners.
c. Chillers.
d. Computer Room Air Conditioning Units.
e. Condensate Return Stations.
f. Condensing Units.
g. Makeup Air Units.
h. Electric Humidifiers.
i. Gas Trains.
j. Package Air Handling Units.
k. Packaged Rooftop Units.

2. Assumes all responsibility for the Temperature Control wiring, when the Temperature Control Contractor is a Subcontractor to the Mechanical Contractor.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500-5

D. Electrical Contractor's Responsibility:

2. Installs and wires all remote control devices furnished by the Mechanical Contractor or Temperature Control Contractor when so noted on the Electrical Drawings.

3. Provides motor control and temperature control wiring, where so noted on the drawings.

4. Coordinate with the Mechanic
al Contractor for size of motors and/or other electrical devices involved with repair or replacement of existing equipment.

5. Furnishes, installs and connects all relays, etc., for automatic shutdown of certain fans upon actuation of the Fire Alarm System as indicated and specified in Division 28.

1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Definitions:

1.5" (40 mm) and larger, conduit racks, cable trays, pull boxes, transformers, raceway, busway, lighting, ceiling-mounted devices, and any item that may impact coordination with other discipli
nes.
c. Technology trades shall include, but are not limited to, technology equipment, racks, conduit 1.5" (40 mm) and larger, conduit racks, cable trays, ladder rack, pull boxes, raceway, ceiling-mounted devices, and any item that may impact coordination with other disciplines.
d. Maintenance clearances and code-required dedicated space shall be included.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500-6
e. The coordination drawings shall include all underground, underfloor, in-floor, in chase, and vertical trade items.

2. Spaces with open/cloud ceiling architecture shall indicate the overhead utilities and locate equipment as required to maintain clearance above lights. The intent for the installation is to maintain a maximum allowable vertical clearance and an organized/clean manner in the horizontal. Notify Architect/Engineer of the maximum clearance which can be maintained.

Failure to comply will result in modifications with no cost to Owner. a. In cloud ceiling architecture, when open cabling/wire and/or cable tray crosses gaps between ceiling clouds and/or walls, cabling is to transition to conduits to span the gaps in order to conceal cabling from below.

B. Participation:

1. The contractors and subcontractors responsible for work defined above shall participate in the coordination drawing process.

2. One contractor shall be designated as the Coordinating Contractor for purposes of preparing a complete set of composite electronic CAD coordination drawings that include all applicable trades, and for coordinating the activities related to this process. The Coordinating Contract
or for this project shall be the Mechanical Contractor. a. The Coordinating Contractor shall utilize personnel familiar with requirements of this project and skilled as draftspersons/CAD operators, competent to prepare the required coordination drawings.

3. Electronic CAD drawings shall be submitted to the Coordinating Contractor for addition of work by other trades. IMEG will provide electronic file copies of applicable drawings for contractor's use if the contractor signs and returns an "Electronic File Transfer" waiver provided by IMEG. IMEG will not consider blatant reproductions of original file copies an acceptable alternative for coordination drawings.

C. Drawing Requirements:

1. The file format and file naming convention shall be coordinated with and agreed to by all contractors participating in the coordination process and the Owner. a. Scale of drawings:
1) General plans: 1/4 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
2) Mechanical, electrical, communication rooms, and including the surrounding areas within 10 feet: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
3) Shafts and risers: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
4) Sections of shafts and mechanical and electrical equipment rooms: 1/4 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
5) Sections of congested areas: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500-7

2. Ductwork layout drawings shall be the baseline system for other components. Ductwork layout drawings shall be modified to accommodate other components as the coordination process progresses.

3. There may be more drawings required for risers, top and bottom levels of mechanical rooms, and shafts.

D. General:

2. A plotted set of coordination drawings shall be available at the project site.

3. Coordination drawings are not shop drawings and shall not be submitted as such.

5. The contractors will not be allowed additional costs or time extensions due to participation in the coordinat
ion process.

8. Changes to the contract documents that are necessary for systems installation and coordination shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer.

9. Access panels shall preferably occur only in gypsum board walls or plaster ceilings where indicated on the drawings.
a. Access to mechanical, electrical, technology, and other items located above the ceiling shall be through accessible lay-in ceiling tile areas. b. Potential layout changes shall be made to avoid additional access panels. c. Additional access panels shall not be allowed without written approval from the Architect/Engineer at the coordination drawing stage.
d. Providing additional access panels shall be considered after other alternatives are reviewed and discarded by the Architect/Engineer and the Owner's Representative. e. When additional access panels are required, they shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner.

10. Complete the coordination drawing process and obtain sign off of the drawings by all contractors prior to installing any of the components.

12. Updated coordination drawings that reflect as-built conditions may be used as record documents.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500-8

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor's Responsibility Prior to Submitting Pricing Data:

B. Qualifications:

1. Only products of reputable manufacturers are acceptable.

2. All Contractors and subcontractors shall employ only workers skilled in their trades.

C. Compliance with Codes, Laws, Ordinances:

1. Conform to all requirements of the Sacramento CA] of 2022 Codes, Laws, Ordinances and other regulat
ions having jurisdiction.

2. Conform to all published standards of ASHRAE.

3. Conform to all State Codes.

4. If there is a discrepancy between the codes and regulations and these specifications, the Architect/Engineer shall determine the method or equipment used.

5. If the Contractor notes, at the time of bidding, that any parts of the drawings or specifications do not comply with the codes or regulations, Contractor shall inform the Architect/Engineer in writing, requesting a clarification. If there is insufficient time for this procedure, Contractor shall submit with the proposal a separate price to make the system comply with the codes and regulations.

6. All changes to the system made after letting of the contract, to comply with codes or requirements of Inspectors, shall be made by the Contractor without cost to the Owner.

7. If there is a discrepancy between manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications, the manufacturer's recommendations shall govern.

8. All rotating shafts and/or equipment shall be completely guarded from all contact. Partial guards and/or guards that do not meet all applicable OSHA standards are not acceptable.

Contractor is responsible for providing this guarding if it is not provided with the equipment supplied.

D. Permits, Fees, Taxes, Inspections:

1. Procure all applicable permits and licenses.

2. Abide by all laws, regulations, ordinances, and other rules of the State or Political Subdivision where the work is done, or as required by any duly constituted public authority.

3. Pay all charges for permits or licenses.

4. Pay all fees and taxes imposed by the State, Municipal and/or other regulatory bodies.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500-9

5. Pay all charges arising out of required inspections by an authorized body.

6. Pay all charges arising out of required contract document reviews associated with the project and as initiated by the Owner or authorized agency/consultant.

7. Where applicable, all fixtures, equipment and materials shall be approved or listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.

E. Utility Company Requirements:

1. Secure from the appropriate private or public utility company all applicable requirements.

2. Comply with all utility company requirements.

3. Make application for and pay for service connections, such as gas.

4. Make application for and pay for all meters and metering systems required by the utility company.

F. Examination of Drawings:

1. The drawings for the mechanical work are completely diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of the work and to indicate the general arrangements and locations of equipment, outlets, etc., and the approximate sizes of equipment.

2. Contractor shall determine the exact locations of equipment and rough-ins, and the exact routing of pipes and ducts to best fit the layout of the job.

3. Scaling of the drawings is not sufficient or accurate for determining these locations.

4. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated arrangements and locations, such changes shall be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

5. Because of the scale of the drawings, certa
in basic items, such as fittings, boxes, valves,
unions, etc., may not be shown, but where required by other sections of the specifications or required for proper installation of the work, such items shall be furnished and installed.

6. If an item is either on the drawings or in the specifications, it shall be included in this contract.

8. Where used in mechanical documents, the word "furnish" shall mean supply for use, the word "install" shall mean connect complete and ready for operation, and the word "provide" shall mean to supply for use and connect complete and ready for operation. a. Any item listed as furnished shall also be installed, unless otherwise noted. b. Any item listed as installed shall also be furnished, unless otherwise noted.

G. Field Measurements:

1. Verify all pertinent dimensions at the job site before ordering any materials or fabricating any supports, pipes or ducts.

H. Electronic Media/Files:

1. Construction drawings for this project have been prepared utilizing Revit.

2. Contractors and Subcontractors may request electronic media files of the contrac t drawings
and/or copies of the specifications. Specifications will be provided in PDF format.

3. Upon request for electronic media, the Contractor shall complete and return a signed "Electronic File Transmittal" form provided by IMEG.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500-10

5. The electronic contract documents can be used for preparation of shop drawings and as-built drawings only. The information may not be used in whole or in part for any other project.

6. The drawings prepared by IMEG for bidding purposes may not be used directly for ductwork layout drawings or coordination drawings.

1.9 WEB-BASED PROJECT SOFTWARE
A. The General Contractor shall provide a web-based project software site for the purpose of hosting and managing project communication and documentation until completion of the warranty phase.

B. The web-based project software shall include, at a minimum, the following features: construction schedule, submittals, RFIs, ASIs, construction change direct ives, change orders, drawing
management, specification management, payment applications, contract modifications, meeting minutes, construction progress photos.

C. Provide web-based project software user licenses for use by the Architect/Engineer. Access will be provided from the start of the project through the completion of the warranty phase.

1.10 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be required for the following items, and for additional items where required elsewhere in the specifications or on the drawings.

1. Submittals List:

Referenced Specification
Section Submittal Item
23 05 00 Owner Training Agenda
23 05 03 Fire Seal Systems
23 05 05 HVAC Demolition for Remodeling
23 05 13 Motors
23 05 29 Hangers and Supports
23 05 48 Vibration Isolation Equipment
23 05 53 HVAC Identification
23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
23 07 13 Duct Insulation
23 07 19 HVAC Pipe Insulation
23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC
23 09 00 Controls
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500-11
23 23 00 Refrigeration Piping and Specialties
23 31 00 Ductwork
23 33 00 Duct Silencers
23 34 23 Prefabricated Curbs
23 37 00 Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers
23 40 00 Filters and Filter Systems
23 62 13 Condensing Units
23 81 26 Split System Air Conditioning Units
23 81 45 Variable Refrigerant Flow Heat Pumps
B. General Submittal Procedures: In addition to the provisions of Division 01, the following are required:

1. Transmittal: Each transmittal shall include the following:
a. Date
b. Project title and number
c. Contractor's name and address
d. Division of work (e.g., plumbing, heating, ventilating, etc.) e. Description of items submitted and relevant specification number f. Notations of deviations from the contract documents
g. Other pertinent data

3. Composition:
a. Submittals shall be submitted using specification sections and the project nomenclature for each item.
b. Individual submittal packages shall be prepared for items in each specification section. All items within a single specification section shall be packaged together where possible. An individual submittal may contain items from multiple specifications sections if the items are intimately linked (e.g., pumps and motors). c. All sets shall contain an index of the items enclosed with a general topic description on the cover.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500-12

4. Content: Submittals shall include all fabrication, erection, layout, and setting drawings; manufacturers' standard drawings; schedules; descriptive literature, catalogs and brochures; performance and test data; electrical power criteria (e.g., voltage, phase, amps, horsepower, kW, etc.) wiring and control diagrams; Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR); dimensions; shipping and operating weights; shipping splits; service clearances; and all other drawings and descriptive data of materials of construction as may be required to show that the materials, equipment or systems and the location thereof conform to the requirements of the contract documents.

5. Contractor's Approval Stamp:
a. The Contractor shall thoroughly review and approve all shop drawings before submitting them to the Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall stamp, date and sign each submittal certifying it has been reviewed.
b. Unstamped submittals will be rejected.
c. The Contractor's review shall include, but not be limited to, verification of the following:
1) Only approved manufacturers are used.
2) Addenda items have been incorporated.
3) Catalog numbers and options match those specified.
4) Performance data matches that specified.
5) Electrical characteristics and loads match those specified. 6) Equipment connection locations, sizes, capacities, etc. have been coordinated with other affected trades.
7) Dimensions and service clearances are suitable for the intended location. 8) Equipment dimensions are coordinated with support steel, housekeeping pads, openings, etc.
9)
Constructability issues are resolved (e.g., weights and dimensions are suitable for getting the item into the building and into place, sinks fit into countertops, etc.).
d. The Contractor shall review, stamp and approve all subcontractors' submittals as described above.
e. The Contractor's approval stamp is required on all submittals. Approval will indicate the Contractor's review of all material and a complete understanding of exactly what is to be furnished. Contractor shall clearly mark all deviations from the contract documents on all submittals. If deviations are not marked by the Contractor, then the item shall be required to meet all drawing and specification requirements.

7. Schedule submittals to expedite the project. Coordinate submission of related items.

8. Identify variations from the contract documents and product or system limitations that may be detrimental to the successful performance of the completed work.

9. Reproduction of contrac
t documents alone is not acceptable for submittals.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500-13

10. Incomplete submittals will be rejected without review. Partial submittals will only be reviewed with prior approval from the Architect/Engineer.

11. Submittals not required by the contract documents may be returned without review.

13. Submittals shall be reviewed and approved by the Architect/Engineer before releasing any equipment for manufacture or shipment.

14. Contractor's responsibility for errors, omissions. or deviation from the contract documents in submittals is not relieved by the Architect/Engineer's approval.

1.11 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. The requirements herein are in addition to the provisions of Division 01.

B. Format:

1. Use AIA Document Continuation Sheets G703 or another similar form approved by the Owner and Architect/Engineer.

2. Submit in Excel format.

3. Support values given with substantiating data.

C. Preparation:

2. Break down all costs into:
a. Material: Delivered cost of product with taxes paid. b. Labor: Labor cost, excluding overhead and profit.

3. Itemize the cost for each of the following:
a. Overhead and profit.
b. Bonds.
c. Insurance.
d. General Requirements: Itemize all requirements.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500-14

4. For each line item having an installed cost of more than $5,000, break down costs to list major products or operations under each item. At a minimum, provide material and labor cost line items for the following:
a. Each piece of equipment requiring shop drawings (e.g., each air handling unit, pump, exhaust fan, etc.). Use the equipment nomenclature (AHU-1, P-1, EF-1, etc.) on the Schedule of Values.
b. Each type of small unitary equipment (e.g., FCUs, UHs, CABs, etc.). Multiple units of the same type can be listed together, provided quantities are also listed so unit costs can be determined.
c. Each piping system (chilled water, heating water, steam, condensate, etc.). In addition, for larger projects, break down the material and labor for each piping system based on geography (building, floor, and/or wing).
d. Each duct system (supply, return, relief, outside air, etc.) listed separately for each unit they serve (AHU-1 supply air ductwork, AHU-1 return air ductwork, etc.). e. Pipe insulation with separate material and labor line items for each piping system listed above.
f. Duct insulation with separate material and labor line items for each duct system listed above.
g. Temperature controls broken down into material and labor for the following:
1) Engineering
2) Controllers, devices, sensors, etc.
3) Control valves
4)
Control dampers
5) Conduit
6) Wiring
7) Programming
8) Commissioning
h. Site utilities (5' beyond building)
i. Seismic design
j. Air balancing
k. Water balancing
l. Commissioning
m. Record drawings
n. Punchlist and closeout
D. Update Schedule of Values when:

1. Indicated by Architect/Engineer.

2. Change of subcontractor or supplier occurs.

3. Change of product or equipment occurs.

1.12 CHANGE ORDERS
A. A detailed material and labor takeoff shall be prepared for each change order, along with labor rates and markup percentages. Change orders shall be broken down by sheet or associated individual line item indicated in the change associated narrative, whichever provides the most detailed breakdown. Change orders with inadequate breakdown will be rejected.

B. Itemized pricing with unit cost shall be provided from all distributors and associated subcontractors.

1.13 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS' INSPECTION
A. The following equipment shall not be placed in operation until a competent installation and service representative of the manufacturer has inspected the installation and certified that the equipment is properly installed, adjusted and lubricated; that preliminary operating instructions have been given; and that the equipment is ready for operation:

1. Air Cooled Condensers

2. Base Mounted Pumps

3. Boilers, Burners and Boiler Trim

4. Computer Room Units

5. Condensing Units

6. Cooling Towers

7. Gas Fired Makeup Air Units

8. Fire Seal Systems

9. Fluid Coolers

10. Seismic Restraints and Equipment Bracing

11. Water Chillers
B. Contractor shall arrange for and obtain supplier's on-site inspection(s) at proper time(s) to assure each phase of equipment installation and/or connection is in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

C. Submit copies of start-up reports to the Architect/Engineer and include copies of Owner's Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

1.14 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING & MAINTENANCE
A. Exercise care in transporting and handling to avoid damage to materials. Store materials on the site to prevent damage. Keep materials clean, dry and free from harmful conditions. Immediately remove any materials that become wet or that are suspected of becoming contaminated with mold or other organisms.

B. Protect equipment, components, and openings with airtight covers and exercise care at every stage
of storage, handling, and installation of equipment to prevent airborne dust and dirt from entering or fouling equipment to include, but not limited to:

1. Motor windings.

2. Bearings.

3. Pipe connections.

4. Duct connections.

5. Starter and control cabinets.

6. Heat transfer coil fins.

D. Keep all bearings properly lubricated and all belts properly tensioned and aligned.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500-16
E. Coordinate the installation of heavy and large equipment with the General Contractor and/or Owner. If the Mechanical Contractor does not have prior documented experience in rigging and lifting similar equipment, he/she shall contract with a qualified lifting and rigging service that has similar documented experience. Follow all equipment lifting and support guidelines for handling and moving.

1.15 NETWORK / INTERNET CONNECTED EQUIPMENT
A. These specifications may require certain equipment or systems to have network, Internet and/or remote access capability ("Network Capability"). Any requirement for Network Capability shall be interpreted only as a functional capability and is not to be construed as authority to connect or enable any Network Capability. Network Capability may only be connected or enabled with the express written consent of the Owner.

1.16 WARRANTY
A. Provide one-year warranty, unless otherwise noted, to the Owner for all fixtures, equipment, materials, and workmanship.

B. The warranty period for all work in this Division of the specifications shall commence on the date of final acceptance, unless a whole or partial system or any separate piece of equipment or
component is put into use for the benefit of any party other than the installing contractor with prior written authorization. In this instance, the warranty period shall commence on the date when such whole system, partial system or separate piece of equipment or component is placed in operation and accepted in writing by the Owner.

C. Warranty requirements shall extend to correction, without cost to the Owner, of all Work found to be defective or nonconforming to the contract documents. The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting all damage resulting from defects or nonconformance with contract documents.

1.17 INSURANCE
A. Contractor shall maintain insurance coverage as set forth in Division 0 of these specifications.

1.18 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTION
A. Where several manufacturers' names are given, the scheduled manufacturer is the basis for job design and establishes the quality required.

Sacramento City CouncilFebruary 4, 2025

Sacramento City Council
February 4, 2025